User's Guide

TEMS Discovery Device 10.0

 Contents
1 Getting Started 1
1.1 Contact Information..............................................................................................1
1.2 TEMS Discovery Startup Window........................................................................2
1.3 System Requirements............................................................................................3
1.3.1 Software Requirements.......................................................................................3
1.3.2 Hardware Requirements.....................................................................................4
1.3.2.1 Hardware Requirements – TEMS Discovery Professional . 4
1.3.2.2 Hardware Requirements – TEMS Discovery Enterprise...............4
1.4 Terminology..........................................................................................................6
1.5 Data Archive vs. Export vs. Sharing......................................................................7
1.6 A Few Tips............................................................................................................8
1.7 Demo Documents..................................................................................................8
1.8 Demo Project.......................................................................................................10
1.9 Walk-U-Through.................................................................................................11
1.10 Creating Projects from Scratch............................................................................13
1.11 Get Your Algorithm Working.............................................................................15
1.12 Generate Reports As You Wish...........................................................................16

2 Overview 17
2.1 Main Window......................................................................................................17
2.1.1 Data List and Progress Log Panel.....................................................................18
2.1.2 Data Explorer Panel..........................................................................................18
2.1.3 Synchronizable and Summary View Panel......................................................18
2.2 Menu Bar.............................................................................................................19
2.2.1 File Menu..........................................................................................................19
2.2.2 Views Menu......................................................................................................19
2.2.3 Tools Menu.......................................................................................................20
2.2.4 Configuration Menu.........................................................................................20
2.2.5 Statistic Menu...................................................................................................21
2.2.6 Help Menu........................................................................................................21
2.3 Main Toolbar.......................................................................................................22

3 Data List and Progress Log 23

3.1 Document List.....................................................................................................23
3.2 Project List..........................................................................................................24
3.2.1 Project List – File/Device Listing Filter...........................................................25
3.2.2 Project List Toolbar..........................................................................................26
3.2.3 Project List Pop-up Menus...............................................................................26
3.2.4 Project Properties..............................................................................................30
3.2.4.1 Project Properties – GIS Settings................................................31
3.2.4.2 Project Properties – UDR Configuration.....................................33
3.2.4.3 Project Properties – Cell Configuration......................................34
3.2.5 Open Project.....................................................................................................35
3.2.6 Delete Project...................................................................................................35
3.2.7 TEMS Discovery Peers....................................................................................36
3.3 GIS List...............................................................................................................37

User's Guide Contents 

 3.4 Task Window......................................................................................................39
3.5 Message Log.......................................................................................................40
3.6 ADP Management Window.................................................................................40

4 Main Project Windows 41

4.1 Data Explorer......................................................................................................41
4.1.1 Dataset..............................................................................................................41
4.1.1.1 Dataset Toolbar...........................................................................42
4.1.1.2 Color Scheme..............................................................................43
4.1.1.3 Dataset Options...........................................................................44
4.1.1.4 Dataset Pop-up Menus.................................................................49
4.1.1.5 Static Composite Dataset.............................................................65
4.1.1.6 Modify Dynamic Composite Dataset Scope...............................67
4.1.1.7 Dataset Group..............................................................................68
4.1.2 Cells..................................................................................................................69
4.1.2.1 Cells Toolbar...............................................................................70
4.1.2.2 Cells Pop-up Menus....................................................................70
4.1.3 GIS/Coverage Map...........................................................................................75
4.1.3.1 GIS Categories............................................................................75
4.1.3.2 GIS Pop-up Menus......................................................................78
4.1.3.3 Download Online GIS Data Source............................................80
4.1.3.4 UDR Attribute Browser...............................................................81
4.2 Synchronizable Views.........................................................................................83
4.2.1 Messages View.................................................................................................84
4.2.1.1 Messages View Toolbars.............................................................85
4.2.1.2 Display Messages........................................................................86
4.2.1.3 Navigate Messages......................................................................86
4.2.1.4 Filter Messages............................................................................86
4.2.1.5 Message Flow Diagram...............................................................87
4.2.2 Map View.........................................................................................................89
4.2.2.1 Map View Toolbar......................................................................89
4.2.2.2 Dataset in Map View...................................................................94
4.2.2.3 Cells in Map View.......................................................................95
4.2.2.4 GIS in Map View........................................................................98
4.2.2.5 Cell Radius Analysis...................................................................99
4.2.2.6 Terrain Profile...........................................................................101
4.2.2.7 Reposition Waypoints...............................................................102
4.2.2.8 3D Map View............................................................................103
4.2.2.9 Layer/View Options..................................................................105
4.2.2.10 Create Output............................................................................120
4.2.3 Time Chart......................................................................................................128
4.2.3.1 Time Chart Pop-up Menu..........................................................128
4.2.3.2 Time Chart Toolbar...................................................................128
4.2.3.3 Time Chart View Options.........................................................131
4.2.4 Metric Correlation..........................................................................................132
4.2.4.1 Correlation View Toolbar.........................................................134
4.2.5 Table View.....................................................................................................136
4.2.6 Point Detail View...........................................................................................139
4.2.7 Instant Chart...................................................................................................142
4.2.8 Google Earth...................................................................................................145
4.2.8.1 Google Earth Toolbar................................................................147

iv  User's Guide
 4.2.8.2 Google Earth View Options......................................................148
4.2.8.3 Download GIS Data – Google Map..........................................148
4.2.9 Bing Map........................................................................................................150
4.2.9.1 Bing Map Toolbar.....................................................................151
4.2.9.2 Download GIS Data – Bing Map..............................................151
4.2.10 Wave View.....................................................................................................152
4.3 Legend View.....................................................................................................154
4.4 Summary Data Views........................................................................................156
4.4.1 Histogram.......................................................................................................156
4.4.1.1 Histogram Toolbar....................................................................157
4.4.1.2 Histogram View Options...........................................................158
4.4.2 Batch PDF View.............................................................................................160
4.4.3 Problem Summary View................................................................................160
4.4.4 Sector Statistics View.....................................................................................163
4.4.5 Multi-dimension Statistic View......................................................................164

5 Tools 167
5.1 Script Builder....................................................................................................168
5.1.1 Script Editor & Private Functions Editor.......................................................169
5.1.2 Data Object: Metric List.................................................................................170
5.1.3 Data Object: RRC IEs.....................................................................................171
5.1.4 Data Object: Threshold...................................................................................172
5.1.5 Built-in Flags..................................................................................................173
5.1.5.1 CONDITION_FLAG................................................................173
5.1.5.2 TARGET_VALUE....................................................................173
5.1.5.3 EVENT......................................................................................173
5.1.5.4 EVENT_TIMESTAMP.............................................................174
5.1.5.5 EVENT_TYPE..........................................................................174
5.1.5.6 MESSAGE................................................................................174
5.1.5.7 MESSAGE_INDEX..................................................................175
5.1.5.8 EOF...........................................................................................175
5.1.5.9 TIMESTAMP............................................................................175
5.1.5.10 LOG_FILE_NAME...................................................................175
5.1.5.11 IS_NEMO_DATA....................................................................176
5.1.5.12 IS_TEMS_DATA......................................................................176
5.1.5.13 IS_QVOICE_DATA.................................................................176
5.1.5.14 IS_QVOICE_MASTER............................................................176
5.1.5.15 IS_QVOICE_SLAVE...............................................................177
5.1.5.16 IS_JDSU_DATA.......................................................................177
5.1.5.17 QVOICE_MASTER_END_TIMESTAMP..............................177
5.1.5.18 QVOICE_SLAVE_END_TIMESTAMP..................................177
5.1.5.19 TIMESTAMP_START_OF_FILE............................................177
5.1.6 Built-in User-defined Functions.....................................................................178
5.1.6.1 ClearAllEvents..........................................................................178
5.1.6.2 ClearEvent:................................................................................179
5.1.6.3 ReplaceEvent:............................................................................179
5.1.6.4 AddEvent...................................................................................180
5.1.6.5 AssignMetricValue....................................................................180
5.1.6.6 ReplaceMetricValue..................................................................181
5.1.6.7 GetLatLon.................................................................................181
5.1.6.8 IsValueValidStatic....................................................................182

User's Guide Contents 

 5.1.6.9 IsValueValid..............................................................................182
5.1.6.10 GetDeviceAttribute...................................................................182
5.1.6.11 SetDeviceAttribute....................................................................183
5.1.6.12 GetWcdmaUarfcnIndex.............................................................183
5.1.6.13 ElementNotContain...................................................................183
5.1.6.14 ElementMissing.........................................................................184
5.1.6.15 FindPairValue............................................................................184
5.1.6.16 MaxOfArrayList:.......................................................................184
5.1.6.17 CountOfArrayList:....................................................................185
5.1.6.18 IsIdentical..................................................................................185
5.1.6.19 IsIdenticalIgnoreOrder..............................................................185
5.1.6.20 IsIdenticalFloatArray................................................................185
5.1.6.21 GetDisplayString.......................................................................186
5.1.6.22 ArrayListContains:....................................................................186
5.1.6.23 ArrayListIndexOf......................................................................186
5.1.6.24 SameMemberInt:.......................................................................186
5.1.6.25 ConvertToInt:............................................................................187
5.1.6.26 ConvertToDateString................................................................187
5.1.6.27 ConvertToTimeString...............................................................187
5.1.6.28 ConvertToDateTimeString........................................................188
5.1.6.29 ExtractNumericValue................................................................188
5.1.6.30 GetSectorParameter...................................................................189
5.1.6.31 GetSectorParameters.................................................................190
5.1.6.32 GetOperatorByMncMcc............................................................191
5.1.6.33 GetOperatorBySid.....................................................................191
5.1.6.34 GetOperatorByOperatorId.........................................................191
5.1.6.35 TimeDiff....................................................................................191
5.1.7 Built-in Math Function...................................................................................193
5.1.8 Built-in String Function..................................................................................193
5.1.9 Built-in Classes...............................................................................................193
5.1.10 Declaration.....................................................................................................194
5.1.11 Programming in C# Language........................................................................195
5.1.11.1 Statements.................................................................................195
5.1.11.2 Declaring and Initializing Variables.........................................195
5.1.11.3 Casting Variables......................................................................196
5.1.11.4 Writing Comments....................................................................196
5.1.11.5 Using Blocks { }.......................................................................196
5.1.11.6 Declaring Functions..................................................................196
5.1.11.7 Using the return statement.........................................................197
5.1.11.8 Branching Statements................................................................197
5.1.11.9 Iterations....................................................................................198
5.1.11.10 Expression.................................................................................200
5.1.12 Example..........................................................................................................201
5.2 Report Template Builder – Measurement Data..................................................204
5.2.1 Report Builder Toolbar and Pop-up Menu.....................................................206
5.2.2 File Formats and Limitations..........................................................................207
5.2.3 Define Report Template.................................................................................208
5.2.3.1 Metric List.................................................................................209
5.2.3.2 Report Options..........................................................................210
5.2.3.3 Define Trend Chart....................................................................213
5.2.3.4 Define Single Chart...................................................................213

vi  User's Guide
 5.2.3.5 Define Multi-series Chart.........................................................216
5.2.3.6 Define Chart Skeleton...............................................................218
5.2.3.7 Define Statistic Data..................................................................220
5.2.3.8 Define Tabular List...................................................................222
5.2.3.9 Define Correlation Chart...........................................................222
5.2.3.10 Options of Repetition in Report................................................225
5.2.4 Generating Microsoft Office Word Report....................................................229
5.2.4.1 Requirement..............................................................................229
5.2.4.2 MS-Word reporting template....................................................229
5.2.4.3 Sample Word Report Template.................................................233
5.2.5 Generate Report From Report Template........................................................233
5.2.6 Available Chart Types....................................................................................236
5.2.6.1 Column Charts...........................................................................236
5.2.6.2 Bar Charts..................................................................................237
5.2.6.3 Line Charts................................................................................237
5.2.6.4 Pie Charts..................................................................................239
5.2.6.5 XY (Scatter) Charts...................................................................239
5.2.6.6 Area Charts................................................................................240
5.2.6.7 Doughnut Charts.......................................................................241
5.2.6.8 Radar Charts..............................................................................241
5.2.6.9 Bubble Charts............................................................................242
5.2.6.10 Stock Charts..............................................................................242
5.2.6.11 Cylinder, Cone, or Pyramid Charts...........................................243
5.3 ADP Management.............................................................................................244
5.3.1 ADP Step1: File Monitor................................................................................245
5.3.2 ADP Step2: Output Data Source....................................................................249
5.3.3 ADP Step3: Output Scheduler........................................................................250
5.3.4 ADP Step4: Output Type................................................................................252
5.4 Plug-in Manager................................................................................................253
5.5 Neighbor List Analyzer.....................................................................................254
5.6 Antenna Pattern Viewer.....................................................................................255
5.7 Batch Printing....................................................................................................256
5.8 Print Queue........................................................................................................257
5.9 Signaling Message Browser..............................................................................258
5.10 Parameter Mapping...........................................................................................260
5.11 Log File Database Browser...............................................................................261
5.12 Log File Database Cleanup................................................................................262
5.13 Measurement Data Cleanup...............................................................................263

6 Statistic 265
6.1 Cube Management.............................................................................................266
6.2 Cube Creator.....................................................................................................267
6.3 Statistic Browser................................................................................................269
6.3.1.1 Statistic Data Cube View – Grid...............................................271
6.3.1.2 Statistic Data Cube View – Map...............................................272
6.3.1.3 Statistic Data Cube View – Chart.............................................273
6.3.1.4 File/Device Drilldown...............................................................273
6.4 Statistic Dashboard............................................................................................275
6.5 Statistic Dashboard Builder...............................................................................276
6.5.1.1 Dashboard Builder Toolbars.....................................................281

6.6 Report Template Builder – Statistic Data..........................................................282

User's Guide Contents 
 6.6.1 Generate Statistic Report From Report Template..........................................287
6.7 Cube Data Scope Configurations.......................................................................288
6.8 Statistic Data Cleanup.......................................................................................289
6.9 Default GIS Builder...........................................................................................290
6.10 Default Network Configuration Builder............................................................291
6.11 Database User Management..............................................................................292
6.12 Database User Access Permission.....................................................................294
6.13 Measurement Data Server List..........................................................................295
6.14 Enterprise License Information.........................................................................296

7 Configuration and Settings 297

7.1 Publish/Update via FTP Setting.........................................................................298
7.2 Configuration Management...............................................................................299
7.3 Document Management.....................................................................................301
7.4 Generic User-Defined Metric Group.................................................................303
7.5 Metric Frame Import Configuration..................................................................306
7.6 Plot Band Definition..........................................................................................307
7.6.1 Plot Band Auto Generator..............................................................................308
7.7 User-Defined Parameters...................................................................................309
7.8 Dynamic Composite Dataset.............................................................................311
7.9 Batch Configuration..........................................................................................312
7.10 Event Set Filter..................................................................................................313
7.11 Selective Task Condition Expression Builder....................................................314
7.12 Message Coloring..............................................................................................315
7.13 Messages View KeyInfo Settings......................................................................316
7.14 Point Detail Settings..........................................................................................317
7.15 Instant Chart Component Content.....................................................................318
7.16 Data Networking...............................................................................................319
7.16.1 Data Networking Configuration.....................................................................321
7.16.2 Distributed Processing System.......................................................................322
7.17 UDR Project Mapping.......................................................................................323
7.18 Device Attribute Assignment Template.............................................................324
7.19 Wireless Operator Lookup Table.......................................................................327
7.20 Email Templates................................................................................................328
7.21 Options..............................................................................................................329
7.21.1 General Options..............................................................................................329
7.21.2 Measurement Data Storage Options...............................................................333
7.21.3 Statistic Data Storage Options........................................................................335
7.21.4 Log File Storage Options................................................................................337
7.21.5 Color Scheme Options....................................................................................338
7.21.6 TA Database Options.....................................................................................339
7.22 Import Data.......................................................................................................340
7.22.1 Import Drive Test Data...................................................................................340
7.22.2 Import UETR..................................................................................................343
7.22.3 Import Network Configuration.......................................................................345
7.22.3.1 Prepare Network Configuration File.........................................346
7.22.3.2 General Configuration...............................................................349

viii  User's Guide

 7.22.3.3 Create Mapping........................................................................351
7.22.4 Import Antenna Data......................................................................................352
7.22.5 Import GIS Data.............................................................................................354
7.22.6 Import Coverage Map.....................................................................................357
7.22.7 Import HO Matrix..........................................................................................358
7.22.8 Plug-in for Custom Import.............................................................................358
7.23 Specific Topics..................................................................................................359
7.23.1 Floor Print Rectifier........................................................................................359
7.23.2 Save & Restore Working Environment..........................................................360
7.23.3 Cell Configuration..........................................................................................361
7.23.3.1 Edit Cell Configuration.............................................................361
7.23.3.2 Cell Site/Sector Filter Expression Builder................................363
7.23.3.3 Edit Cell/Sector Parameters......................................................365
7.23.3.4 Cell Configuration View Options.............................................366
7.23.3.5 Cell Site Grouping Logic..........................................................371
7.23.3.6 Neighbor List Work Order........................................................373
7.23.4 Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric..........................................................374
7.23.5 Pilot Pollution Analysis..................................................................................375
7.23.6 GSM Interference Matrix...............................................................................377

8 Appendix 379
8.1 Event List in Pre-defined Scripts.......................................................................379
8.1.1 CDMA_Events...............................................................................................379
8.1.2 EVDO_Events_Logbased...............................................................................381
8.1.3 GSM_WCDMA_Events.................................................................................382
8.1.4 LTE_Events....................................................................................................388
8.1.5 Nemo_Events.................................................................................................389
8.1.6 QVoice_Markers............................................................................................390
8.1.7 TEMS_Collectors_Events..............................................................................398
8.2 Enabling FILESTREAM in SQL Server 2008 R2.............................................404

Index 409

User's Guide Contents 

1 Getting Started

Welcome to TEMS Discovery!

TEMS Discovery is a measurement data analysis and network optimization tool. It introduces
many unique and advanced features to enhance productivity. Consequently, you might not be
able to easily familiarize yourself with TEMS Discovery without taking a demo session, or
referring to the Help file. But we promise that you will quickly appreciate the powerful and
user-friendly functions of TEMS Discovery. Should you have any questions, or would like to
request a live demo over the Internet, please feel free to contact us.

1.1 Contact Information

Please refer any dimensioning or server hardware questions to your customer-specific Account
Manager within the Ascom Sales organization, your Ascom Service Delivery contact person,
or your Ascom Customer Support contact.
You may also contact the Ascom Global Help Desk for support. (Global Help Desk services are
not available in China or Russia. If you are in one of those regions, please use the local
numbers specified below.)
 Email: [email protected]
 Telephone: +1.855.323.5755

Region-specific contact information is listed below.

AMERICAS
+1.800.522.9670 Hours of Operation: 8:00 AM - 7:00 PM
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST, AND AFRICA
+46.10.492.5005 Hours of Operation: 8:30 AM - 5:00 PM
RUSSIA, CIS COUNTRIES AND MONGOLIA
+7.495.777.0085 Hours of Operation: 9:00 AM - 5:30 PM (Moscow Time)
Email: [email protected]
ASIA PACIFIC
+60.3.5021.5202 Hours of Operation: 8:30 AM - 5:00 PM
CHINA
+86.10.65666088 Hours of Operation: 9:00 AM - 5:00 PM
Email: [email protected]
INDIA
+91.98.80500500 Hours of Operation: 9:30 AM - 6:30 PM

User's Guide Getting Started  1

1.2 TEMS Discovery Startup Window
To get a glance at TEMS Discovery's features, let us start with the TEMS Discovery startup
window, shown below:

In the Welcome to TEMS Discovery dialog, select one of the demo documents and open it
to immediately explore TEMS Discovery's features. If you close the Welcome dialog, you can
still select a demo document from the Document List window in the left panel.
The Document List is docked in the upper section of the left panel, and the Project List is
docked in the lower section. If the layout you see is not similar to the one shown above, look at
the strip at the far left border for the vertically-displayed tags Document List and/or Project
List. You can hover your mouse over any of the tags, and the window will slide out. Then,
click the Pin button at the top-right corner to dock that window.
Next, you can go through the following topics to preview some of TEMS Discovery's functions:
 System Requirements
 Terminology
 Open Demo Document
 Open Demo Project
 Create Projects from Scratch
 Get Your Algorithm Working
 Generate Reports As You Wish

2  Getting Started
1.3 System Requirements

1.3.1 Software Requirements

TEMS Discovery can run on Microsoft Windows operating systems that are compatible with
Microsoft .Net framework version 4.0, either 32-bit or 64-bit. Windows XP is no longer
supported.
The following components are also required:
 Microsoft .Net framework version 4.0
http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=17851
 Microsoft Office Excel (optional). Microsoft Office Excel will be used to open
the output Excel file from TEMS Discovery Report Engine.
 PDF viewer (optional). A PDF viewer such as Adobe PDF Reader will be used to
open the output PDF file from the TEMS Discovery Report Engine.
 Google Earth 3D Plug-in (optional). This component is needed for TEMS
Discovery's integrated Google Earth Viewer. It can be downloaded from:
http://earth.google.com/download-earth.html
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyId=333325FD-AE52- 4E35-
B531-508D977D32A6&displaylang=en

NOTE: In a 64-bit windows operating system, the error dialog Google Update
installation failed with error 0x80040714 may appear. Currently, there is no
solution for this issue.

 Bing Map 3D Plug-in (optional). This component is needed for TEMS Discovery's
integrated Bing Map Viewer. It can be downloaded from:
http://www.bing.com/maps/Help/VE3DInstall/Default.aspx?action=install&mkt=e n-us
 Java Runtime Environment (optional). Google Earth and Bing Map require the
Java Runtime Environment (JRE). You can download the 32-bit installation package
from:
http://javadl.sun.com/webapps/download/AutoDL?BundleId=29226.

NOTE: Even for a 64-bit operating system, TEMS Discovery still requires a 32-bit Java
Runtime Environment.

User's Guide Getting Started  3

1.3.2 Hardware Requirements

1.3.2.1 Hardware Requirements – TEMS Discovery Professional

The minimum and recommended requirements for a typical single user environment within
TEMS Discovery Professional are listed below.
Minimum requirement: 1.6GHz CPU, 2GB RAM, 250GB hard disk
Recommended requirement: Intel® i7 (2.4GHz) CPU, 8GB RAM, 500GB hard disk
For a multi-user environment, the following is a general guideline for the average
configuration:
1. Six-core 2.66GHz Processor, plus one additional core of processor for each
concurrent user
2. 32GB RAM plus an additional 1GB RAM for each concurrent user
3. Hard disk space should be at least double the size of the data to be processed
4. Sufficient internet bandwidth

1.3.2.2 Hardware Requirements – TEMS Discovery Enterprise

The hardware required by TEMS Discovery Enterprise varies, depending on the amount of
data being processed and how the data is processed. Processing capacity and hardware
requirements for various single server systems are provided in the following tables.

4 8 24 48
data processing data processing data processing data processing
Configuration threads threads threads threads
Base Server HP ProLiant HP ProLiant HP ProLiant HP ProLiant
ML370 G6 Small ML370 G6 Small DL580 G7 Server DL580 G7 Server
Form Factor Form Factor
Tower Server Tower Server
Processor 1 X Intel® Xeon® 2 X Intel® Xeon® 2 X 10-Core 4 X 8-Core Intel®
Processor Processors E5649 Intel® Xeon® Xeon® Processors
E5649 (6 core, (6 core, Processors E7- E7-4830
2.53 GHz, 12MB 2.53 GHz, 12MB 4850 (2.13GHz, 24MB
L3, 80W) L3, 80W) (2.00GHz, 24MB Cache, 105W)
Cache, 130W)
Storage P410i/512 BBWC P410i/512 BBWC P410i/512 BBWC P410i/512 BBWC
Controller
Total Memory HP 64GB PC3- HP 64GB PC3- HP 128GB PC3- HP 128GB PC3-
8500R 4x16GB 8500R 4x16GB 10600R 16x8GB 10600R 16x8GB
4Rank Memory 4Rank Memory
Log file 650MB per hour 1GB per hour 2.8GB per hour
processing
capacity (avg.)

4  Getting Started
 4 8 24 48
data processing data processing data processing data processing
Configuration threads threads threads threads
Database size DB_SIZE (GB) = DB_SIZE (GB) = DB_SIZE (GB) =
1.625 X 2.5 X 7X
Total_Hours_Per Total_Hours_Per Total_Hours_Per
_Day X _Day X _Day X
Total_Days Total_Days Total_Days

For Drives (use 64-KB NTFS block size):

4 8 24 48
data processing data processing data processing data processing
Configuration threads threads threads threads
C: ( OS) (RAID 2 x HP 300GB 2 x HP 300GB 2 x HP 300GB 2 x HP 300GB
1) 6G SAS 15K rpm 6G SAS 15K rpm 6G SAS 15K rpm 6G SAS 15K rpm
(Software SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch)
including SQL Hot Plug Hot Plug Hot Plug Hot Plug
Server)
E: ( TEMP) 2 x HP 146GB 2 x HP 146GB 2 x HP 146GB 4 x HP 146GB
(RAID 0) TD 6G SAS 15K rpm 6G SAS 15K rpm 6G SAS 15K rpm 6G SAS 15K rpm
temp files and SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch)
SQL temp files Hot Plug Hot Plug Hot Plug Hot Plug
F: HP 300GB 6G HP 300GB 6G HP 300GB 6G HP 300GB 6G
(SQL_Databas SAS 15K rpm SAS 15K rpm SAS 15K rpm SAS 15K rpm
e) (RAID 5) SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch) SFF (2.5-inch)
Hot Plug Hot Plug Hot Plug Hot Plug
or or or or
HP 600GB 6G HP 600GB 6G HP 600GB 6G HP 600GB 6G
Hot Plug 2.5 SAS Hot Plug 2.5 SAS Hot Plug 2.5 SAS Hot Plug 2.5 SAS
Dual Port 10K rpm Dual Port 10K rpm Dual Port 10K rpm Dual Port 10K rpm
Enterprise Hard Enterprise Hard Enterprise Hard Enterprise Hard
Drive Drive Drive Drive

Total_Drive = 1 + Total_Drive = 1 + Total_Drive = 1 + Total_Drive = 1 +

(DB_SIZE / 300) (DB_SIZE / 300) (DB_SIZE / 300) (DB_SIZE / 300)
or (DB_SIZE/ or (DB_SIZE/ or (DB_SIZE/ or (DB_SIZE/
600) 600) 600) 600)

Minimum of 3 Minimum of 3 Minimum of 4 Minimum of 5

Drives Drives Drives Drives

If there are more than 8 drives, then additional drive cages/enclosures and storage
controllers are required.
Each drive cage will hold 8 drives.
4 8 24 48
data processing data processing data processing data processing
Configuration threads threads threads threads
Drive Cage/ HP 8-Bay Small Form Factor Drive HP D2700 Disk Enclosure – It will hold
Enclosure Cage 25 SFF SAS drives.
Additional HP SAS Expander Card or
Controller HP Smart Array P812 controller HP Smart Array P812 controller

User's Guide Getting Started  5

1.4 Terminology
To quickly familiarize yourself with TEMS Discovery, it is necessary to know and
understand the following terminology:

Project. A project is a placeholder used to organize the processed data from a geographic
region. Mixing data collected from two distant regions in a project will result in substantial
distortion of the display on Map Views; however, multiple projects can be created for a given
region. All the data in TEMS Discovery is structurally organized, and, unlike competing tools
that require you to load raw log data in every new session, TEMS Discovery loads the data
once and saves the processed data permanently until it is removed.

GIS Data and Geo Area. GIS data used in TEMS Discovery includes vector data, raster
images, and terrain elevation data. Data from the same geographic region is grouped into a
geo area that can be referred to by one or more projects. GIS data is optional, but can be
very helpful for troubleshooting.

Dataset. A dataset is created by importing one or more raw drive test files. All of the
processed data is organized according to certain attributes, including the original file names,
device names, mobile IDs, labels, etc. Multiple datasets can be created under a project to
organize the data collected from different time frames, optimization phases, vendors, sub-geo
regions, or any other attributes. Newly collected data can be appended onto any existing dataset
or project.

Composite Dataset. Processed data from one or more datasets of a project can be logically
combined into composite datasets. A typical practice is to group the processed data by one of
their attributes, such as mobile IDs or functional labels (long call, short call, PS call, etc.), and
then generate one composite dataset for each of the groups.

Coverage Maps. Coverage maps are the prediction data from RF planning and design tools.
Any prediction data in a format similar to raster images or terrain elevation data supported by
TEMS Discovery can be imported. The imported data can then be used for both background
display and to create prediction vs. measurement delta metrics.
View Layout. A view layout is a configuration setting that describes the organization of
various data views. The user can open a project with one of the saved view layouts.

Analysis Set. An analysis set is a set of view layouts that includes precise configuration
settings that describe the specific names of the metrics to be displayed in a given view. The user
can send an entire set of metrics defined in an analysis set from a selected data source with a
single click.

[TEMS Discovery] Document. A TEMS Discovery document defines the configuration

settings of the specific data sources, displayed metrics, and view layouts. Opening a TEMS
Discovery document will restore almost all aspects of any saved information, except for the
zoom level.

6  Getting Started
1.5 Data Archive vs. Export vs. Sharing

Cleaning up the Datasets:

Archiving is a method for taking datasets out of the active working data , but keeping it
available locally. It will move the datasets from the Explorer>DataSets branch to the
Exploreer>Archives branch. The data is stored in compressed files on disk to save space.
Archiving is available in the Properties menu at the file, device, and dataset levels.

Sharing the views, configurations, settings, and map sets:

Exporting is the method in TEMS Discovery of saving a view, a configuration set, settings, or
maps sets for sharing and distribution to others. It is available in the Properties menu at the file,
device, and dataset levels, and in the Configuration>Configuration Management menu at the
project level.

Sharing imported datasets:

Packing for Sharing is the method in TEMS Discovery of saving imported datasets for
sharing and distribution to others. It is available in the Properties menu at the dataset level, not
the device or file levels.

User's Guide Getting Started  7

1.6 A Few Tips
TEMS Discovery has several unique features that will allow you to easily customize TEMS
Discovery's display to suit your needs and preferences. The settings can be easily saved for
future use.

View Arrangement. One of TEMS Discovery's special features is its moveable window views.
This feature allows you to arrange the layout of the views to best suit your presentation needs.
Each view can be locked, hidden, or even dragged to another monitor as a floating window.
Any view can be enabled or disabled by clicking the related toolbar buttons, or by selecting a
sub-menu under Views. By default, the newly enabled view overlaps an existing view. To
rearrange a view, simply move the mouse to the view title, left-click, and drag the view to the
target position on the screen. To overlap two views, simply drag one view to the title of the
other view.

Creating Sub-Views. To further break down the primary view windows, TEMS Discovery
enables users to create sub-views that help organize data by placing it into smaller groups.
To divide the Map View, Time Chart, Histogram, or Correlation View into several
smaller views, click the Table Size button on the view’s toolbar.

Using Drag-and-Drop. To display any metric in any view, the user can drag-and-drop the
metric from the Data Explorer into the target view.

Dealing with Right-Click Context Menus. Right-clicking an object or at any space in a

given view will bring up a context menu that can be applied to the selected object or view.

Dual-mode Toolbar Buttons. Toolbar buttons containing both "+" and "-" signs are dual-
mode buttons. Left-clicking performs the opposite function as right-clicking (e.g., left-
clicking zooms in and right-clicking zooms out).
Samples of dual-mode toolbar buttons: , , and

1.7 Demo Documents

The Document List in the DemoProject_WCDMA, contains several demo documents,
including:
 DemoDocument_EVDO. A demonstration of a partial list of EVDO metrics
supported by TEMS Discovery.
 DemoDocument_Indoor. A demonstration of TEMS Discovery's ability to handle
indoor measurements. Indoor floor prints can easily be geo-referenced with TEMS
Discovery and displayed along with outdoor GIS data. The user can switch between
indoor and outdoor modes with a single click.

8  Getting Started
  DemoDocument_WCDMA. A demonstration of TEMS Discovery's rich data
visualization and flexible view arrangement, and a demonstration of the
synchronization of all views.
To open a demo document, double-click on any of the three documents, or, if right-
clicking, select Open from the context menu. The following screen will appear if you open
the demo document DemoDocument_WCDMA.

The opened document contains a project called DemoProject_WCDMA, as well as the

configuration of data presentations. By opening this document, some project data will be
automatically displayed in synchronizable views, including Map View, Time Chart, Messages
View, and Table View. Other project data may be displayed in summary data views, such as
the Histogram.
The level of the project data display in the Data Explorer window is controlled with the Tree
View button . (If the Explorer is hidden, click the tab located at the bottom of the panel to
make it visible.) The data objects are active and can be dragged-and- dropped to any of the
synchronizable views or summary data views.
If you would like to give additional space to any of the windows, click the Pin Down button
at the top-right corner of the window to use the auto-hide feature, or move the mouse over
the border of a window, and click and hold to change the window size. You can also rearrange
windows to a preferred layout by dragging-and-dropping each window by its tab into the
desired location.

User's Guide Getting Started  9

1.8 Demo Project
To open a demo project, double-click any of the demo projects in the Project List. Or,
right-click on a project name and select Open from the context menu.
If you open DemoProject_WCDMA, you will see the following screen:

You can expand the tree view in the Data Explorer and view data from the top level,
Dataset, to the lowest level, Metric. Right-clicking each level will bring up its
corresponding context menu. The data objects in those levels can be also dragged- and-
dropped to the windows located on the right side of the window.
After you send data to the windows, select Save from the File menu, or click the Save button
on the toolbar to save the current workspace as a TEMS Discovery document. The saved
document will then be listed in the Document List. A document named Last is created by
default to save the last workspace so the user can always restore the most recent environment.

10  Getting Started
1.9 Walk-U-Through
Walk-U-Through is a TEMS Discovery wizard that walks through some of the most
common tasks.
You can navigate these tasks by clicking the Back button or the Forward button . Then,
click the name of the task that you want to perform (next to the red arrow ).
You can also access the Walk-U-Through tasks from the dropdown menu next to the
Next button.

In general, you can follow the tasks one by one, from importing data through analyzing data and
generating reports, or you can jump to any task by using a shortcut.
1. Import GIS
See Import GIS Data for more information about importing GIS data (terrain elevation,
raster images, vector files, etc.). You can also access the Import GIS Data task from the
File menu or by clicking the Data Import button on the Main Window toolbar.
2. Create/Edit Project
See Project List for more information about creating a new project or editing an
existing project. You can also access the Create/Edit Project task from the Project List
context menu.
3. Import Drive Test Data
See Import Drive Test Data for more information. You can also access the Import Drive
Test Data task from the File menu or by clicking the Data Import
button on the Main Window toolbar.
4. Import Network Configuration
See Import Network Configuration for more information. You can also access the
Import Network Configuration task from the File menu or by clicking the Data
Import button on the Main Window toolbar.
5. Edit Device Attributes
See Device Attribute Assignment for more information.
6. Create Composite Dataset
See Composite Dataset for more information about creating one or more
composite datasets.

User's Guide Getting Started 

 7. Open Project with Analysis Set
See Save & Restore Working Environment for how to create or edit Analysis Sets.
You can also open a project with an analysis set from the Data Explorer context
menu.
8. Generate Report
See Report Template Builder for how to generate reports for the selected project or
device based on the selected report template. You can also generate reports from the
Data Explorer context menu.

12  Getting Started
1.10 Creating Projects from Scratch
Once you have familiarized yourself with the functions and capabilities of TEMS Discovery,
you can start to create a new project.

1. Prepare Data
Depending on your needs, you may import network cell configuration, antenna, and GIS
data, in addition to the drive test data to be processed. TEMS Discovery can directly
process compressed files with a *.zip extension.
The current release of TEMS Discovery supports the following data:
 Drive test data:
 TEMS Investigation log files
 TEMS Automatic log files
 TEMS Pocket log files
 QVoice Symphony log files
 Nemo log files (.dt, .fs, .nmf files)
 LGE LTE DM (LLDM) files
 ZK Cell Test files
 Flexible delimited text files.
 Cell configuration. See Import Network Configuration for more information.
 Antenna data. See Import Antenna Data for more information.
 GIS data. See Import GIS Data for more information.

2. Typical Steps to Follow:

You can follow these steps to create a project and load data:
1. Import GIS data and create a geo area (optional).
2. Create a project (placeholder) and designate a geo area if GIS data is to be used
(optional).
3. Import network configuration data into the target project (optional).
4. Import the drive test data into the project.
5. Analyze the processed data, which can be browsed through the Data Explorer of the
opened project.
It is possible to skip steps 1 through 3, and go directly to step 4 to import drive test data (and
create a new project and dataset at the same time) and then modify the project properties, as
described below.

User's Guide Getting Started 

3. Import Data
You can select Import from the File menu or click the Import button on the toolbar to
bring up Automatic Data Processing. From there, you can import drive test data, cell
configuration, antenna, or GIS data.
While importing drive test data, you will be asked to select a target project, or to create a new
project for the data to be associated with. If you choose to create a new project, the newly
created project will be listed in the Project List after the import is done.

4. Edit Project Properties

Right-clicking on a selected project and selecting Edit/View Properties will bring up the
Project Properties dialog. In the Project Properties dialog, you can associate a geo area to the
project so that all of the GIS data under that geo area will be listed in the Data Explorer–GIS
List. The GIS data can then be displayed in the Map View.

5. Open Project
Refer to Demo Project for how to open a project.

14  Getting Started
1.11 Get Your Algorithm Working
The Script Builder is one of the unique and advanced features that TEMS Discovery offers. It
enables you to easily create your own definitions of events/alerts or derive custom metrics
(such as event counters, time delays, or composite metrics) based on any decoded information
elements, including all Layer 3 information elements. The algorithms can then be shared with
peers or standardized across an organization.

The Script Builder is designed for RF engineers who do not specialize in software development
but who know basic C programming syntax, as well as software developers who can take
advantage of C# programming language and Microsoft .Net library.
TEMS Discovery provides several sample scripts in the program; referring to them can help
you learn how to create your own scripts.

User's Guide Getting Started 

1.12 Generate Reports As You Wish
The Report Template Builder is another unique and advanced feature that only TEMS
Discovery offers. TEMS Discovery incorporates a powerful reporting mechanism that allows
the user to customize and generate a variety of different Excel-based report templates.
You can create a report template in Excel; then open the spreadsheet in TEMS Discovery to

fill in the metric attributes in any cell. From the Metric List tab, you can drag-and-drop any
information elements to the spreadsheet and select one of the metric attributes (e.g., sample
count, mean, maximum, minimum, standard deviation, multiple user-defined percentiles,
elapsed time, distance, etc.). The modified spreadsheet can then be saved as a TEMS
Discovery report template. With these templates, you can drag-and-drop a “mobile” or a
“composite” dataset to the template; TEMS Discovery will then automatically fill in the
specific metric data and generate a final report.

The remainder of this manual covers the TEMS Discovery working environment. The topics
provided are:
 Overview
 Data List and Progress Log
 Main Project Windows
 Tools
 Configuration and Settings

16  Getting Started
2 Overview
TEMS Discovery is built around a dockable workspace to achieve its clear and intuitive user
interface. All windows, such as Map View, Messages View, Time Chart, and most of the
configuration dialogs can function as either docked or overlapping tabs.
The Document List, Project List, GIS List, Task Manager, and Message Log each has an auto-
hide feature that allows them to be hidden, while preserving valuable information on screen.
Enable or disable the auto-hide feature by clicking the Pin buttons ( or ) at the top right
corner of each window.
TEMS Discovery uses a drag-and-drop mechanism that allows you to perform many tasks
through direct manipulation. For example, during run time, the windows can be rearranged to a
preferred layout by simply dragging-and-dropping them. The layout can then be saved as an
XML file so that the application can restore its screen layout whenever needed.

2.1 Main Window

The TEMS Discovery Main Window can be divided into multiple panels:
 The left panel contains the Data List and Progress Log.
 The right panel contains one or more project workspaces. Each project
workspace can contain multiple views.

User's Guide Overview 

2.1.1 Data List and Progress Log Panel
The Data List and Progress Log panel is created when the application starts. It always docks to
the left side of the workspace and each window in the panel has an auto-hide feature. The Data
List and Progress Log include:
 Document List
 Project List
 GIS List
 Task Window
 Message Log

2.1.2 Data Explorer Panel

When a project is open, a workspace for the project will be created. The workspace contains
two panels, one for the Data Explorer, and the other for synchronizable views and summary
data views.
Like the Data List and Progress Log, the Data Explorer docks to the left side of the workspace
and has an auto-hide feature. The Data Explorer includes the following data pertinent to the
opened project:
 Dataset
 Cells
 GIS

2.1.3 Synchronizable and Summary View Panel

Various data presentations used for visual and efficient troubleshooting, called views, are
presented in the second panel on the Main Window. Views can be categorized into
synchronizable views and summary views.

Synchronizable views simultaneously display Summary views present statistic data in

data that was collected at the same time. various formats.
These views can be part of test drive data
Summary views include:
playback. Synchronizable views include:
 Messages View  Histogram

 Map View  Batch PDF View

 Time Chart  Problem Summary View

 Metric Correlation  Sector Statistics View

 Table View
 Point Detail View
 Instant Chart
 Google Earth
 Bing Map
 Wave View
 Legend View

18 
2.2 Menu Bar
The Menu Bar on the Main Window includes the menus described below.

2.2.1 File Menu

Create/Update Demo Projects. All existing demo projects will be deleted and re-created.

Open Demo Document. Open one of the TEMS Discovery demo documents.

Save. Open the Save dialog, which has options to save the opened data (can be multi-project) as a
TEMS Discovery document, to save the view layout, and to save the opened data as an analysis set. See
Save & Restore Working Environment for more information.
Walk-U-Through. Access a TEMS Discovery wizard that walks through some of the most
common usage tasks. See Walk-U-Through for more information.
Import. Open a data-specific Import dialog for importing external data to TEMS Discovery. See Import
Data for more information.
General Page Setup. Access page setup for general printing and PDF file generation.

Batch Printing Page Setup. Access page setup for batch printing.
Exit. Close the application.

2.2.2 Views Menu

Google Earth. Turn on Google Earth. See Google Earth for more information.

Bing Map. Turn on Bing Map. See Bing Map for more information.

Maps. Display the Map View for the active project. See Map View for more information.

Time-series Chart. Display the Time-series Chart for the active project. See Time Chart for more
information.
Metric Correlation. Display the Correlation View for the active project. See Metric Correlation for
more information.
Messages. Display the Messages View for the active project. See the Messages View for more
information.
Table View. Display the Table View for the active project. See Table View for more information.

Point Detail. Display the Point Details for the active project. See Point Detail View for more
information.
Instant Chart. Display the Instant Chart for the active project. See Instant Chart for more
information.
Wave View. Display the Wave View for the active project. See Wave View for more information.

Synchronize Views by Mouse Moving. Synchronize all views listed above by moving the
mouse.
Synchronize Views by Mouse Clicking. Synchronize all views listed above by clicking the
mouse.
Histogram. Display the Histogram for the active project. See Histogram for more information.

Multi-dimension Statistic View. Display the Multi-dimension Statistic View for the active
project. See Multi-dimension Statistic View for more information.
Sector Statistic View. Display the Sector Statistics View for the active project. See Sector
Statistics View for more information.
Problem Summary View. Display the Problem Summary View, based on Problem Sets created by the
Report Template Builder.

User's Guide Overview 

2.2 Tools
Script Builder. Open the Script Builder.

Report Template Builder/ Problem Set Builder. Open the Report Template Builder.

ADP Management. Access ADP (automatic data processing) tasks.

Neighbor List Analyzer. Open the Neighbor List Analyzer.

Batch Printing. Open the Batch Printing dialog.

Antenna Viewer. Open the Antenna Viewer.

Signaling Message Browser. Open the Signaling Message Browser.

Parameter Mapping. Open the Parameter Mapping dialog.

Log File Browser. Open the Log File Database Browser dialog.

Log File Cleanup

Measurement Data Cleanup. Open the Measurement Data Cleanup dialog.

Generate Measurement Database Description. Generate a text file description of the

Measurement Database.
Generate Script Database Description. Generate a text file description of the Script Database.
Plug-in Browser. Open the Plug-in Manager.

2.2.4 Configuration Menu

Publish/Update via FTP Setting. Access the Publish/Update Configurations via FTP Setting
feature.
Configuration Management. Access TEMS Discovery configuration management features such
as Import, Export, Update, and Publish.
Document Management. Access TEMS Discovery document management features such as Import,
Export, Update, and Publish.
Generic User-Defined Metric Groups. Define a metric group for importing a flexible data
source. See Generic User-defined Metric Groups for more information.
Metric Frame Import Configuration. Define import options for each frame. See Metric Frame
Import Configuration for more information.
Plot Band Definition. Open the Plot Band dialog for editing plot bands.

User Defined Parameters. Open the User Defined Parameters dialog for editing threshold
settings. These thresholds can be used in conjunction with the Script Builder.
Dynamic Composite Dataset Settings. Open the Dynamic Composite Dataset Settings dialog to
define rules for automatically creating a composite dataset.
Batch Configuration. Open the Batch Configurations dialog for generating summaries to PDF.

Event Set Filter Configuration. Open the Event Set Filter Configuration dialog for creating
event set filters.
Message Coloring. Assign colors to signaling messages for display in the Messages View. See
Message Coloring for more information.
Messages View KeyInfo Settings. Define a set of information to be displayed in the KeyInfo
column in the Messages View. See Messages View KeyInfo Settings for more information.
Point Detail Settings. Define a set of information to be tracked for a particular data point. See Point
Detail Settings for more information.
Instant Chart Component Content. Define component content for the Instant Chart. See
Instant Chart Component Content for more information

20 
 UDR Project/Dataset Matching. Define UDR project/dataset matching for data import. See UDR
Project Mapping for more information.
Device Attribute Assignment Template. Define a device attribute assignment template for data
import. See Device Attribute Assignment for more information.
Wireless Operator Lookup Table. Lookup Operator based on MNC/MCC, SID ot OperatorID. In
Script Builder, you can call built-in function GetOperatorByMncMcc(),GetOperatorBySid(), or
GetOperatorByOperatorId() to fetch the operator name. . See Wireless Operator Lookup Table for more
information.
Data Networking. Register the local TEMS Discovery to be a TEMS Discovery server. See Data
Networking for more information.
Email Templates. Create and maintain email templates. See
Email Template for more information.
Options. Maintain system options.

2.2.5 Statistic Menu

Cube Management. Access the Cube Management feature for creating new cubes, deleting cubes,
activating/deactivating cube processing.
Statistic Browser. Open the Statistic Browser, where cube data can be browsed.

Dashboard. Open the Statistic Dashboard.

Report Generation. Generate the Statistic Report, based on the Statistic Report Template.
Dashboard Builder. Open the Statistic Dashboard Builder, where a Dashboard template can be built.

Report Template Builder. Open the Report Template Builder, where a Statistic Report template can be
built.
Cube Data Scope Configurations. Open the Cube Data Scope Configurations , where geo
center, data scope (projects) to be associated with a cube, and scheduler are selected.
Statistic Data Cleanup. Clean up statistic data.
Default GIS Builder. Build the default GIS list for cube processing.
Default Network Configuration Builder. Build the default network configuration list for cube
processing.
Database User Management. Manage database users.
Database User Access Permission. Grant database access permissions for user groups.

Measurement Data Server List. Display the Measurement Data Server List associated with the
statistic database.
Enterprise License Information. Display TEMS Discovery Enterprise license information.

2.2.6 Help Menu

Help.

Multimedia Presentation. In addition to the built-in multimedia, you can set up a hyperlink to the
multimedia presentation index file located in your own server accessible by TEMS Discovery, so that you
can maintain your own multimedia and present them in TEMS Discovery video player.

License Status. Open the License Status information window.

About TEMS Discovery. Open the About TEMS Discovery information block.

User's Guide Overview 

2. Main
Show/Hide Left Panel.

Save Project Data. See Save & Restore Working Environment for more information.

Walk-U-Through. Walk through some of the most common usage tasks. See Walk-U-Through for
more information.
Data Import. See Import Data for more information.

Automatic Data Processing. See ADP Management for more information.

Batch Printing. See Batch Printing for more information.

Script Builder. See Script Builder for more information.

Report Template/Problem Set Builder. See Report Template Builder for more information.

Plot Band Editor. See Plot Band Definition for more information.

Map View. See Map View for more information.

Time-series Chart. See Time Chart for more information.

Messages View. See Messages View for more information.

Table View. See Table View for more information.

Instant Chart. See Instant Chart for more information.

Point Detail. See Point Detail View for more information.

Wave View. See Wave View for more information.

Histogram. See Histogram for more information.

Correlation View. See Metric Correlation for more information.

Sector Statistic View. See Sector Statistics View for more information.

Problem Summary View. See Problem Summary View for more information.

Multi-dimension Statistic View. See Multi-dimension Statistic View for more information.

Synchronize By Mouse Clicking. See Synchronizable Views for more information.

Synchronize Views By Mouse Moving. See Synchronizable Views for more information.

Play Back From Ending point of data displayed in the views.

Play Back from current timestamp or location.

Play Stop. Stop playback.

Play Forward from the current timestamp or location.

Play Forward From Starting point of data displayed in the views.

Apply Specified Play Speed (in seconds per step).

22 
3 Data List and Progress Log
This section describes the display windows that are created when the application starts.

3.1 Document List

The Document List maintains a list of TEMS Discovery documents. A TEMS
Discovery document contains the following types of information: workspace
configuration, project data, and the presentation of the data.
You can open a document by double-clicking it. You can also export documents for
sharing, or import documents from peers.
See Save & Restore Working Environment for information about saving a TEMS
Discovery document.

Document List Toolbar

Unpack. Unpack a TEMS Discovery packed document.

Help.

Document List Pop-up Menu

Open. Open the selected document.

Rename. Rename the selected document.

Unpack. Unpack a TEMS Discovery packed

document.

Pack Document for Sharing. Pack the selected

document to a .ZIP file.

Delete. Delete the selected document.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  23

3.2 Project List
The Project List contains an overview of projects created in the Private Data folder of the
local computer, collected for sharing in a Public Data folder, or even located in the Private
Data folders of multiple remote TEMS Discovery peers.

TEMS Discovery provides a multi-user environment. Different users in the same computer can
have their own private data folder, hidden from others. Projects created by a user will be visible
only to their owner (these are listed under the Private Data tree node in the tree view).
However, the computer administrator has the right to control who else has permission to access
a particular user's private data folder.
The Public Data folder is for sharing data among all users. Users can upload their private
data to the public data folder, or download data to their private data folder for manipulation.
This Public Data folder can be a network folder. Please see Measurement Data Storage
Options for information about setting up a Public Data folder.
Additionally, TEMS Discovery can connect to remote computers that are also running TEMS
Discovery and share data with those computers’ active users. In the tree view, a remote
computer will be indicated with its IP address and FTP port number. See Data Networking for
more information.
The Project List is the data portal. The listed projects can be opened to a workspace with
certain pre-configured view layouts and/or with pre-defined analysis sets.

24  Data List and Progress Log

3.2.1 Project List – File/Device Listing Filter
TEMS Discovery provides funcitons to filter the file/device list by date or by user-
selected.

Right-clicking at the tree node shown above will bring up the following dialog for defining
date range, so that only the file/devices which are processed or collected within that date range
will be listed.

Other than the above date filtering, for each dataset, only up to a certain number of
file/devices can be listed. You can select the context menu “Modify Max. Number Of Files
To Be Listed For Each Dataset” to modify this maximum number.
To be more specific, you can manually select the file/device to be listed from the following
dialog which can be brought by selecting contaxt menu “Select File/Device For Listing”.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  25

3.2.2 Project List Toolbar
Remote. Maintain the list of TEMS Discovery peers. See TEMS Discovery Peers and Data
Networking for more information.

New. Create a new project.

Unpack. Unpack a TEMS Discovery packed project.

Close All. Close all opened projects.

Help.

3.2.3 Project List Pop-up Menus

TEMS Discovery Peer

Fetch Remote Dataset/Mobile List. Fetch a
dataset/mobile list that exists in the selected remote
TEMS Discovery peer. Any changes to the remote
TEMS Discovery peer can be manually refreshed by
the user through this menu.

26  Data List and Progress Log

Project, Dataset, or Mobile of TEMS Discovery Peer
Download. Download selected data from a remote
TEMS Discovery peer. The data can be a project, a
dataset, or mobile data. TEMS Discovery will
automatically compress the remote data, download it,
and decompress the data locally. The downloaded data
will be listed under the Private Data tree node.

Archived Project
De-Archive. De-archive the selected project archive.
The de-archived project will be listed under the Private
Data tree node.
Remove. Permanently remove the selected project
archive from the disk.

Project Root
New Project. Create a new project.
Unpack Project. Unpack a TEMS Discovery
packed project.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  27

Proje
Open Project. Open the selected project to
workspace and restore the last workspace layout.
Open With View Layout. Open the selected
project to workspace and construct a pre-
configured view layout. See Save & Restore
Working Environment for more information.
View/Edit Properties. View and edit the properties of
the selected project.
Rename. Rename the selected project.
Delete. Remove the selected project permanently
from disk.
Clean Up Derived Data. TEMS Discovery will
generate a lot of processed data from the imported data.
Selecting this from the menu will clean up the processed
data from disk.
Archive. Archive the selected project. The archived
project will then be listed in the Archive tree node.

Pack Project for Sharing. The entire project can be packed to a .ZIP file for archiving or sharing. This packed
project can be unpacked through the context menu described above.
Unpack Dataset. Unpack a dataset that was packed from TEMS Discovery.
Upload. Upload the selected project to a TEMS Discovery peer or public data folder. If a project with the same name
exists in the TEMS Discovery peer or public data folder, the project will be overwritten.

Dataset
File/Device Grouping By. Mobile data can be
grouped by its File name, Device, ESN, IMEI,
Label, and Mobile ID, or by any user-defined
attributes. See Device Attribute Assignment for
more information.
Global Edit Device Attributes. Globally edit the
attributes of all the devices in the selected dataset. See
Device Attribute Assignment for more information.
Open Project. Open the selected project to
workspace and restore the last workspace layout.
Open With View Layout. Open the selected
project to workspace and construct a pre-
configured view layout. See Save & Restore
Working Environment for more information.
Send to Problem Summary View. Bring up a
dialog for selecting a problem set template (which can
be defined in the Report Template Builder) to generate
a report of the problem from the selected dataset, and
then display the problem report in the Problem
Summary View.

Generate Report. Generate a report from the selected dataset based on the pre-defined report template, and send
the result to Report Excel Viewer. See Report Template Builder for more information.
Pilot Pollution Analyzer. Run Pilot Pollution analysis on the selected dataset.
GSM Interference Matrix. Generate a GSM Interference Matrix on the selected dataset.
Archive. Archive the selected dataset. The archived dataset will then be listed in the Archive tree node.

28  Data List and Progress Log

Pack Dataset for Sharing. The select dataset can be packed to a .ZIP file for archiving or sharing.
Delete. Delete the selected dataset permanently from disk.
Upload. Upload the selected dataset to a TEMS Discovery peer or a public data folder. If the project exists in the
remote TEMS Discovery peer or public data folder, this dataset will be added to that project; otherwise, a new
project will be created as well.

Mobile
Open Project. Open the selected project to
workspace and restore the last workspace layout.
Open Project With View Layout. Open the selected
project to workspace and construct a pre- configured
view layout. See Save & Restore Working Environment
for more information.
Send to Problem Summary View. Bring up a
dialog for selecting a problem set template (which can
be defined in the Report Template Builder) to generate
a report of problem from the selected device, and then
display the problem report in the Problem Summary
View.

Generate Report. Generate a report from the selected dataset based on the pre-defined report template,
and send the results to the Report Excel Viewer.
Pilot Pollution Analyzer. Run Pilot Pollution analysis on the selected dataset.
GSM Interference Matrix. Generate a GSM Interference Matrix on the selected dataset.
Send to Summary PDF View. Bring up a dialog for selecting a summary view option to generate a summary
PDF from the selected device, and then display the PDF in Batch PDF View.
Open Analysis Set. Open the selected project to workspace and load the data pre-defined in analysis sets. See
Save & Restore Working Environment for more information.
View/Edit Device Attributes. View and edit the selected mobile's device information. See Device
Attribute Assignment for more information.
Delete. Permanently delete the selected mobile from the disk.
Upload. Upload the selected mobile to a TEMS Discovery peer or a public data folder. If the project
exists in the remote TEMS Discovery peer or public data folder, this mobile data will be added to that project;
otherwise, a new project will be created as well.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  29

Public
Download. Download the selected
project/dataset/mobile to a private data folder.
Remove. Remove the selected project/dataset/mobile
from the public data folder. This menu is only
available to the administrator of the computer.

3.2.4 Project Properties

1. To display the Project Properties dialog, right-click on empty space or the
project root, and select View/Edit Properties from the context menu.
2. Complete the Project Properties dialog as described below.
3. Click the Excluded from peer-to-peer sharing checkbox if you want to make
the project invisible to peers (if Data Networking is enabled).
4. Click the Save button to save the changes or click the "X" in the top right
corner to exit the dialog.

30  Data List and Progress Log

3.2.4.1 Project Properties – GIS Settings

Geo area. The Geo area combo box lists the available geo areas created by importing GIS
data. Once a geo area is selected, all the maps under that geo area will be listed under Default
GIS combo box.
A geo area can be associated to a project, so that all the maps under that geo area will be listed
in the Data Explorer–GIS List and available for display in the Map View.

Geo center. Once a geo area is selected, the center of the selected geo area will be used as
the geo center of the project.
Because Map View is based on Azimuth Equidistance projection, an appropriate geo center is
crucial. If you select a geo area for the project, the geo center will be automatically determined
from the selected geo area, otherwise, the geo center will be determined from the first data
(drive test data, cell configuration, or maps, etc.) to be displayed in the Map View. You have the
option to clean up the current geo center and

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  31

force TEMS Discovery to determine a new geo center. In some circumstances, this could
solve some Map View distortion problems.

Default maps for display and report. You have the option to select multiple maps so that
they will be always displayed in the Map View when it is opened or when it is part of output
such as Excel, PDF, or paper printing.

32  Data List and Progress Log

3.2.4.2 Project Properties – UDR Configuration

Default UDR. You have the option to select multiple UDRs so that they will be always
displayed in the Map View when it is opened or when it is part of output such as Excel, PDF,
or paper printing.

Default print area (UDR bounding rectangle). TEMS Discovery provides several
features such as Reporting, Batch Printing, and Batch PDF View to output data in the Map
View. Instead of leaving TEMS Discovery to automatically determine output area, you can
create a UDR in the Map View and select that UDR as the output boundary.

Cluster UDR mapping for reporting. In this spreadsheet, you can create indexes for
cluster UDRs. When you create the report template in the Report Template Builder, you can
select an index in Report Options so that only the data collected in the corresponding UDR
will be considered for reporting.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  33

3.2.4.3 Project Properties – Cell Configuration

The default cell configuration defined here will be used for generating Cell ID frames and Map
View reports (if prompted to include cell configuration in the report template), as well as other
functions that require the presence of a cell configuration.
You have the option of selecting a default cell configuration so that it will be always displayed
in the Map View when it is opened, or you can choose to just restore the last displayed cell
configuration.

34  Data List and Progress Log

3.2.5 Open Project
From the Project List, you can double-click on a project, or right-click the project field and
choose Import Project to open a project. Once a project is open, a workspace like the one
shown below will be created. This workspace contains multiple views that can be turned on or
off by their corresponding toolbar buttons or from the File menu.

3.2.6 Delete Project

You can select a project in the Project List, then hit the Delete key on the keyboard or choose
Remove from the pop-up menu to delete the project. All data belonging to that project will be
permanently removed from the disk and cannot be recovered.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  35

3.2.7 TEMS Discovery Peers
TEMS Discovery maintains a list of TEMS Discovery peers that can access and share data.
Click the Network button in the Project List toolbar to bring up the Remote Data
Sharing Servers dialog. In this dialog, you can add, remove, or edit TEMS Discovery peers.

To add or edit a TEMS Discovery peer, click the Add or Edit button to bring up the
Add/Edit Remote Data Server dialog.

36  Data List and Progress Log

The settings in this dialog must be consistent with what is defined in TEMS Discovery peer
(defined in Data Networking). Clicking the Test button will test whether this specific remote
TEMS Discovery peer is accessible.

3.3 GIS List

External GIS data must be imported into TEMS Discovery. The imported GIS data will be
listed in the GIS List, providing an overview of the GIS data that TEMS Discovery can
access. The GIS data in this view can be sent to the Map View for display.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  37

When importing GIS data, you will be asked to define a geo area name for that data. In the GIS
List, the GIS data will then be organized by its geo area. When you create a project, one of the
geo areas listed in this window can be assigned to the Geo Area property of the project. See
Project List for more information.
Global UDRs can be used to match drive test data against project/dataset when importing
drive test data to decide where (project and dataset) to put the imported log file if the user has
selected the Use global UDR specified project/dataset option.

GIS List Toolbar

Expand. Expand or collapse all tree node data.

Unpack UDR.

UDR Attr. Display the UDR Attribute Editor.

Help.

GIS List Pop-up Menu

Send to Map View. Open the Map View and
display the selected map on the view.

Delete. Delete the selected geo area or map from

TEMS Discovery.

38  Data List and Progress Log

3.4 Task Window
The Task Window lists the status of background tasks that are created by importing data or
configuring Automatic Data Processing.

Task Window Toolbar

Stop. Cancel all tasks, running or pending.

Save. Save the task status history to an ASCII file.

Copy. Copy the task status history to the Clipboard.

Cleanup. Clean up the Task Window view.

Help.

User's Guide Data List and Progress Log  39

3.5 Message Log
The Message Log contains the message generated from the current operation, such as Report
Generation, Script Execution, etc.

Message Log Toolbar

Show Message Log.

Stop the currently running operation.

Save the message log to an ASCII file.

Erase the message log.

Help.

3.6 ADP Management Window

The ADP (Automatic Data Processing) Management window can be docked to the left panel.
This window provides quick access to task editing and status monitoring for the Automatic
Data Processing task.

40  Data List and Progress Log

4 Main Project Windows
This section describes the display windows in the project workspace in further detail.
 Data Explorer
 Synchronizable Views
 Summary Data Views
 Legend View

4.1 Data Explorer

The Data Explorer organizes project data into three categories: Dataset, Cells, and
GIS. Each object in the Data Explorer can be dragged-and-dropped into multiple views.
To open the Data Explorer, right-click on a project in the Project List and select Open
Project or Open Project with View Layout from the context menu.

4.1.1 Dataset
The Dataset tab displays drive test data in three logical groups:
 Archive. Datasets that have been compressed and stored in the disk as .ZIP files to
save space.
 Composite. Multiple datasets/mobiles that have been combined to construct
logical datasets/mobiles.
 Datasets. Drive test data that has been processed (binned) from the source data. The
hierarchy of the data is: Dataset > Mobile Group > Mobile > Frame > Metric.
Except for the archives, each group is in a tree view layout that can be drilled down to the
metric level.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.1 Dataset Toolbar
Show/Hide. Show (or hide) the data filtering options.

Refresh. Refresh tree view

 Stop Automatically Refreshing Dataset Tree View.
Queue. Open the print queue. See Print Queue for more information.

Delta. Generate Delta/special-type grid-binned metrics. See Delta/Special -type Grid-binned Metrics
for more information.
Unpack. Unpack a TEMS Discovery packed dataset.

42  Main Project Windows

 Composite options:
 Create/Edit Static Composite Dataset. See Static Composite Dataset for more
information.
 Modify Dynamic Composite Dataset Scope. Modify restrictions for applying the rules
defined in dynamic composite dataset to current project. See Modify Dynamic Composite Dataset
Scope for more information.
 Create/Edit Dynamic Composite Dataset. See Dynamic Composite Dataset Settings for
more information.
Group. Create dataset group.

Help.

4.1.1.2 Color Scheme

The metric list tree nodes for a dataset are color-coded according to the nature and the level of
data.
To illustrate, the following hard-coded color scheme is used:
 TEMS Discovery-predefined Scripts/Custom Metric/Condition Expression:
Orange
 User-defined Scripts/Custom Metric/Condition Expression: Green
 Password protected Scripts/Custom Metric/Condition Expression: Maroon
 TEMS Discovery-Special Metric Group: Red

You can change the color scheme by selecting a new set of favorite colors for certain
modifiable tree notes. See Color Scheme Options for more information.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.3 Dataset Options
Datasets can be filtered by sector group, condition expression, event set, and/or user- defined
region. Those filters will affect what data is to be considered for data presentation and statistics.
In addition, TEMS Discovery can list only the files that meet the listing filters, problem set,
favorite flag, or collection date/processing date. You can also search the dataset tree for any
label that contains the search text.

4.1.1.3.1 On-fly Composite

The On-fly Composite option allows the user to create dynamical composite dataset based
on multiple device attribute. This option is only available when database is selected for
measurement data storage.

4.1.1.3.2 Data Filters

The Data Filters option is different from the Listing Filters (Non-Composite) option. The Data
Filters option will not affect the dataset listing in the Data Explorer, but it will affect what data
can be analyzed and displayed. In another words, if a metric is dragged-and- dropped to any
view, only the data within the filtering region covered by the sector group and meeting the
conditions will be displayed.
 Sector group. If a sector group is selected, only the data at the location that is
covered by the sectors in the sector group will be considered. See Cells in Map View
for information about defining a sector group.
 Condition. If one or multiple condition expressions are selected, the data to be
considered must also meet the condition. Click the Browse button to open the Script
Builder, where you can define or edit a condition expression. See the Script Builder
section for more information.

44  Main Project Windows

  Event set. If an event set is selected, the data to be considered must also meet the
condition defined in the event set. Click the Browse button to open the Event Set
Configuration dialog, where you can define or edit an event set. See Event Set Filter for
more information.
 Region. If a filter region is selected, only the data within the defined region will be
considered. See GIS in Map View for information about creating a user- defined
region (UDR) and assigning attributes to each polygon.
 Consider polygon attribute. If this option is selected, only the data that falls
within the polygon with the specified attribute and value will be considered.
In case Data Filters option pane is hidden, an indicator in red color will be displayed as below.

4.1.1.3.3 Geo Bin

The Geo Bin option is to provice on-the-fly solution to aggregate the data in geolocation bin.

 Binning Method
TEMS Discovery provides two algorithms, by route distance and by location
grid, for geo-location binning. If you choose to use route distance binning, the data
within the distance of the defined binning size will be binned, whereas if you choose
to use location grid binning, the data within the square area of defined binning size
will be binned.
 Binning Type
The default binning type is by the nature of data. TEMS Discovery has pre- defined
binning type for each metric by its nature, for example, use LAVG (linear average for
Ec/Io, etc.). However, you can select user-defined option and select one of binning
type for all the data to be geo-binned. The selectable binning types are: AVG, LAVG,
MIN, MAX, COUNT, SUM, FIRST and LAST.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 4.1.1.3 Listing Filters (Non-

The Listing Filters option is different from the Data Filters option. The Listing Filters option
will not directly affect the statistics of displayed data. However, it does directly affect whether
a project, dataset, file/device, or metric will be displayed under the Data Explorer tree view.
Please be advised that these options will not affect the listing of composite dataset.
 Problem Sets. You can select a problem set as a filter to list only the datasets or
devices that have the problem defined in the problem set. Be sure to click the Refresh
button to refresh the Dataset tree view after any change to the selection of problem
sets. This option only affects the dataset listing in the Data Explorer.
 Favorite. The Frame or Metric can be added to or removed from the favorite group
through its pop-up menu. The collection of these Frames and Metrics can be named and
saved to a favorite group. The Favorite combo box lists all available favorite groups.
Once a favorite group is selected from the combo box, only the Frames or Metrics that
belong to the group will be listed in the tree view. This option only affects the dataset
listing in the Data Explorer.
 Date filter by. You can search the dataset within a certain period based on its
processing date or collection date. You will need to click the Refresh button to
refresh the dataset tree view after any change to the date criteria. This option only
affects the dataset listing in the Data Explorer.
You can also select context menu shown below

to bring up the following dialog for defining date range for listing, so that only the
file/devices which are processed or collected within that date range will be listed.

46  Main Project Windows

Other than the above date filtering, for each dataset, only up to a certain number of
file/devices can be listed. You can select the context menu “Modify Max. Number Of Files
To Be Listed For Each Dataset” to modify this maximum number.

To be more specific, you can also manually select the file/device to be listed from the
following dialog which can be brought by selecting contaxt menu “Select File/Device For
Listing”.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.3 Search Dataset

You can search the dataset tree for any label that contains the specified search text. You can
search only for File/Device name, or if you also want to search the script results, check the
option Automatically generate script result if needed.

NOTE: The process of searching the script results may take some time, and you will not be able
to cancel the process once it starts.

48  Main Project Windows

4.1.1.4 Dataset Pop-up Menus

4.1.1.4.1 Dataset - Archive Pop-up Menu

File/Device Grouping By. Group mobile data by its
File Name, Device, ESN, IMEI, Label, or Mobile ID,
or by any user-defined attributes. See Device Attribute
Assignment.

De-Archive. De-archive the dataset so that it will be

listed under the logical group Datasets.

Delete. Delete the archived dataset permanently

from the disk.

Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the

selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can
paste the text to an external tool such as Notepad or
Excel for any purpose.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.4 Dataset - Composite Pop-up
Create/Edit
Static
Composite
Dataset. Open
the Create/Edit
Static
Composite
Dataset dialog.
See Static
Composite
Dataset.

Modify
Dynamic
Composite
Dataset
Scope. Open
the Modify
Dynamic
Composite
Dataset Scope
dialog. See
Modify
Dynamic
Composite
Dataset Scope.

Create/Edit
Dynamic
Composite
Dataset. Open
the Create/Edit
Dynamic
Composite
Dataset dialog.
See Dynamic
Composite
Dataset Settings.

Delete
Composite
Dataset.
Delete the
selected
composite
dataset.

Global Edit
Device
Attributes/Ti
me Offset.
Globally edit
the attributes of
all the devices
that are
members of the
selected
composite
dataset. See
Device

50  Main Project Windows

 Attribute
Assignment.

Open Analysis Set. Construct a new view layout and load data from the selected composite dataset based on
the pre-defined analysis sets.

Send to Problem Summary View. Select a problem set template (which can be defined in the Report
Template Builder) to generate a report of the problem from the selected composite dataset, and then display the
problem report in the Problem Summary View.

Send to Batch PDF View. Load data from the selected composite dataset and display a summary PDF based
on the pre-defined configuration in Batch PDF View.

Send to Map View. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Map View.

Send to Messages View. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Messages View.

Send to Time Chart. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Time Chart.

Send to Correlation View. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Correlation View.

Send to Histogram. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Histogram.

Send to Sector Statistics View. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre- defined
configuration to the Sector Statistics View.

Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-
defined configuration to the Multi-dimension Statistic View.

Send to Table View. Load data from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Table View.

Export to MapInfo Mif/Mid file with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected
composite dataset based on the pre-defined Table View configuration to MapInfo Mif/Mid files.

Export to Excel with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected composite dataset
based on the pre-defined Table View configuration to an Excel file.

Export to ASCII file in ZIP with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected composite dataset
based on the pre-defined Table View configuration to ASCII files and compresses them to a ZIP file.

Generate Report. Generate a report from the selected composite dataset based on the pre-defined report
template, and send the result to Excel.

Pilot Pollution Analysis. Run Pilot Pollution analysis on the selected composite dataset.

GSM Interference Matrix. Generate a GSM Interference Matrix on the selected composite dataset.

Batch Printing. Print data based on the pre-defined configuration to a printer or PDF. See Batch
Printing.

Clean Up Derived Data. Clean up the data that is not generated from data importing, thus releasing disk

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

space.

Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste
the text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

52  Main Project Windows

4.1.1.4.3 Dataset - Datasets Pop-up Menu
File/Device Grouping By.
Group mobile data by its File
Name, Device, ESN, IMEI,
Label, or Mobile ID, or by any
user-defined attributes. See
Device Attribute Assignment.

Global Edit Device

Attributes/Time Offset.
Globally edit the attributes of all
the devices that are members of
the selected dataset. See Device
Attribute Assignment.

Smart File Merger.

Automatically merge all the files
in the selected dataset, if the gap
between any two files is less
than or equal to the defined gap,
and their IMSIs are the same if
any of them has IMSI
information. In case both of
them do not have IMSI
information, then check their
IMEI, then ESN, and then
device type.

Send to Problem Summary

View. Bring up a dialog for
selecting a problem set template
(defined in the Report Template
Builder) to generate a report of
problems from the selected
dataset, and then display the
problem report in the Problem
Summary View.

Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Load data from the selected dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Multi-dimension Statistic View.

Generate Report. Generate a report from the selected dataset based on the pre-defined report template,
and send the result to Excel.

Pilot Pollution Analyzer. Run Pilot Pollution analysis on the selected dataset.

GSM Interference Matrix. Generate a GSM Interference Matrix on the selected dataset.

Delete. Delete the selected dataset.

Archive. Archive the selected dataset. The archived dataset will then be listed under the Archive tree node.

Pack Dataset for Sharing. Export the selected dataset to a ZIP file for archiving or sharing.

Clean Up Derived Data. Clean up the data that is not generated from data importing, thus releasing disk space.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste
the text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

54  Main Project Windows

4.1.1.4.4 Dataset - Mobile Group Pop-up Menu
Send to Problem Summary View. Select a
problem set template (defined in the Report Template
Builder) to generate a report of problems from the
selected mobile group, and then display the problem
report in Problem Summary View.

Send to Batch PDF View. Load data from the

selected mobile group and display a summary PDF
based on the pre-defined configuration in Batch PDF
View.

Send to Messages View. Display the selected

mobile groups to the Messages View.

Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Load

data from the selected mobile group based on the pre-
defined configuration to the Multi-dimension Statistic
View.

Send to Table View. Load data from the selected mobile group based on the pre-defined configuration to the
Table View.

Export to MapInfo Mif/Mid file with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected mobile
group based on the pre-defined Table View configuration to MapInfo Mif/Mid files.

Export to Excel file with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected mobile group based on
the pre-defined Table View configuration to Excel files.

Export to ASCII file in ZIP with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected mobile group
based on the pre-defined Table View configuration to ASCII files and compress them to a ZIP file.

Generate Report. Generate a report from the selected mobile group based on the pre-defined report template
and send the result to Excel.

Pilot Pollution Analysis. Run Pilot Pollution analysis on the selected mobile group.

GSM Interference Matrix. Generate a GSM Interference Matrix on the selected mobile group.

Global Edit Device Attributes/Time Offset. Globally edit the attributes of all the devices that are
members of the selected mobile group. See Device Attribute Assignment.

Archive. Archive the selected mobile group. The archived mobile can then be listed under the Archive
tree node.

Delete. Delete the selected mobile group.

Clean Up Derived Data. Clean up the data that is not generated from data importing, thus releasing disk space.

Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste
the text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.4 Dataset – Mobile Pop-up
Open Analysis Set. Construct a new view layout and
load data from the selected mobile data based on the
pre-defined analysis sets.
Send to Problem Summary View. Bring up a
dialog for selecting a problem set template (defined in
the Report Template Builder) to generate a report of
problems from the selected mobile, and then display the
problem report in Problem Summary View.
Send to Batch PDF View. Bring up a dialog for
selecting a summary view option to generate a
summary PDF from the selected device, and then
display the PDF in Batch PDF View.
Send to Map View. Load data from the selected
mobile based on the pre-defined configuration to the
Map View.
Send to Messages View. Display the selected
mobile to the Messages View.
Send to Time Chart. Load data from the selected
mobile based on the pre-defined configuration to the
Time Chart.

Send to Correlation View. Load data from the selected mobile based on the pre-defined configuration to the
Correlation View.
Send to Histogram. Load data from the selected mobile based on the pre-defined configuration to the
Histogram.
Send to Sector Statistics View. Load data from the selected mobile based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Sector Statistics View.
Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Load data from the selected mobile based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Multi-dimension Statistic View.
Send to Table View. Load data from the selected mobile based on the pre-defined configuration to the Table
View.
Export to MapInfo Mif/Mid file with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected mobile
based on the pre-defined Table View configuration to MapInfo Mif/Mid files.
Export to Excel file with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected mobile based on the
pre-defined Table View configuration to Excel files.
Export to ASCII file in ZIP with Table View Configuration. Export data from the selected mobile
based on the pre-defined Table View configuration to ASCII files and compress them to a ZIP file.
Generate Report. Generate a report from the selected mobile based on the pre-defined report template and send
the result to Excel.
Pilot Pollution Analysis. Run Pilot Pollution analysis on the selected mobile.
GSM Interference Matrix. Generate a GSM Interference Matrix on the selected mobile.
Batch Printing. Print data based on the pre-defined configuration to a printer or PDF. See Batch
Printing.
View/Edit Device Attributes/Time Offset. View and edit the selected mobile's device information. See
Device Attribute Assignment.
Archive. Archive the selected mobile. The archived mobile can then be listed under the Archive tree node.

56  Main Project Windows

Delete. Delete the selected mobile data.
Clean Up Derived Data. Clean up the data that is not generated from data importing, thus releasing disk
space.
Export Metric Group to ASCII File. Export the data of the selected metric group to an ASCII file.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste
the text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

4.1.1.4.6 Dataset - Script Root Pop-up Menu

Open Script Builder. Open the Script Builder.
Generate Results. Run all the scripts under the
selected script category, and generate results for each
script.
Delete Results. Delete the result of all scripts
under the selected script category.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the
selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can
paste the text to an external tool such as Notepad or
Excel for any purpose.

4.1.1.4.7 Dataset – Script Pop-up Menu

Add to favorite. Add the selected script to the pre-
defined favorite group.
Remove from favorite. Remove the selected
script from the current favorite group.
Open Script Builder. Open the Script Builder.
Generate Result. Generate results for the selected
script.
Delete Result. Delete the results generated by the
script.

Send to Messages View. Execute the selected script and display the result in the Messages View.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste the
text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.4 Dataset - Script-Event Root Pop-up
Group By. Events can be grouped event category,
which is the default, or by event priority, or by one of
the report variables. Event priority and report variables
are defined when you create a script.

Send to Map View. Execute the script and display all

events in the Map View.
Send to Messages View. Execute the script and
display all events in the Messages View.
Send to Time Chart. Execute the script and
display all events in the Time Chart.

Send to Correlation View. Not applicable.

Send to Table View. Execute the script and display all events in the Table View.
Send to Histogram. Execute the script and display all events in the Histogram. Send
to Sector Statistic View. Not applicable.
Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Not applicable.
Send to Google Earth. Execute the script and display all events in Google Earth.
Send to Bing Map. Execute the script and display all events in Bing Map.
Send to Print Queue. Execute the script and send to Print Queue.
Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric. Not applicable.
Generate Sector Statistics Report. Execute the script and generate a statistic report per sector.
Export to Single Text File. Execute the script and export all events to a text file.
Export to Text File per Sector. Execute the script and export all events to a text file per sector.
Export to Google Earth KML/KMZ file. Export the selected metric to a KML/KMZ file that can be
displayed in Google Earth or any other tools that support KML/KMZ files.
Export to MapInfo MIF/MID File. Execute the script and export all events to a MapInfo MIF/MID file.
Export to Vertical Mapper GRD File. Not applicable.
Edit Color/Symbol. Open the Plot Band Definition dialog and edit the color/symbol for the selected event.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can

58  Main Project Windows

 paste the text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.4 Dataset - Script-Event Category Pop-up
Group By. Events can be grouped event category,
which is the default, or by event priority, or by one of
the report variables. Event priority and report variables
are defined when you create a script.

Send to Map View. Execute the script and display

events of the selected category in the Map View.
Send to Messages View. Execute the script and
display all events of the selected category in the
Messages View.
Send to Time Chart. Execute the script and display
events of the selected category in the Time Chart.

Send to Correlation View. Not applicable.

Send to Table View. Execute the script and display events of the selected category in the Table View. Send
to Histogram. Execute the script and display events of the selected category in the Histogram. Send to
Sector Statistic View. Not applicable.
Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Not applicable.
Send to Google Earth. Execute the script and display all events in Google Earth.
Send to Bing Map. Execute the script and display all events in Bing Map.
Send to Print Queue. Execute the script and send to Print Queue.
Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric. Not applicable.
Generate Sector Statistics Report. Not applicable.
Export to Single Text File. Execute the script and export events of the selected category to a text file.
Export to Text File per Sector. Execute the script and export events of the selected category to a text file per
sector.
Export to Google Earth KML/KMZ File. Execute the script and export events of the selected category to a
Google Earth KML or KMZ file.
Export to MapInfo MIF/MID File. Execute the script and export events of the selected category to a
MapInfo MIF/MID file.
Export to Vertical Mapper GRD File. Not applicable.
Edit Color/Symbol. Open the Plot Band Definition dialog and edit the color/symbol for the selected event
category.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can

60  Main Project Windows

 paste the text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

4.1.1.4.10 Dataset - Script-Event Pop-up Menu

Open Analysis Set. Execute the script and open the
associated analysis set.
Send to Map View. Execute the script and display
the selected event in the Map View.
Send to Messages View. Execute the script and
display the selected event in the Messages View.
Send to Time Chart. Execute the script and
display the selected event in the Time Chart.
Send to Correlation View. Not applicable.
Send to Table View. Execute the script and
display the selected event in the Table View.
Send to Histogram. Not applicable.
Send to Sector Statistic View. Execute the script
and display the selected event in Sector Statistic View.
Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Execute
the script and display the selected event in Multi-
dimension Statistic View.
Send to Google Earth. Execute the script and
display all events in Google Earth.
Send to Bing Map. Execute the script and display all
events in Bing Map.
Send to Print Queue. Execute the script and send to
Print Queue.

Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric. Not applicable.

Generate Sector Statistics Report. Execute the script and generate a Sector Statistics Report for the
selected event to a text file.
Export to Single Text File. Execute the script and export the selected event to a text file.
Export to Text File per Sector. Execute the script and export the selected event to a text file per sector.
Export to Google Earth KML/KMZ File. Execute the script and export events of the selected event to a
Google Earth KML or KMZ file.
Export to MapInfo MIF/MID File. Execute the script and export events of the selected event to a
MapInfo MIF/MID file.
Export to Vertical Mapper GRD File. Not applicable.
Edit Color/Symbol. Open the Plot Band Definition dialog and edit the color/symbol for the selected event.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste the
text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.4. Dataset - Script-Metric Pop-up
Send to Map View. Execute the script and display
the selected metric in the Map View.
Send to Time Chart. Execute the script and
display the selected metric in the Time Chart.
Send to Correlation View. Not applicable.
Send to Table View. Execute the script and
display the selected metric in the Table View.
Send to Histogram. Execute the script and display
the selected metric in the Histogram.
Send to Sector Statistic View. Execute the script
and display the selected metric in the Sector Statistic
View.
Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Execute
the script and display the selected metric in the Multi-
dimension Statistic View.
Send to Google Earth. Execute the script and
display all events in Google Earth.
Send to Bing Map. Execute the script and display all
events in Bing Map.
Send to Print Queue. Execute the script and send to
Print Queue.
Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric. Generate
Delta/Special-Type Grid-Binned Metric.

Generate Sector Statistics Report. Execute the script and generate a Sector Statistics Report for the
selected metric to a text file.
Export to Single Text File. Execute the script and export the selected metric to a text file.
Export to Text File per Sector. Execute the script and export the selected metric to a text file per sector.
Export to Google Earth KML/KMZ File. Execute the script and export events of the selected metric to a
Google Earth KML or KMZ file.
Export to MapInfo MIF/MID File. Execute the script and export events of the selected metric to a
MapInfo MIF/MID file.
Export to Vertical Mapper GRD File. Not applicable.
Edit Plot Band. Open the Plot Band Definition dialog and edit the plot band for the selected metric.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste the
text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

62  Main Project Windows

4.1.1.4.12 Dataset – Metric Group Pop-up Menu
Add to favorite. Add the selected frame to the pre-
defined favorite group.
Remove from favorite. Remove the selected
frame from the current favorite group.
Send to Messages View. Display the selected
frame in the Messages View.
Export Metric Group to ASCII File. Export the
selected frame to a text file.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the
selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can
paste the text to an external tool such as Notepad or
Excel for any purpose.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.4. Dataset – Metric Pop-up
Add to favorite. Add the selected metric to the
pre-defined favorite group.
Remove from favorite. Remove the selected
metric from the current favorite group.
Send to Map View. Display the selected metric in
the Map View.
Send to Time Chart. Display the selected metric in
the Time Chart.
Send to Correlation View. Load data from the
selected dataset based on the pre-defined
configuration to the Correlation View.
Send to Table View. Display the selected metric in
the Table View.
Send to Histogram. Display the selected metric in
the Histogram.
Send to Sector Statistic View. Display the
selected metric in the Sector Statistic View.
Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View. Display
the selected metric in the Multi-dimension Statistic
View.
Send to Google Earth. Display the selected metric in
Google Earth.
Send to Bing Map. Execute the script and display all
events in Bing Map.
Send to Print Queue. See Print Queue for more
information.
Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric. Generate
Delta/Special -type Grid-binned Metrics.

Generate Sector Statistics Report. Generate a Sector Statistics Report for the selected metric to a text file.
Export to Single Text File. Export the selected metric to a text file.
Export to Text File per Sector. Export the selected metric to a text file per sector.
Export to Google Earth KML/KMZ file. Export the selected metric to a KML/KMZ file that can be
displayed in Google Earth or any other tools that support KML/KMZ files.
Export to MapInfo MIF/MID File. Execute the selected metric to a MapInfo MIF/MID file.
Export to Vertical Mapper GRD File. Execute the selected metric to a Vertical Mapper GRD file.
Export to GPX (GPS Exchange Format) File. Execute the selected metric (Route in GPS Position) to a GPX
(GPS exchange format) file. This file can be imported into any software applications that support common GPS
data format to describe the drive test route.
Edit Plot Band. Open the Plot Band Definition dialog and edit the plot band for the selected metric.
Copy Text of Selected Label. Copy the text of the selected tree node to the Clipboard, so that you can paste the
text to an external tool such as Notepad or Excel for any purpose.

64  Main Project Windows

4.1.1.5 Static Composite Dataset
Multiple datasets and/or mobile data can be combined to form a super dataset. This can be
done by dragging-and-dropping one or more datasets or mobile data from the tree view on the
left to the list view on the right. The combined dataset will be listed in the Data Explorer–
Dataset List under Composite. The operation of this dataset is similar to a regular dataset.
The Create/Edit Static Composite Dataset dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Create/Edit Composite Dataset from the Data Explorer–Dataset
right-click menu.
 Clicking the Edit Composite Dataset button on the Data Explorer–Dataset
toolbar.
A composite dataset can be created in two ways: by drag-and-drop, or by spreadsheet filtering.

By Drag-and-Drop
To make the best use of the file/device grouping function, group data by a particular
attribute, and then drag-and-drop a group of data from the tree view on the left to the list
view on the right.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

By Spreadsheet Filtering
To list all file/devices in the spreadsheet, define a composite dataset from the selected datasets
on the Available Datasets list, and then press the Refresh Spreadsheet button in the
toolbar. As with Microsoft Office Excel, you can use the row filtering function to filter out the
unwanted data by a particular attribute, and then check the checkboxes to select the data.
The toolbar includes individual buttons for the various actions you might need to perform:

creating a new composite dataset, saving the dataset, saving the dataset under a different
name, or renaming or deleting the dataset.

66  Main Project Windows

4.1.1.6 Modify Dynamic Composite Dataset Scope
The Modify Dynamic Composite Dataset feature defines a set of rules by determining which
rules to apply automatically to a certain composite dataset. In some circumstances, we may
want to restrict the rules so that a more desired composite dataset can be generated.
This feature can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Modify Dynamic Composite Dataset Scope from the Data
Explorer–Dataset right-click context menu.
 Clicking the Edit Composite Dataset button in the Data Explorer–Dataset
toolbar.

You can limit the rules of a dynamic composite dataset so that they apply to a limited number
of datasets and/or a certain date range, and then save it as a named scoped dynamic
composite dataset. You can create unlimited scoped dynamic composite datasets from a base
dynamic composite dataset.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.1.7 Dataset Group
Multiple datasets can be grouped to form a dataset group.
The Group Dataset dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Edit Group Dataset from the Data Explorer–Dataset right-click
context menu.
 Clicking the Group button in the Data Explorer–Dataset toolbar.

To form a dataset group, drag-and-drop one or more datasets from the tree view on the left to
the list view on the right. The grouped dataset will be listed in the Data Explorer– Dataset List
with a prefix of <Group>. The operations for this dataset are similar to those for a regular
dataset.

68  Main Project Windows

4.1.2 Cells
The Cells tab is the logical display of network configurations, sector groups, and sector filter
expressions.

Network Configuration. Each project can contain multiple scenarios of network

configurations. Each scenario can have multiple versions and will have a "Base" version of
network configurations by default. You can modify the base version and save it to multiple
derived versions.
From the tree view, you can drill down any scenario of network configurations from cell site to
carrier parameters.
If any version of a cell configuration is displayed in the Map View, the background of the
corresponding tree node will be colored.

Sector Group. You can select some particular sectors and form a sector group with a name.
This sector group can be highlighted in the Map View for viewing, or used to filter drive test
data for analyzing.

Sector Filter Expression. The Sector Filter Expression is a logical expression that is
constructed from the cell site, sector, and carrier parameters. It is used to search sectors that
meet a user-defined condition. You can also save the searched sector as a

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

sector group for further manipulation. See Sector Filter Expression Builder for more
information.

4.1.2.1 Cells Toolbar

NL Analyzer. See Neighbor List Analyzer.

NL Work Order. See Neighbor List Work Order.

Unpack. Unpack a TEMS Discovery packed cell configuration.

Collapse. Collapse tree view.

Help.

4.1.2.2 Cells Pop-up Menus

4.1.2.2.1 Scenario
Edit View options. Open the Cell
Configuration View Options dialog.
The data structure used as the view
options is based on the "Base" version
of the selected cell configuration.

Edit Grouping Logic. Open the Cell

Site Grouping Logic dialog. The data
structure used as the group categories is
based on the "Base" version of the
selected cell configuration.

Apply Grouping Logic. Apply pre-

defined group logic to the logical
display of all versions of the selected
cell configuration.

Edit Filter Expression. Open the

Cell Site/Sector Filter Expression
Builder. The data structure used as
parameters is based on the "Base"
version of the selected cell
configuration.

Save. Save the selected scenario.

Save As. Save the selected scenario as a new scenario.

Rename. Rename the selected scenario.

Remove. Remove the selected scenario.

Pack Scenario for Sharing. Pack the selected scenario to a ZIP file. This ZIP file can be shared with peers
and unpacked to other projects.

70  Main Project Windows

Unpack Scenario. Import a TEMS Discovery exported scenario.

Unpack Version. Import a TEMS Discovery exported scenario version.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.2.2.2 Scenario Version
Send to Map View. Display the selected scenario
version in the Map View.

Send to Google Earth. Display the selected

scenario version in Google Earth.

Send to Bing Map. Display the selected scenario

version in Bing Map.

Cell Configuration Editor/Sector Searcher by

Filter. Open the Cell Configuration Editor dialog.

Filter Expression Builder. Open the Cell

Site/Sector Filter Expression Builder dialog to build a
search criteria.

Save. Save the selected scenario version.

Save As. Save the selected scenario version as a new scenario version.

Rename. Rename the selected scenario version.

Remove. Remove the selected scenario version.

Pack Scenario for Sharing. Pack the selected scenario to a ZIP file. This ZIP file can be shared with peers
and unpacked to other projects.

Export Version to TEMS Investigation XML Cell File. Export the selected scenario version to a TEMS
Investigation XML cell file.

Export Version to Google Earth KML/KMZ File. Export the selected scenario version to a KML/KMZ file
that can be displayed in Google Earth or any other tools that support KML/KMZ files.

4.1.2.2.3 Cell Site

Edit Property. Open the Properties of Cell Site
dialog.

Move to Center. Move the selected cell site to the

center of the Map View.

Remove. Remove the selected cell site from the

network configuration.

Clone. Clone the selected cell site and bring up the Cell
Site Properties for editing.

72  Main Project Windows

User's Guide Main Project Windows 
4.1.2.2.4 Sector Group
Subset Display Mode: Toggle This Group. In
subset display mode, only the selected number of
sector groups will be displayed in the Map View.
Select this option to toggle the display of the selected
sector group in the Map View.

Highlight in Map View. Highlight the selected sector

group in the Map View, if any of the network
configurations are displayed in the Map View.

Send to Bing Map. Send the selected sector

group to Bing Map for display.

Save As. Save the selected sector group as a new

group.

Rename. Rename the selected sector group.

Remove. Remove the selected sector group.

4.1.2.2.5 Sector Filter Expression

Flag Filter Expression in Map View. Apply the
selected sector filter expression and highlight the
sectors that meet the filter in the Map View, if any of
the network configurations are displayed in the Map
View.

Edit Filter Expression. Open the Cell Site/Sector

Filter Expression Builder dialog to edit the selected
filter expression.

Save As. Save the selected sector filter expression as a

new filter expression.

Rename. Rename the selected sector filter

expression.

Remove. Remove the selected sector filter

expression.

74  Main Project Windows

4.1.3 GIS/Coverage Map
The GIS/Coverage Map tab lists all GIS data associated with the current project. The GIS data
can be displayed in the Map View by dragging-and-dropping, or by choosing it from its pop-up
menu. Before dragging the GIS image/map to the Map View, you can define the translucency
for the image/map for rendering.

4.1.3.1 GIS Categories

GIS data can be grouped into the following categories:
 Coverage Maps
 Download Terra Server Images/Maps
 Floor Prints
 Images/Maps
 User Defined Regions (UDRs)

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.3.1.1 Coverage Maps
TEMS Discovery can import a coverage map to a user-defined geo area. This user- defined geo
area can be assigned to a geo area property of a project (see GIS List and Project Properties for
more information). Coverage maps can consist of data in any GIS format exported from a third-
party cell planning tool and can be used in TEMS Discovery as regular GIS maps.

4.1.3.1.2 Download TerraServer Images/Maps

TEMS Discovery offers direct access to multiple online sources of imagery, topographic maps,
and gridded terrain data. This includes worldwide high-resolution color imagery from Digital
Globe/GlobeXplorer/AirPhotoUSA (watermarked access for free), and access to the entire
TerraServer-USA database of USGS satellite imagery and topographic maps, free of charge.
TEMS Discovery can also access WMS data sources, including built-in access to elevation data
and color imagery for the entire world.
To open the Select Online Data Source to Download dialog, right-click on the tree node and
choose Download. The downloaded GIS data will be listed with its geo boundary as the title.

4.1.3.1.3 Floor Prints

When TEMS Discovery imports indoor drive test data, it will also import any floor prints
contained in the indoor data package if the indoor data package contains geo references for the
floor prints in the following supported coordinate systems:
 Lat/Lon projection (1) with WGS84 datum (104)
 UTM projection (8) with WGS84 datum (104)
TEMS Discovery will save those geo references so that the user does not have to
manually rectify the floor prints.

4.1.3.1.4 Images/Maps
TEMS Discovery can import GIS data to a user-defined geo area. This user-defined geo area
can be assigned to a geo area property of a project (see GIS List and Project Properties for
more information). As shown below, the geo area property of the current project is
Demo_Geo, and three maps have been imported to this geo area.

76  Main Project Windows

4.1.3.1.5 UDR
TEMS Discovery allows the user to draw user-defined regions (UDRs), or to choose area
features from the terrain vector data (see Map View for more information). UDR is mainly used
for data filtering

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.3.2 GIS Pop-up Menus

4.1.3.2.1 GIS - Download TerraServer Images/Maps Pop-Up Menu

Download. Download an online GIS data source. See
Download Online GIS Data Source.

4.1.3.2.2 GIS - Downloaded Map Pop-Up Menu

Save As. Once the online GIS data is downloaded, it
can be saved as a map in the TEMS Discovery internal
GIS format under the current project's geo area. That
map will be listed under the Image/Maps category.

4.1.3.2.3 GIS - Image/Maps Pop-Up Menu

Send to Map View. Send the selected image/map to
the Map View.

Move to Center. Move the selected image/map, if

displayed, to the center of the Map View.

Assign Plot Band. Assign a plot band for the

coverage map.
See Layer/View Options.

Delete. Delete the selected image/map.

78  Main Project Windows

4.1.3.2.4 GIS – Floor Prints Pop-Up Menus
Send to Map View. Send the selected floor print to
the Map View.

Move to Center. Move the selected floor print, if

displayed, to the center of the Map View.

Delete. Delete the selected floor print.

Rectify (Georeference) Floor Print. Bring up the

Floor Print Rectifier to rectify the selected floor print.

Export Geo-rectified Floor Print. Export the

selected geo-rectified floor print to a user selected
folder.
A MapInfo TAB file containing the geo reference
information in lat/lon geographic projection will be
exported to the selected folder.

4.1.3.2.5 GIS - UDR Pop-Up Menus

UDR Attribute Browser. Open the UDR Attribute
Browser to browse the UDR attributes.

Send to Map View. Send the selected UDR to the

Map View.

Move to Center. Move the selected UDR, if

displayed, to the center of the Map View.

Remove From Map View. Remove the selected

UDR from the Map View.

Pack UDR for Sharing. Save the selected UDR

and its information as a .ZIP file.

Copy UDR to Global UDR. Copy the UDR to the

global UDR list.

Delete. Delete the selected UDR.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.1.3.3 Download Online GIS Data Source
TEMS Discovery allows download of seamless USGS topographic maps and satellite imagery
for all of the United States, as well as high-resolution color aerial imagery for select
metropolitan areas from TerraServer-USA. Additionally, several built-in WMS (OpenGC Web
Map Server) databases provide easy access to digital terrain data and color satellite imagery for
the entire world.
This is an extremely powerful feature as it puts many terabytes of very expensive data right at
our fingertips in TEMS Discovery for no additional cost. (Note that this feature requires
Internet access.)
Open the Select Online Data Source to Download dialog in the following ways:
 Right-clicking Download TerraServer Image Maps from the Data Explorer–
GIS List and selecting Download from the context menu.
 Clicking the Download TerraServer Image Maps button in the Map View or
Google Earth toolbar.
This dialog allows selection of the type, or theme, of the data to download, as well as the extent
of the data to download. You can choose to download the current screen bounds, an area to
download around an address, or a specific latitude/longitude bound; or you can choose to
download the entire data source.

The Add Sources From File button allows you to add new WMS sources from an
external text file generated by the Global Mapper, a third-party tool. This tool can be
accessed from your Global Mapper Application Data.

80  Main Project Windows

Download In Map View or Google Earth
If you click the button on the Map View or Google Earth toolbars, the Save Map As dialog
will appear prior to the Select Online Data Source for Download dialog.

After the selections are made, TEMS Discovery will automatically download the most
appropriate layer and save it under the specified geo area with the specified name. This
newly created geo area/geo map will be listed in the GIS List.
Download In Data Explorer
Once the data to download is defined, TEMS Discovery will automatically download the most
appropriate layer for display while zooming in and out in the Map View window.
This way, an overview of the data can be viewed while zoomed out, and more data details will
become available as you zoom in. This data can be saved in full resolution to the TEMS
Discovery internal format by choosing Save As from the Data Explorer– GIS List context
menu.

4.1.3.4 UDR Attribute Browser

The UDR Polygon Attribute Browser is a quick way to browse UDR attributes. This browser
can be accessed in the following ways:
 Clicking the UDR Attribute button on the GIS List toolbar.
 Selecting UDR Attribute Browser from the UDR right-click context menu.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

82  Main Project Windows
4.2 Synchronizable Views
The project workspace can contain multiple views. These views provide various data
presentations for visual analysis and troubleshooting. The views are categorized as
synchronizable views and summary data views.
Synchronizable views simultaneously display data that was collected at the same
moment. All of these views can be viewed while playing back drive test data.
Synchronizable views include:
 Messages View
 Map View
 Google Earth
 Time Chart
 Metric Correlation
 Table View
 Point Detail View
 Instant Chart
 Wave View
 Legend View

Two synchronization modes are available:

Mouse Moving Mode
Mouse Clicking Mode
Once the data point in a view is identified, whether by mouse hovering or mouse clicking, the
related information will be synchronized and highlighted in all other synchronizable views.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.1 Messages View
The Messages View contains two panels.
The left panel is a spreadsheet that lists the message in time sequence. The information in the
spreadsheet can include the timestamp, File/Device ID, frame name, direction, and configurable
key information for the message (columns are selected with the Message Header Column
Selector button on the Messages View toolbar).
The right panel holds the Detail View and the Message Flow Diagram. The Detail View can be
a spreadsheet or a tree view, depending on what information is displayed. The Message Flow
Diagram displays a user-defined message cycle in diagram form.
You can show or hide the Detail View/Message Flow Diagram by clicking the
Detail/Diagram View button on the Messages View toolbar.

For information to be listed in the KeyInfo column, you can define many KeyInfo
settings and select one of the settings from the KeyInfo Settings combo box.
Click the KeyInfo Settings button to access the Messages View KeyInfo Settings dialog.
To format a particular message with color, click the Layer 3 Message Coloring button to
launch the Message Coloring settings dialog and choose a color for that
message.

84  Main Project Windows

4.2.1.1 Messages View Toolbars

Summary View Toolbar

Create New Message View
Detail/Diagram View. Show or hide the right-side panel (Detail View).
Layer 3/RRC IE Browser. Open the Signaling Message Browser.
KeyInfo Settings. Open the Messages View KeyInfo Settings dialog.
Layer 3 Message Coloring. Open the Message Coloring dialog.
Show/Hide Extra Options. Show/hide the KeyInfo Settings, File/Device Filter, and
Frame Filter settings.
Zoom Spreadsheet. Zoom in or out of the spreadsheet.
Enable/Disable Auto-Adjustment of Column Height.
Group Messages by File/Device.
Message Header Column Selector. Select the columns to be included in the message
header. Options: Time, FD, Frame Name, Direction, and KeyInfo.
Clean Spreadsheet. Clean up the spreadsheet.
Copy Selected Summary. Copy the selected message in the spreadsheet to the Clipboard. The
message can then be pasted to a text editor outside of TEMS Discovery. To select one or more
messages, left-click the first message, and hold down the mouse to select other messages.

Copy All Summary. Copy all messages in the spreadsheet to the Clipboard, from which they
can be pasted to a text editor outside of TEMS Discovery.
Export Summary to Text
 Export all messages displayed in the spreadsheet to a tab-delimited text file.
 Export all messages, including their decoded detail information, to a text file.
Search Forward. Find the next message containing the text phrase defined in the text box.

Search Backward. Find the previous message containing the text phrase defined in the text
box.
Filter. Apply a filter and display only the messages whose KeyInfo contains the text phrase
defined in the text box.
Filtering per Selected Layer 3 Message Type. Apply a filter and display only the
messages selected by the user in the spreadsheet.
Remove Filter. Remove the filter and display all loaded messages.
Help.

Detail View Toolbar

Search Next. Find the next content containing the text phrase defined in the text box.
Expand/Collapse Tree View.
Copy All Detail. Copy all content in the spreadsheet or tree view to the Clipboard to paste
them to a text editor outside of TEMS Discovery.
Export Detail to Text File. Export all content in the spreadsheet or tree view to a tab-
delimited text file.
Close Detail/Diagram View.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.1.2 Display Messages
Messages can be sent from the Data Explorer to the Messages View in two ways:
1. Select a data object and drag-and-drop it into the Messages View.
2. Right-click a data object and choose Send to Messages View from the context
menu.

4.2.1.3 Navigate Messages

Each row in the spreadsheet on the left represents one message, detailing the information for a
corresponding message that can be displayed in the Detail View on the right. To show or hide
Detail View, click the Detail/Diagram View button on the
toolbar. Or, as a shortcut, double-click any row in the spreadsheet to show the Detail
View with detail information for the selected message.
The Page and Arrow buttons on your keyboard (Page Up, Page Down, Arrow Up, and
Arrow Down) can be used to navigate messages in the spreadsheet.

4.2.1.4 Filter Messages

Messages displayed in the spreadsheet can be filtered in four ways.
 By Key Info
If you input a text phrase in the KeyInfo text box and then click the KeyInfo
Filter toolbar button, the spreadsheet will display only the messages whose KeyInfo
contains the specified text phrase.
If you click the Remove Filter button in the toolbar, the filter will be removed and
all messages will be displayed.
You can input multiple text phrases in the KeyInfo text box, with double quotation
marks and connected with a plus sign (+). For example, with the text phrases "key info
1"+"key info 2", only messages whose KeyInfo contains either "key info 1" OR "key
info 2" will be displayed.
 By File/Device ID
If any data is displayed in the Messages View, TEMS Discovery will dynamically
assign a sequence ID (FD-xx) to its associated file/device, and list that ID in the
File/Device filter combo box at the top of the spreadsheet. You can make multiple
selections in the dropdown list to display only the selected file/device.
 By Frame Name
The combo box at the top of the spreadsheet lists all the names of the frames and
scripts displayed in the spreadsheet. You can make multiple selections in the
dropdown list to display only the selected frames/scripts.
 By Selected Message
If you select a message in the spreadsheet and then click the Filter toolbar button,
the spreadsheet will display only the selected message.
If you click the Remove Filter button in the toolbar, the filter will be removed and
all messages will be displayed.

86  Main Project Windows

4.2.1.5 Message Flow Diagram
The Message Flow Diagram displays the user-defined message cycle in diagram form.

A message cycle can be built from (and only from) the Layer 3 signaling messages listed in
the message summary view on the left panel, based on the user-defined message cycle
configuration.

4.2.1.5.1 Message Flow Diagram Toolbar

Edit Message Cycle Configuration. Access the Message Cycle Configuration dialog.

Display Message Flow Containing the Selected Message. Display the message cycle that
contains the message currently selected in the message summary spreadsheet.

or Display Previous or Next Message Flow. Display the previous or next message cycle,
starting from the cycle start time shown beneath the toolbar. This cycle start time will be
automatically updated after a message cycle is built and displayed.
Copy Diagram. Copy the displayed diagram to the Clipboard for pasting to any external
application.
Save as Image. Save the displayed diagram as an image file.

Set Cycle Start Time. Manually select a Layer 3 signaling message in the message
summary spreadsheet and click this button to set a specific start time for building a new message
cycle.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.1.5.2 Message Cycle Configuration
The message cycle is defined in the Message Cycle Configuration dialog. This dialog is
accessed by clicking the button in the Message Flow Diagram toolbar. Options are:
 The message cycle starts with a message/event that contains any of the text phrases
listed in the column Start Message/Event Contains.
 The message cycle ends with a message/event that contains any of the text phrases
listed in the column End Message/Event Contains.
 All the messages/events in between the start and end of the message cycle will contain
any of the text phrases listed in the column Other Message/Event Contains.
 The message time delay will be calculated based on the message pair defined in the
Time Delay Message Pair sheet. Each row represents one message pair.
You have the options to display all key information associated with the messages in
diagram, and/or to display the time delay of the message pair.

88  Main Project Windows

4.2.2 Map View
The Map View is a multi-layer display that can display multiple datasets, multiple cell
configurations, and multiple GIS images or online Map in the same view. Data can be
displayed in the Map View in the following ways:
 Drag-and-drop a data object from the Data Explorer into the Map View.
 Right-click a data object and choose Send to Map View from the context menu. Click
any data point on the Map View to display detail information in the tooltip.

4.2.2.1 Map View Toolbar

Table Size. Display a table size selector for creating multiple Map Views.
Multiple views can be synchronized by clicking the Synchronization button .
Combo List the available configurations. Each configuration defines the collection of metrics to be loaded and
box in which sub-view to load them. When sending/dragging a file/device to the Map View with a
configuration selected, the currently defined data filtering options will be applied.
Save Configuration. Save the currently displayed metric and its location as a configuration.
Save Configuration As. Save the currently metric configuration as a new configuration.
Delete Selected Configuration. Delete the selected configuration.

Combo OnlineMap. List the available online map data source that you have been licensed.
box
Draw GIS in Grayscale. Display the GIS image in grayscale

Layer/View Option. Open the Map View Options dialog. See Layer/View Options.
Turn On/Off Subview Synchronization Mode. Synchronize all Map sub-views created by

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 the Table Size button .
Download TerraServer Image/Maps. Download an online GIS data source. See Download
Online GIS Data Source.
Refresh Display to Apply Current Data Filters. Apply the new data filtering options
defined in the Data Explorer and refresh the display.
Cleanup All Layers. Clean up the display.
Pointer. Change the cursor to a pointer. Right-clicking the screen will bring up the pop-up menu
shown below:
Toggle Full View. This menu will only be enabled
when multiple Map Views are displayed.
Choosing this menu maximizes the current Map
View, or restores the Map View to its original state
if the current view is maximized.
Set As Home View. Save the current view port as
Home View.
Show Home View. Restore the view port to
Home View.
Refresh Display with Current Data Filters.
Apply the new data filtering and refresh the
display.
Copy. Copy the current display to the Clipboard to
paste it outside of TEMS Discovery.
Dataset. See Dataset in Map View.
Coverage Maps. Coverage maps exported from
external planning tools.
GIS Image/Maps. See GIS in Map View.

User Defined Region. See GIS in Map View.

Network Configuration. See Cells in Map View.
Legend. Show or hide the legend display.
Page Setup. Page setup for print-out or PDF generation.
Print / Generate PDF. See Create Output.
Generate Image File. See Create Output.
Export to GeoTIFF File. See Create Output.
Export Current View to GIS Package. See Create Output.

Home View. Reset the current view port to a pre-defined Home View. To define the Home View,
right-click on the Map View and choose Set as Home View from the pop-up menu.
Reset.
Reset all Map Views to the view port that covers
bounding rectangle of the user-selected loaded d in
that view. If the Auto-Reset option is selected, view
port will be automatically reset at each time drag-and-
drop new data to that view.

Pan. Pan view to user-selected direction and distance.

Zoom In/Out.
1. To zoom in, left-click the desired location, which will be used as the center for the zoom

90  Main Project Windows

 in.
2. To zoom out, right-click the location, which will be used as the center for the zoom out.
3. Left-clicking and holding will draw a rectangle that will zoom in the view port to the area
within the rectangle.
4. Right-clicking and holding will draw a rectangle that will zoom out of the view port to that
area within the rectangle.
Unzoom. Undo the last zoom action. Clicking the Reset button will clear the history of
previous zoom actions.
Show/Hide Legends. Show or hide the legend in the Map View.
Indoor Mode.
Spider Move. Displays ray lines that link the data point to the appropriate sector for serving and
neighbor sites, based on PSC (WCDMA), PN (cdma2000/EVDO) or BCCH/BSICH (GSM). The ray
lines can be built based on phone data or scanner data.
1. Use Phone Data.
2. Use Scanner Data
Cell Radius Analysis. Click at a sector to perform cell radius analysis. See
Cell Radius Analysis.
Top 1 Sector Coverage IntelliSense. Click at a sector to view its coverage. The coverage can
be indicated by any of the following options:
1. Show ray lines from sector to drive route
2. Color the drive route with the color of sector display
Top 1 Sector Coverage. Show or hide all sectors' coverage. There are two ways to
visualize sector coverage, by ray lines and by color.
Utilities
Spotlight on UDR. Lower the light of the surrounding area to stand out the UDR area.
Data Route Offset. If more than two data routes are displayed, you can toggle this button to apply
or not apply the screen offset for all data routes displayed.
Dataset Routes Distance. If more than two data routes are displayed:
1. Left-click to increase the screen offset of the data routes.
2. Right-click to decrease the screen offset of the data routes.
You can also select a Coarse or Fine Tune option for the screen offset adjustment.
Dataset Routes Position. If more than two data routes are displayed:
1. Left-click to rotate the data routes, whose screen offset are not zero, clockwise.
2. Right-click to rotate the data routes, whose screen offset are not zero,
counterclockwise.
You can also select a Coarse or Fine Tune option for the dataset route position adjustment.
Data Point Icon Size:
1. Left-click to enlarge the icon size of a data point.
2. Right-click to reduce the icon size of a data point.
Data Label. Display value of data points on the view.
Dataset Route Direction. Show or hide the direction of the drive test.
Sector Selector/De-selector:
1. Left-clicking a sector will trigger an active flag.
2. Left-click and hold to draw a rectangle that selects all sectors within that rectangle. The
selected sectors will be highlighted with a grid in the pie.
3. Right-click and hold to draw a rectangle that de-selects all sectors within that rectangle.
4. Right-clicking the screen will bring up a pop-up menu with the following options:
 Save flagged sectors as group. Save the selected sectors to a sector group.
 Remove all flags. Clear the sector highlighting.

Search for specific metrics, as specified by the dropdown menu:

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 Pin-point Sector Logical Display. Left-click a site/sector to ensure the visibility of its
corresponding logical display in the tree view in the Data Explorer–Cells List.
Cell Site Property. Left-click a site or sector to bring up the dialog to view or edit site/sector
properties. See Cell Site Properties for more information.
Right-click on a site/sector to bring up the following context menu:
Edit Properties. Edit properties of the clicked site.

Clone. Clone the clicked site.

Relocate. Relocate the clicked site.

Remove. Remove the clicked site.

Neighbor List IntelliSense:
1. Moving the mouse over a sector will show ray lines that link to neighboring sectors.
2. Right-clicking the screen will bring up a pop-up menu. Choose Network configuration >
Freeze the current NL display, Remove the selected NL display, or Remove all NL display to
manipulate the display of ray lines.
NL Serving Sector Selector. Pick a sector as a serving sector of the neighbor list.

Edit Neighbor List. Edit the neighbor list for the serving sector picked by . You need to
select what kind of neighbor to add or remove from the dropdown menu.

1. Left-click on a sector to pick.

2. Right-click on a sector to remove.

Cell Site Icon Size. Left-click to enlarge the cell site icon. Right-click to reduce the cell site icon.

Cell Site Label. Shortcut for site/label display options. See Cell Configuration View Options.
View Antenna Pattern. Click a sector to view its antenna pattern. See Antenna Pattern
Viewer.
Measurement Tool:
1. With this tool activated, measure distance by pressing and holding the left mouse button
to draw a path.
2. Click on a path to select it.
3. If a path is selected, press and holding one end of the path to modify it.
4. Delete a path by double-clicking it.
5. Right-clicking the screen will bring up a a pop-up menu with the following options:
 Clear This Path. Remove the selected path.
 Clear All Paths. Clear all paths.
Terrain Path Profile:
1. Display the terrain path profile in the lower panel of Map View by left-clicking and
holding to draw a path. See Terrain Profile.

92  Main Project Windows

 2. Click on a path to select it and display the terrain path profile for that path.
3. If a path is selected, left-click and hold one end of the path to modify it.
4. Delete a path by double-clicking it.
5. Right-clicking the screen will bring up a a pop-up menu with the following options:
 Clear This Path. Remove the selected path.
 Clear All Paths. Clear all paths.
3D View. Open 3D window and display the current rendered terrain map in 3D. See 3D Map View.

UDR Selector:
1. Left-click a UDR to select it. Once the UDR is selected, a number of small black
squares will appear around the UDR.
2. Once the UDR is selected, left-click and hold its point to modify the selected UDR.
3. Right-clicking the screen will bring up the following pop-up menu.
Property
Edit the properties of the selected UDR.

Bring to front
Bring the selected UDR to the front of other UDRs.

Send to back
Send the selected UDR to the back of other UDRs.

Delete selected Polygon

Delete the selected polygon.

User-defined Regions
The next level of the pop-up menu contains: New, Save, Save as, and Close. The drawn UDR can be
saved to a named GIS area, or saved as a new GIS area. The displayed GIS area can be closed
(removed from view).

UDR Drawing:
1. Select the shape from the dropdown menu: polygon (free), polygon (left/right click),
rectangle, or ellipse. Draw the UDR, as desired.

2. Left-click a UDR to select it. Once the UDR is selected, a number of small black
squares will appear around the UDR.
3. Once the UDR is selected, left-click and hold its point to modify the selected UDR.
4. Right-clicking the screen will bring up the same pop-up menu described above for the UDR
Selector.
Vector Feature Selector:
1. To use this tool, the terrain vector data must be displayed in the Map View. By left- clicking a
location on the map, a list of available area features will be listed in the pop- up menu. You
can pick an area feature to highlight.
2. Right-clicking the screen will bring up a pop-up menu with the following options:
 Add the highlighted area to UDR. Add the highlighted area feature to UDR. By
switching the mouse mode to ( ), you can manipulate the newly added UDR as a
user-drawn UDR, and save it to a GIS area.
 Clear the area highlighting. Clear the area highlighting.
Help.

User's Guide Main Project Windows  93

4.2.2.2 Dataset in Map View

Context Menu
Right-clicking the screen and selecting Network Configuration from the context menu will
bring up a pop-up menu with the following options:
 Remove Data Point to Sector Links. When playing back drive test data, the ray
lines linking the data points to their appropriate serving sectors can be kept
permanently. Choose this menu to remove those lines.
 Remove Curves. Remove one or all curves from the Map View.

Display Metric
To display a dataset in the Map View, drag-and-drop the data object from the Data Explorer
into the Map View, or right-click on the data object and choose Send to Map View from the
pop-up menu.

Modify Appearance
Multiple metrics can be displayed side by side in the Map View with certain screen offsets.
Use the tools provided in the toolbar ( , , , ) to adjust the appearance of the metrics
in the Map View and to obtain the best visual effects. See Map View Toolbar for more
information.
Click the Dataset Route Direction button to display black arrows indicating the
drive test direction.
You can also assign a plot band to the metric so that it is displayed in different colors. See
Data Explorer for more information on how to assign a plot band to a metric.

Remove Metric from Display

To remove one or all metrics from the display, right-click the screen and select Dataset
> Remove Curves from the context menu. From the list of existing curves displayed in the
Map View, select All to remove all curves, or select a particular curve to remove it.

Links to Serving Sector

The toolbar button activates the Spider Movement Tool. When the cursor is passed
over a data point, colored ray lines will be appear if the version of cell sites is displayed. The
ray lines link the data point to its appropriate serving sectors. From the Sector vs. Data point
tab in the Map View Options dialog, you can define the color for links and the conditions for
showing the links.

94  Main Project Windows

4.2.2.3 Cells in Map View

Context Menu
Right-clicking the screen and selecting Network Configuration from the context menu will
bring up the following menu:
Freeze NL Display. Keep the current NL display
(ray lines) permanent.

Remove Selected Frozen NL Display. Remove

the frozen NL display (ray lines) from the selected
serving sector (the sector that was right-clicked).

Remove All Frozen NL Display. Remove all

frozen NL displays from the screen.

Remove All Cell Site Flags. Remove all cell site

flags from the screen.

Remove Display of Cell Sites. Remove a version of cell sites from the screen.

Save highlighted sectors as group. To highlight sectors, click the Sector Selector/De-Selector
button.

Flag sectors by group. Highlight the sectors with flags in the sector group.

Flag sectors by filter. Search sectors based on the filter defined and highlight the sectors found with flags.

Subset display mode: toggle sector group. In subset display mode, only the selected number of
sector groups will be displayed in the Map View. Select this menu to toggle the display of the selected sector
group in the Map View.

Display Version of Cell Sites

To display cell sites in the Map View, drag-and-drop a version of cell sites from the Data
Explorer into the Map View, or right-click on the version and choose Send to Map View
from the context menu.

Modify Appearance
Multiple versions of cell sites can be displayed side-by-side in the Map View.
The icon size can be enlarged or reduced by left-clicking or right-clicking the Cell Site Icon
Size button on the toolbar.
Clicking the Layer/View Option button on the toolbar will bring up the Map View
Options dialog. In the Cell Configuration tab, you can modify the options for displaying
cell/sector labels.
The dropdown toolbar at the Cell Site Label button provides a shortcut for selecting label
display options.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

Additionally, the view options for the version of cell sites can be edited by right-clicking the
version in the Data Explorer and choosing Edit View Options from the pop-up menu. In the
Cell Configuration View Option dialog, you can modify the plot band for the cell site or sector
icon, the labels to display, and the color of the labels. See Cell Configuration View Options for
more information.

Remove Version of Cell Sites

To remove one or all versions of cell sites from the display, right-click the screen and select
Network Configuration > Remove Display of Cell Sites from the context menu. From
the list of existing versions of cell sites displayed in the Map View, select All to remove all
versions, or select any particular version to remove it.

Edit Cell/Sector
To edit or view the properties of a cell site or sector, click the Cell Site Property button on the
toolbar to activate the Edit Cell Site/Sector tool; then left-click on a cell site or
sector in the Map View to display the Properties of Cell Site dialog. Edit the properties
and save. See Edit Cell/Sector Parameters for more information.

Sector Antenna View

Click the View Antenna Pattern button on the toolbar to activate the Antenna
Pattern Viewer tool, then left-click a sector to bring up the Antenna Pattern Viewer, where
you can view that sector’s antenna pattern.

Neighbor List
TEMS Discovery provides direct operations to graphically edit the neighbor list. Click the
NL Serving Sector Selector button on the toolbar to activate the Pick
Serving Sector tool. Then, click on a sector to pick that sector as the serving sector for
editing the neighbor list. If the serving sector has neighbors, ray lines will link the serving
sector to its neighbors.
Before editing the neighbor list, click the Edit Neighbor List button on the toolbar to
activate the Edit Neighbor List tool. Then, to add a neighbor sector for the serving sector, select
the appropriate properties from the dropdown buttons and left-click the sector. To remove a
sector from the neighbor list, right-click the sector.
Click the Neighbor List IntelliSense button on the toolbar to activate the Neighbor
List IntelliSense Tool. When this tool is active and the cursor is passed over a sector with a
neighbor list, ray lines that link the sector to its neighbors will appear. You can modify the
color of the lines in the Cell Configuration tab in the Map View Options dialog. To freeze the
ray lines for the current serving sector, right-click and choose Network Configuration >
Freeze NL Display from the context menu. To remove a frozen neighbor list display, right-
click the serving sector and choose Network Configuration > Remove Selected NL
Display. Choosing Remove All NL Display will remove all neighbor list displays from
screen.

96  Main Project Windows

Create Sector Group
Metric data can be filtered by its serving sectors. In the Filtering Options of the Data
Explorer, the sector group is applied for such purposes.
To create a sector group, click the Sector Selector/De-selector button on the
toolbar to activate the Sector Selector tool that allows direct operation on the cell sites
displayed in the Map View. See Map View Toolbar for how to select sectors and save the
selected sector as a sector group.
Another way to create a sector group is to search for sectors that meet a certain criteria of so-
called filters. Filters can be created or edited as follows:
 From one of the Data Explorer–Cells List context menus, choose Edit Filter
Expression.
 In the Cell Configuration Editor, click the toolbar button.
After the filter is created, right-click the screen and select Network Configuration >
Highlight sectors by filter; after doing so, right-click again, and select Network
Configuration > Save highlighted sectors as group to save it as a group. Another
way to highlight the filtered sectors is from the Cell Configuration Editor dialog.
After the filter is applied and the sectors found are listed in the spreadsheet, click the
button on the toolbar to highlight the found sectors on the Map View, then save the
highlighted sectors as a group, or click Save As to save the filtered sectors as a sector
group.

Display Sector Coverage

Click the button on the toolbar to activate the Sector Coverage tool. Then, click on a sector
displayed in the Map View to display its coverage. To display the coverage of all sectors, click
the button on the toolbar.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.4 GIS in Map View

Context Menus
Right-clicking the screen and selecting Maps from the context menu will bring up a pop-
up menu with the following options:
 Remove GIS Image/Maps Layers. Remove one or all GIS image/map layers
from the display.
 Remove GIS Image/Maps Packages. Remove one or all GIS image/map
packages from the display.
Right-clicking the screen and selecting User Defined Region from the context menu will
bring up a pop-up menu with the following options:
 New. Create a new UDR.
 Save. Save the opened UDR.
 Save As. Save the opened UDR as a new UDR.
 Close. Close the opened UDR.

Display Metric
To display GIS data in the Map View, drag-and-drop the GIS data object from the Data
Explorer–GIS List into the Map View, or right-click on the GIS data object and select Send to
Map View from the pop-up menu.

Modify Appearance
Clicking the Layer/View Option button on the toolbar will bring up the Map View
Options dialog. In the Vertical Display tab, you can modify the options for displaying terrain
elevation. In the Vector Display tab, you can modify the options for displaying vector
information. In the Layer Control tab, you can modify the Z-order of each layer and its
opacity. However, vector layers will always be on the top of raster image layers.

Hide or Remove Map

When importing GIS data, multiple maps can be compressed into a .ZIP package and
imported. The package can then be displayed in the Map View and each map in the package
will be rendered as a separate layer. All of the layers will be blended and displayed. TEMS
Discovery provides the function to hide or remove any single layer from the display by using
the Control Layer tab in the Map View Options dialog. You can also remove a layer or a map
package from the display by right-clicking and selecting Remove Map Layers or
Remove Map Packages from the context menu.

UDR
UDR can be applied to filter metric data. You can only create, edit, or delete UDR in the Map
View by utilizing the tools provided in the toolbar ( , , and ), combined with the pop-up
menu described above. See Map View Toolbar for how to use these toolbar buttons to draw
UDRs, edit UDRs, and pick area features from a vector layer.

98  Main Project Windows

4.2.2.5 Cell Radius Analysis
To enter cell radius analysis mode, click the Cell Radius Analysis button on the
toolbar.
From the dropdown context menu, you can choose to consider only the Top 1 sector
coverage, or to consider coverage for a specific sector.

Select the Settings option to bring up the Cell Radius Analysis configuration dialog,
where you can define what to analyze and how it is to be displayed.

To define metrics for analysis for different technologies, you can drag-and-drop any available
metric from the tree view on the left to the spreadsheet on the right. Those defined metrics
will be displayed in the Map View if the corresponding sector with the same technology is
selected.
Once you click a sector on the Map View, the following indicators will be displayed (the entire
display can be turned on or off from Legend View).
 A red circle. If you have defined the cell radius for this sector (see the Cell
Configuration Editor for how to add a new cell radius parameter and assign a value
for each sector), that cell radius will be used. Otherwise, the default cell radius
defined in the configuration dialog will be used to draw this circle.
 Concentric circles. Circles with the step size defined in the Cell Radius
Analysis configuration dialog will be drawn as distance indicators.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

  A blue pie. This pie will reach to the edge of the outermost red circle and
indicate the azimuth and beamwidth of the sector.
 Drive test data in the sector's coverage area. If you elect to consider only Top
1 coverage, only drive test data in the area where that selected sector is the top 1 server
will be displayed. On the other hand, if you elect to consider sector specific coverage,
all drive test data in the area covered by that selected sector will be displayed.
A reference drive test data source is required for performing cell radius analysis. If any dataset

is displayed in the Map View, data from the same device will be used for analysis. Otherwise,
you can simply drag-and-drop any metric from the desired device in the Data Explorer to the
Map View to define the reference data source.

100  Main Project

4.2.2.6 Terrain Profile
The Terrain Path Profile view can be shown or hidden by clicking the button on the
toolbar. Using loaded elevation data and performing line-of-sight calculations along the
defined path, you can also create a vertical profile along a user-specified path.
To define the path that the 3D path profile will be generated along, left-click and hold the
position where you want to start the path, and move the cursor to the next position that you
want to include in the path profile. The path profile for the defined path will be displayed as
shown below. The red path indicates the line-of-sight. Any points along the path without
elevation data underneath will be treated as a point with an elevation of zero.
The Terrain Path Profile view--creating a path for the 3D path profile.

The Profile Options tab allows you to change the start and end positions. The viewable height
can also be adjusted by manually entering the desired height.
The LOS Options tab allows you to define the height of the starting position, which is
represented by a vertical dotted line on the left side of the profile window. You also have the
option of whether to consider the earth's curve and the atmospheric correction.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.7 Reposition Waypoints
This feature is designed to reposition the indoor project's waypoints in case their positions
are not accurately generated by a hand-held device.
Use the Reposition Waypoints feature as follows:
1. Open the indoor project for which you want to reposition waypoints.
2. Open the tree node of the GPS Position of the mobile you want to reposition.
3. Right-click on the Route metric under GPS Position and select Reposition
Waypoints from the context menu. A window similar to the one below will be
displayed.
4. Use the Reposition tool to drag the waypoint you want to reposition to the
location you want.
5. Repeat step 4 for all the waypoints you want to reposition.
6. Save the results by either right-clicking on the floor print and selecting Save from
the content menu, or closing the Map View and confirming the Save operation.

102  Main Project

4.2.2.8 3D Map View
The 3D View allows you to view gridded elevation data and any overlying raster or vector data
in a true perspective 3D manner.
Clicking the button on the toolbar will bring up a floating window containing a 3D view
of the data in the current 2D Map View. Any imagery or vector data drawn on top of the
elevation grid(s) in 2D Map View will automatically be draped on top of the elevation data in
the 3D View window.
The buttons on the 3D View toolbar allow modification of the default view.

3D Map View Toolbar

Change the mouse mode so that you can use the mouse to rotate and pan the 3D view.

Pan the data visible in the 3D view in any direction.

Zoom in or out of the 3D view at its center.

Decrease or increase the vertical exaggeration of the 3D display.

Select whether to display the water level in the 3D display, and change the water level down or
up.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 Display the 3D Screen Capture Options dialog, from which you can save the 3D view
contents to a Windows BMP, TIFF, PNG, or JPG file.

Display the 3D View Properties dialog, where you can configure the 3D view settings. These
include vertical exaggeration, water display, background color, and 3D vector display.
The contents of the 3D View window always reflect what is visible in 2D Map View. This
means that as you pan and zoom around the 2D Map View, the contents of the 3D View
window will pan and zoom around as well.

104  Main Project

4.2.2.9 Layer/View Options
Display the Map View Options dialog by clicking the Layer/View Options button on
the Map toolbar.

The view options are presented on separate tabs. They include:

 Cell Configuration display options
 Vertical Display options
 Vector Display options
 Coverage Map display options
 Sector vs. Data Point display options
 Layer Control display options
 Miscellaneous display options

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.9.1 Cell Configuration Display Options
The Cell Configuration tab, along with the Cell Configuration View Options dialog,
allow you to modify the appearance of the cells displayed on the Map View.

Sector Pie Shape. There are two options for displaying a sector: fixed pie with user-
defined width and pie with width per antenna beamwidth.

Sector/Carrier Label Display. The Sector/Carrier Label will always be visible if the Show
option is selected. To hide the Site Label, select Hide. The Smart labeling option allows the
application to display site labels only if the site label does not overlap any other labels within
the defined bounding rectangle.
The font for the label can be modified by clicking Font and selecting it from the dialog.

106  Main Project

Site Label Display. The Site Label will always be visible if the Show option is selected. To
hide the Site Label, select Hide. The Smart labeling option allows the application to display
site labels only if the site label does not overlap any other labels within the defined bounding
rectangle.
The font for the label can be modified by clicking Font and selecting it from the dialog.

Neighbor List Display. If you select the Neighbor List IntelliSense Tool ( ) or Pick
Serving Sector Tool ( ), when the cursor is passed over sectors, the ray lines linking the
serving sector to its neighbors will be displayed in different colors. The color of the lines, which
can be modified here, indicates the relationship between the serving sector and its neighbor.

GSM BCCH Co/Adj Channel Display

GSM Co/Adj channels can be indicated in the Map View with flags. You can choose to
indicate only the sectors with same channel but different BSICs, +1/-1 adjacent channels, +2/-
2 adjacent channels, or all of these channels.

Channel Search Radius (Km)

Use the spin control to define the channel search area for the selected sector.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.9.2 Vertical Display Options
The Vertical Display options allow you to control how terrain elevation data is displayed. The
configurations can be adjusted to suit your needs. If you want to change colors, simply click on
the color swatch to change it.

Shader Options. To view terrain elevation data, you can choose several algorithms from
the dropdown menu to color and shade the loaded elevation data. Selecting the Select built-
in shader as default radio button will allow you to choose from the following algorithms:
 Atlas Shader. The Atlas Shader is the default shader, and generally provides good
results for any loaded elevation data.
 Color Ramp Shader. The Color Ramp Shader displays ramps of color: blue for low
elevations to red for the highest elevations.
 Daylight Shader. The Daylight Shader colors all elevations the same shade and is
only useful while Hill Shading is enabled.
When using this shader, you may customize the following options:
 Surface Color: sets the calculated surface intensity color.

108  Main Project

  Global Shader. The Global Shader shades elevation datasets that cover large areas
of the Earth such as Terrain Base and GTOPO30, to provide stunning results for these
datasets.
 Gradient Shader. The Gradient Shader moderates coloring with elevation
between the low elevations and the high elevations.
The actual colors ramped between can be selected in the Shader Options panel:
 Low Color: Sets the lowest elevation value color.
 High Color: Sets the lowest elevation range color.
 HSV Shader. The HSV Shader maps the elevations onto the HSV (hue
saturation value) color space.
Mapping can be configured in the Shader Options panel:
 Low Color Start (Advanced): Sets where the lowest elevation will be on the HSV
color range.
 Value (Advanced): Modifies the HSV value parameter.
 Saturation (Advanced): Modifies the HSV saturation parameter.
 Range: Modifies how much of the full HSV range is to be used--increasing this
value leads to color wraparound.
 Reverse Colors: Reverses the orders of colors used for shading.
 Slope Shader. The Slope Shader colors loaded terrain data by the slope of the
terrain rather than the absolute elevation. This shader allows you to identify the portions
of the terrain that are relatively flat versus those that are relatively steep.
The definitions of "flat" and "steep" are the configurations for the Shader
Options panel:
 Minimum Slope -> Slope Value: Allows you to set the slope at or below
whichever Minimum Slope Color is used.
 Minimum Slope -> Color: Specifies the color with which all parts of the terrain
with a slope at or below the Minimum Slope Value will be shaded.
 Maximum Slope -> Slope Value: Allows you to set the slope at or above
whichever Maximum Slope Color is used.
 Maximum Slope -> Color: Specifies the color with which all parts of the terrain
with a slope at or above the Maximum Slope Value will be shaded.
 Smooth Gradient: Specifies that all portions of the terrain with a slope between
the Minimum Slope Value and the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with a
smooth gradient of colors that vary with the slope from the Minimum Slope
Color to the Maximum Slope Color.
 Custom Color: Specifies that all portions of the terrain with a slope between the
Minimum Slope Value and the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with a
single color that can be modified with the Select button.
Alternatively, you can choose to use custom shading created from system plot bands.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

Hill Shading. Select the Enable Hill Shading option to view elevation data as a shaded
relief. With the option on, shadows will be generated using the loaded elevation data along with
the remaining settings on this panel. The Vertical Exaggeration setting is used to control the
exaggeration of relief features.
When this option is turned off, the map will appear flat, with elevations distinguished only
by color. Selecting the Select custom shader as default radio button will open Shader
Options similar to those shown in the dialog below:

When using this option, select a plot band from the dropdown menu, and the current
configurations for that plot band will appear in the frame below. To change the
configurations, click Edit and the following window will appear:

110  Main Project

Light. The Lighting Direction option sets the position of the light source (the "sun") for hill
shading. Note that cartographic azimuth and altitude are used. 0 azimuth means the sun is to the
north, 90 azimuth means the sun is to the east, etc. An altitude of 90 means that the sun is
directly overhead, while an altitude of 0 means the sun is on the horizon.
Use the Ambient Lighting option to brighten up dark datasets or to dim bright datasets.

Water Display. The Water Level setting controls the level at which water is displayed. The
default is set at an elevation of 0 meters above sea level. Use this to simulate different flood
and sea level change scenarios.
The Water Transparency setting controls the clarity of the water displayed if configured to show
water. Clearer water allows more underlying reliefs to show through, while opaque water allows
none.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.9.3 Vector Display Options
The Vector Display options let you control the display of vector data (areas, lines, and points).

Render. This section contains the settings for which types of vector features (areas, lines,
points, or labels) will be displayed when loaded. You can use these settings to turn off an
entire class of features all at once. For a finer degree of control, see the Feature Filter
section described below.

Scale threshold to hide labels. This setting controls how much de-cluttering of displayed
vector data is done. This is useful when you have a large of amount of vector data loaded. For
example, if you have all of the roads for an entire state loaded at once, you can slide the detail
slider to hide minor roads until you have zoomed in sufficiently on the data. The default setting
(Low) will display all vector data regardless of zoom scale. This setting does not affect the
display of raster or elevation datasets.

Feature Filter. This section allows you to select which specific area, line, and point
feature types to display. By default, all feature types are displayed.

112  Main Project

Display road as fat lines when zoomed in. When zoomed into the display, the road
defaults to a constant very thin line. Select this option to display the road in a heavy line to
make it easier to see.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.9.4 Coverage Map Display Options
The Coverage Map is displayed in the same way as terrain elevation data. The method to define
a plot band for a coverage map is the same as defining a plot band for terrain elevation data.
Please see Vertical Display Options for more information.

114  Main Project

4.2.2.9.5 Sector vs. Data Point Display Options

If you select the Spider Movement Tool ( ), when the cursor is passed over a sector, ray
lines linking the data point to its serving sector will be displayed in different colors. The color
of the ray line indicates the role of the serving sector at this data point. The properties can be
modified in the Sector vs. Data Point display options.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.9.6 Layer Control Display Options
Multiple layers of data can be displayed in the Map View with certain composite modes. For
GIS data, by default, all vector data is drawn after any other loaded raster or elevation data,
regardless of the order of the vector layers in this dialog.

Layers Tree View. In the Layers tree view on the left, the higher level indicates the view
index in multiple Map Views; the lower level lists all loaded GIS, dataset, and network
configuration layers in that view. You can select a layer by clicking on its name. For the GIS
layer, its current Display Options and Metadata are displayed in the tab controls on the right
side.
To hide a layer, uncheck the layer by clearing the checkbox before its name in the tree view, or
click the Close Selected Layer button on the toolbar to unload that layer from the Map
View.
To change the drawing order of a selected layer, use the and buttons to move the layer
up and down. The first layer in the tree view will be drawn on top of the other layers.

116  Main Project

Display Options. The Display Options tab contains controls for the color intensity
(brightness, darkness), color transparency, blending, anti-aliasing, and texture mapping of the
selected layers. Note that the exact options displayed depend on the type of data.

 The Color Intensity setting controls whether the displayed pixels are lightened or
darkened before being displayed. It may be useful to lighten or darken raster overlays
to see overlaying vector data more clearly.
 The Translucency setting controls the degree that you can see through the layer
underneath the selected layer. The default setting Opaque means that you cannot
see through the overlay at all. Settings closer to Transparent let you see through
the overlay and blend overlapping data.
 Selecting Transparent will make a particular color transparent, making it possible to
see through a layer to the layers underneath. For example, when viewing a DRG on
top of a DOQ, making the white in the DRG transparent makes it possible to see much
of the DOQ underneath. Clicking Set Transparent Color allows you to select the
color that will be transparent in the selected overlay(s) as well as save the palette for
palette-based files to a color palette (.pal) file.
 Interpolate removes jagged edges by making a subtle transition between pixels.
Turning off this option maintains the hard edges of the pixels as they are rasterized.
 Selecting Texture Map will drape a 2D raster overlay over loaded 3D elevation
overlays. Turning on Texture Map will let the overlay use any available data from
the underlying elevation layers to determine how to color the DRG or DOQ; the result
is a shaded relief map.
 Selecting Auto-Clip Collar automatically removes the collar from loaded raster data.
It is typically used to remove the white border around a DRG or the small black collar
around a 3.75 minute DOQQ. This allows you to seamlessly view a collection of
adjacent DRG or DOQ files.
 Selecting Automatically adjust contrast will automatically adjust the display
contrast.

Metadata. The Metadata tab displays metadata for the selected layer.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.9.7 Miscellaneous Display Options

The Misc. tab provides options for controlling the display of the legend and GIS
elements .

Legend
 Modify the legend font.
 Control the legend contents:
 Turn the sample count display on/off.
 Turn the % distribution display on/off.

GPS Display Format

 Select the display format of GPS coordinates – decimal or DMS
 Toggle the display of the map scale on/off.

118  Main Project

  Define the size of event icons.
 Display data labels, and select the font size for the labels.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.10 Create Output
Right-clicking the screen will bring up a pop-up menu that offers the following options for
output display.
 Copy
 Page Setup
 Print/Generate PDF
 Generate Image File
 Export to GeoTIFF File
 Export Current View to GIS Package

4.2.2.10.1 Copy
Copies the current display in screen resolution to the Clipboard; once it has been copied,
it can be pasted outside of TEMS Discovery.

4.2.2.10.2 Page Setup

Page Setup is used to modify the page settings for printout or PDF generation. The
Printer button brings up the standard printer setting dialog. The
Page Setup dialog contains two tabs: Page and Logo.
 Page tab. The options on the Page tab allow you to define the margins and
orientation of the printed document. The orientation can be either portrait or
landscape.

120  Main Project

  Logo tab. The options on the Logo tab allow you to add a logo or other image to the
output. The image will be placed at the top of the paper. The position of the image
can be aligned at the left, center, or right.

4.2.2.10.3 Print / Generate PDF

The Print dialog will appear when Print is selected from a right-click context menu. The Print
dialog includes:
 Three tabs: General, Title & Comments, and Legend. These tabs are
described below.
 Several action buttons:
 Help. Accesses the on-line help for the Print function.
 Page Setup. Accesses the page setup dialog. See Page Setup for more
information.
 Printer. Accesses your system’s standard printer dialog.
 Print. Sends the output to the default printer.
 Preview. Accesses a Print Preview dialog that shows how the printout will look.
 Cancel. Cancels the print command.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

122  Main Project
General tab

The General tab has the following panels:

 Selection. Select Current View to print the view that was right-clicked.
Select All Views to print all the views that are displayed.
 Layout. If you choose All Views from the Selection panel, you can also choose how
to print the views: One view per page or All views fit to page.
 Scale. You can define a scale or apply a scale for the printed views.
 Print to. The output can be sent to a printer or a PDF file. If selecting the PDF option,
you can define the resolution multiplier (the resolution of the PDF file will be the
screen resolution multiplied by the resolution multiplier) and the target file name.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

Title & Comments tab. You can include a title at the top, or comments at the bottom of the
output.

124  Main Project

Legend tab. You can choose whether to include the Legend in the output. If selected, the
Legend can be placed at the left, bottom, or right of the paper. You can also print a map border
and include a map ruler.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.2.10.4 Generate Image File
You can capture the Map View display as a JPEG, PNG, or Windows bitmap (BMP) file. The
generated image can be generated at a higher resolution than the screen to provide greater
fidelity.
The width and height of the generated image in pixels are specified in the Image Size panel. By
default, the Map View size is used. Using these values will generate an image that is an exact
copy of what you see. You can change these values to generate a higher or lower resolution
image with the obvious trade-off of size versus quality. You can also define the multiplier,
which will be applied to the width/height defined in the panel.

4.2.2.10.5 Export to GeoTIFF File

GeoTIFF - TIFF is a lossless format that is supported by many GIS packages. Saving the screen
as a TIFF generates a 24-bit uncompressed TIFF. Additionally, all geo- referencing data is
stored in a GeoTIFF header attached to the TIFF, making the image completely self-
explanatory.
Similar to Generate Image File, you can define the image size for the output.

126  Main Project

4.2.2.10.6 Export Current View to GIS Package
You can select this context menu to export the currently displayed GIS data in the Map View to
a GIS package. All the information including vector, raster, and elevation data will be
preserved and can be imported back to TEMS Discovery. The generated GIS package will
use .gmp as the file extension. This function can be useful for cropping or merging GIS data for
achieving or sharing.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.3 Time Chart
The Time Chart displays metric data in a time serial. To display data in the Time Chart,
drag-and-drop the metric data object from the Data Explorer into the Time Chart, or right-click
the metric data object and choose Send to Time Chart from the pop-up menu.
Click any data point to display the detail information in the tooltip.

4.2.3.1 Time Chart Pop-up Menu

The following pop-up menu will appear if metric data is dragged-and-dropped into the Time
Chart:
Add Curve. Place the metric on the Time Chart, where it will
coexist with existing data.
Replace Metric In Y Axis. Replace an existing metric in the Y-
axis.
Add As Plot Band To. Associate the dragged metric data to a
particular curve displayed. The color of the data point in that
curve will be determined by the plot band of the metric data.

4.2.3.2 Time Chart Toolbar

Table Size Display the Table Size selector for creating multiple Time Charts. The Time
Charts are always in sync.
Combo List the available configurations. Each configuration defines the collection of metrics to be

128  Main Project

 box loaded and in which chart to load them. When sending/dragging a file/device to the Time Chart
with a configuration selected, the currently defined data filtering options will be applied.

Save Configuration. Save the currently displayed metric and its location as a configuration.
Save Configuration As. Save the current metric configuration as a new configuration.
Delete Selected Configuration.

Cleanup. Clean up the display.

View Option Shortcuts:
 Show top legend
 Show symbol
 Show connection line
 Always connect points
 Show event vertical lines
Zoom to Window Size. Define a time window for display. Click to adjust the current time
window to the defined window.
Previous Time Window. Move the window to the previous time window.
Next Time Window. Move the window to the next time window.
Pointer. Change mouse cursor to a pointer. Right clicking the screen will bring up the pop- up
menu shown below.
Freeze IntelliSense. Freeze the IntelliSense
display - a vertical red line indicating the time
and the value of the metric in the Legend View.
Place Label. Place text labels next to the
Time Chart.
Remove Label. To remove a label, select
the label and choose this option.
Remove All Labels. Remove all labels
displayed in the Time Chart.
Save Labels to Metric. Save the labels in
the Time Chart and associate them to a metric.
Remove Labels from metric. Detach labels
from the metric.
Copy. Copy the current display to the
Clipboard so it can be pasted it outside of
TEMS Discovery.
Remove Curves/Events. Remove one or all
curves/events from the display.

Restore Plot Band of Curves. Metric data can be associated to a curve as a plot band; in other
words, the color of a data point in that curve will be determined by the plot band of the metric data.
Restore Plot Band of Curves will remove this association.
Edit Plot Band. Edit the plot band of a curve.
Hide Selected Floating Legend. The plot band of a curve can be displayed graphically as a
floating legend. Select this option to hide the display of the selected floating legend.
Page Setup. Page setup for printout or PDF generation.
Print / Generate PDF. See Create Output.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 Generate ASCII File. Export the metric data to an ASCII file. Each metric will be exported as a
column in the file.
Generate Image File. See Generate Image File for more information.

View Option. Open the Time Chart View Options dialog.

Data Point Icon Size:
1. Left-click to enlarge the icon size of a data point.
2. Right-click to reduce the icon size of a data point.
Show/Hide Legend. Show or hide the Legend. This button will be enabled if you have added a
metric to the chart as a plot band to an existing metric.
X Axis Zoom:
1. Left-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom in the X-axis to that area.
2. Right-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom out the X-axis to that area.
Reset X Axis. Reset the X-axis to display all data.
X Axis Pan. Pan the Time Chart in the X-axis.
Y Axis Zoom:
1. Left-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom in the Y-axis to that area.
2. Right-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom out the Y-axis to that area.
Reset Y Axis. Reset the Y-axis to display all data.
Y Axis Pan. Pan the Time Chart in the Y-axis.
Unzoom. Undo the last zoom action. To clear the history of previous zoom actions, click the
Reset button.
Help.

130  Main Project

4.2.3.3 Time Chart View Options
Several options can affect the display of metrics in a Time Chart.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.4 Metric Correlation
Metric Correlation enables the indication of the linear/non-linear relationship between two
metrics. You can drag-and-drop a metric data object from the Data Explorer into the
Correlation View, then drag-and-drop another metric data object from the Data Explorer into
the Correlation View. Choose Replace Metric in X Axis to build the relationship between
these two metrics. The Least Squares Fitting mathematical procedure is applied to build this
correlation.

The following pop-up menu will appear if metric data is dragged-and-dropped into the
Correlation View:
Replace Metric in X Axis. Replace the metric in the X-axis with
the dragged metric.
Replace Metric In Y Axis. Replace the metric in the Y-axis with
the dragged metric.

132  Main Project

Add Metric to Y Axis. Add the dragged metric to the Y-axis. This will create a new fitting curve that
indicates the relationship between this metric and the metric in the X-axis.
Add As Plot Band To. Associate the dragged metric data to a particular curve displayed. The color of the
data point in that curve will be determined by the plot band of the metric data.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.4.1 Correlation View Toolbar
Table Size. Display a Table Size selector for creating multiple Correlation Charts. The
Correlation Charts are always in sync.
Combo List the available configurations. Each configuration defines the collection of metrics to be loaded
box and in which metric correlation to load them.
Save Configuration. Save the current metric configuration
Save Configuration As. Save the current metric configuration as a new configuration.
Delete Selected Configuration. Delete the current metric configuration.

Cleanup. Clean up the display.

View Option Shortcuts:
 Show scatter points
 Show fitting curve
 Show aggregation curve
Apply Fitting Order. You can define a degree from 1 to 6 for Least Squares Fitting. Click
this button to apply the change.
Pointer. Change the cursor to a pointer. Right-clicking the screen will bring up the following pop-
up menu:

Aggregation Curve Options.

Open the Aggregation Curve
Options dialog. This dialog allows
the user to define how the
aggregation curve is to be created.
You can define the start value, end
value, and step size.

Copy. Copy the current display to the Clipboard to paste it outside of TEMS Discovery.

Remove Curves. Remove one or all curves from the display.

Page Setup. Page setup for printout or PDF generation.

Print. See Create Output.

Generate Image File. See Generate Image File for more information.

Data Point Icon Size:

 Left-click to enlarge the icon size of a data point.
 Right-click to reduce the icon size of a data point.

134  Main Project

 Unify X Axis Scale of All Charts. Make all charts have the same X-axis scale.
Unify Y Axis Scale of All Charts. Make all charts have the same Y-axis scale.
X Axis Zoom:
 Left-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom in the X-axis to that area.
 Right-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom out the X-axis to that area.

Reset X Axis. Reset the X-axis to display all data.

Y Axis Zoom:
 Left-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom in the Y-axis to that area.
 Right-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom out the Y-axis to that area.

Reset Y Axis. Reset the Y-axis to display all data.

Unzoom. Undo the last zoom action. To clear the history of previous zoom actions, click the
Reset button.
Help.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.5 Table View
Table View provides a tabular display of multiple metrics. Multiple Table Views can be
created.

In Table View, you can either click the scroll bar or press arrow keys to move the display up
and down. If you click a cell to make it active and then use the arrow key to move the display
up and down, TEMS Discovery will skip the blank cells and jump right to the previous/next
valid cell.
If you set the option Generate statistic data along with Table View to true in Options,
the statistic report of the metric will displayed in addition to measurement data.

136  Main Project

Table View Toolbar
Create New Table View

Combo List the available configurations. Each configuration defines the collection of metrics to be loaded
box and in which spreadsheet to load them. When sending/dragging a file/device to Table View with a
configuration selected, the currently defined data filtering options will be applied.

Save Configuration. Save the currently displayed metric and its location as a configuration.

Save Configuration As. Save the current metric configuration as a new configuration.

Delete Configuration. Delete the current configuration.

Cleanup Table View. Clean up the display.

Zoom Spreadsheet. Zoom in or out of the spreadsheet.

Enable/disable Auto Adjustment of Column Height.

Export to MapInfo MIF/MID. Export the displayed metric data to MapInfo Mif/Mid files.

Save to Excel. Export the displayed metric data to an Excel file.

Note: Only up to 65536 records can be written to the Excel file due to Excel's limitations.
Export to Text Delimited Files in ZIP Package. Export the displayed metric data to ASCII files
and then compress all the files to a ZIP file.
Add Sheet. Add a new spreadsheet to the Table View.

Remove Current Sheet. Remove the current active spreadsheet and its partner (Metric and
Statistic spreadsheets).

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 Remove Columns. Delete the selected column and its corresponding statistic data from the
spreadsheet.
Help.

138  Main Project

4.2.6 Point Detail View
The Point Detail View provides a convenient way to overview detail information from a
particular time or location. By moving the cursor into the Map View and Time Chart, or by
changing the row selection in the spreadsheets of the Messages View or the Table View, the
detail information will be displayed in the spreadsheet as shown below.
In this dialog, you can also select a tooltip configuration, so that the corresponding detail
information can be displayed in the tooltip.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

You can control what information to display in this view by selecting a different metric group
from the combo box. Clicking the Point Detail Configuration button on the toolbar
will bring up the Point Detail Settings dialog, where you can create or edit the metric group.
Clicking the Sort button on the toolbar will sort the metric group by category
(otherwise, the metric group is sorted alphabetically).

140  Main Project

If the metric group is sorted by category, clicking the Grid Expand/Collapse button on
the toolbar will expand or collapse all of the categories.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.7 Instant Chart
The Instant Chart View provides a convenient way to view the instant information of the
selected metrics with respect to a group-by key metric (e.g., UARFCN-PSC) from a particular
time or location. By moving the cursor into the Map View or Time Chart, or by changing the
row selection in the spreadsheets of the Messages View or the Table View, the detailed metric
information will be displayed as shown below, both in a chart and in a spreadsheet.

142  Main Project

Right-clicking the chart area will bring up a
context menu like the one shown here.
From this context menu, you can adjust how the
Instant Chart will be displayed and output the
display to printer, PDF or image file.

If you click the Config Panel button , you will change the window to the one shown
below. Then, you can click the Sub-view Size button to create new layouts or edit
existing layouts by dragging-and-dropping Instant Chart component content from the left
panel to the right panel.
The Edit Content button is a shortcut that opens the Instant Chart Component Content
dialog for editing the selected component content on the left panel.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

Instant Chart Toolbar
Config Panel. Configure which sub view of the layout is using which Chart Configuration.

Combo List the available Instant Chart layout configurations.

box

New. Create new layout configuration.

Save Configuration. Save the current layout configuration.

Save Configuration As. Save As the current layout configuration with another name.

Delete Selected Configuration. Delete the current layout configuration.

Help.

144  Main Project

4.2.8 Google Earth
Google Earth provides an interactive online mapping capability. It is built on the Google
Earth platform, providing several view options: Map, Satellite, Earth, and Terrain. Google
Earth also lets you search, discover, and explore specific locations by entering an address. You
can also send cell configurations (displayed as a pie with color and different radius), events
(displayed with various icons), or metric data (displayed as a colored circle) to be displayed on
top of Google Earth as shown below.

To change the display color of metric data, you can edit the plot band of that metric. To change
the cell site radius, you can change the icon size for each technology in Cell Configuration
View Options.
In the current version of TEMS Discovery, the data object in the Data Explorer can be
displayed in Google Earth only, not in Google Map/Satellite/Terrain options. However, you can
export the display in Google Earth to a KML file and upload that exported KML file to a web
server that can be accessed by public, then click the button on the toolbar to link that KML
file. By doing this, the display will always exist in all Google map styles.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

146  Main Project
4.2.8.1 Google Earth Toolbar
Lat/Lon. Enter latitude and longitude coordinates, and then click the Look At icon to find the
Look At location on the map.

Where. Enter a postal address, and then click the Find icon to find the address on the map.
Find

Home. Reload Google Earth to its initial stage.

Download GIS Data. See Download Online GIS Data Source for more information.

Display Options. Open the Google Earth View Options dialog.

Link to KML/KMZ Network File. Link a network KML or KMZ file, and display it in Google
Earth.
Load GoogleEarth KML/KMZ. Export the current display to a KML or KMZ file.

Export TEMS Discovery Data to KML/KMZ. Import an external or TEMS Discovery

exported KML or KMZ file, and display it in Google Earth.
Save as Image. Save the current display as an image file.

Save as GeoTIFF. Save the current display as a GeoTiff file with geo-projection
information.
Save as GIS Package. Save the current display as a TEMS Discovery GIS package file that
will be listed in the Data Explorer–GIS List.
Print. Print the current display. See Create Output.

Preview. Look at the current display in Print preview mode.

Page Setup.

Change Icon Size:

1. Left-click to enlarge the icon size of a data point.
2. Right-click to reduce the icon size of a data point.
Remove Cell Sites Display. Remove the cell configuration display.

Remove Metric/Event Display. Remove the metric/event display.

Remove Network Links. Remove the network link of KML or KMZ file display.

Cleanup Display. Remove all displays.

Help.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.8.2 Google Earth View Options
A number of options are provided for the user to control the display on Google Earth.

To access the Google Earth View options dialog, click the Display Options button on
the toolbar. Check the desired options.

4.2.8.3 Download GIS Data – Google Map

Several options are provided for the user to download online GIS data from a Google Map
display, as listed below.
Map Controls should be turned off before saving the images to GeoTiff file or TEMS
Discovery GIS packages.
Download GIS Data. This option will open the Select Online Data Source for Download
dialog and allow you to download free GIS data from several online data sources (not Google
Earth). The boundary of the displayed region will be automatically populated.

Save as GeoTiff. This option allows you to save the displayed images (maps, satellite,
terrain) as a geo-referenced GeoTiff file, which can be opened with another third party tool, or
imported into TEMS Discovery and displayed on Map View.

148  Main Project

 Save as GIS Package. This option allows you to save the displayed images as a
TEMS Discovery GIS Package file, which will be listed in the Data Explorer–GIS List and
which can be displayed immediately on the Map View.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.9 Bing Map
Bing Map provides an interactive online mapping capability. It is built on the Bing Map
platform, providing several view options: road, aerial, bird's eye, and in 2D or 3D. Bing Map
also lets you search, discover, and explore specific locations by entering an address. You can
also send cell configurations (displayed as a pie with color and different radius), events
(displayed with various icons), or metric data (displayed as a colored circle) to be displayed on
top of Bing Map as shown below.

To change the display color of metric data, you can edit the plot band definition of that metric.
To change the cell site radius, you can change the icon size for each technology in Cell
Configuration View Options.

150  Main Project

4.2.9.1 Bing Map Toolbar
Find. Enter a postal address, and then click the Find icon to find the address on the map.
Find

Move To. Enter latitude and longitude coordinates, and then click the Move To icon to find the
Move location on the map.
To

Home. Reload Google Earth to its initial stage.

Download GIS Data. See Download Online GIS Data Source for more information.

Save As Image. Save the current display as an image file.

Save As GeoTIFF. Save the current display as a GeoTiff file with geo-projection information.

Save As GIS Package. Save the current display as a TEMS Discovery GIS package file that will
be listed in the Data Explorer–GIS List.
Print. Print the current display. See Create Output.

Preview. Look at the current display in Print preview mode.

Page Setup.

Cell Site Radius. Define the cell site radius (in meters) for display.

Remove Cell Sites Display. Remove the cell configuration display.

Remove Metric/Event Display. Remove the metric/event display.

Cleanup All Displays. Remove all displays.

Help.

4.2.9.2 Download GIS Data – Bing Map

Several options are provided for the user to download online GIS data from a Bing Map display,
as listed below.
Map Controls should be turned off before saving the images to GeoTiff file or TEMS Discovery
GIS packages.
Download GIS Data. This option will open the Select Online Data Source for
Download dialog and allow you to download free GIS data from several online data
sources (not Bing Map). The boundary of the displayed region will be automatically
populated.
Save as GeoTiff. This option allows you to save the displayed images (maps, satellite,
terrain) as a geo-referenced GeoTiff file, which can be opened with another third party tool, or
imported into TEMS Discovery and displayed on the Map View.
Save as GIS Package. This option allows you to save the displayed images as a TEMS
Discovery GIS Package file, which will be listed in the Data Explorer and which can be
displayed immediately on the Map View.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.2.10 Wave View
Wave View provides functions to visualize and analyze voice quality. You can import 8-bit
or 16-bit wave files through the Import Drive Test Data feature and associate the wave file with
any imported device with a certain time offset. Those wave files will be listed under the
associated device with the frame name WaveFiles in the Data Explorer.
To use this function, right-click on a wave file and select Send to Wave View from the
context menu, or directly drag-and-drop the wave file to Wave View. This view can also be
synchronized with other synchronizable views.

Wave View Toolbar

Set Time Window. Clicking to adjust the current time window to the defined window.
Zoom In Y Direction. Click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom in the Y-axis to that area.

Zoom In/Out X Direction:

1. Left-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom in the X-axis to that area.
2. Right-click and hold to draw a rectangle that will zoom out the X-axis to that area.
Reset X. Reset the X-axis to display all data.
Pan in X Direction. Pan the Wave View in the X-axis

152  Main Project

 Section Selector.
Play Forward From Beginning. Play from the start of the wave file.
Play Forward. Play forward from the current timestamp or location.
Play Stop. Stop play back.
Help.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.3 Legend View
The Legend View displays the plot band information of metrics that are drawn in the Map
View and Time Chart. Here, you can show or hide a particular metric by selecting or de-
selecting the corresponding metric title. For a metric displayed in the Map View, you can even
show or hide the display of data points within a particular plot band by checking or unchecking
that plot band.
By dragging a metric title and dropping it into the Map View or Time Chart, the plot band
information of that metric will be displayed as a floating legend that can be moved around
within the view.
Clicking the Expand button will expand the entire tree view.
Clicking the Collapse button will collapse the tree view.

154  Main Project

4.3.1.1.1 Legend View Pop-up Menus

Cell Configuration of Map View

Move to Center. Move the bounding rectangle of the displayed
version of cell sites to the center of the Map View.
Edit Cell Configuration. Open the Cell Configuration Editor.
Edit View Options. Open the Cell Configuration View Options
dialog.
Edit Grouping Logic. Open the Cell Site Grouping Logic dialog
dialog.
Apply Grouping Logic. Apply a certain grouping logic to refresh
the logical display of the selected version of cell sites.
Save. Save the version of cell sites to a file.
Save As. Save the version of cell sites as a new cell site
configuration.
Remove. Remove the corresponding cell configuration display
from the Map View.

GIS of Map View

Move to Center. Move the bounding rectangle of the displayed
GIS data to the center of the Map View.
Open Geo View Options. Open the Map View Options dialog.
Remove. Remove the corresponding GIS map display from the Map
View.

Metric of Map View

Edit Plot Band. Edit the plot band of the metric.
Move to Center. Move the bounding rectangle of the displayed
metric to the center of Map View.
Remove. Remove the corresponding metric display from the Map
View.
Select All. Select all plot bands so that all data will be displayed in the
Map View.
De-select All. De-select all plot bands so that no data will be
displayed in the Map View.

Metric of Time Chart

Edit Plot Band. Edit the plot band of the metric.

Remove. Remove the metric from the Time Chart.

Select All. Select all plot bands so that all data will be displayed in the
Time Chart.

De-select All. De-select all plot bands so that no data will be

displayed in the Time Chart.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.4 Summary Data Views
The project workspace contains multiple views. All of the views provide various data
presentations for analyzing and troubleshooting visually and efficiently. The views are
categorized as Synchronizable Views and Summary Data Views.
Summary views are the views that present statistic data in various formats. Summary views
include:
 Histogram
 Batch PDF View
 Problem Summary View
 Sector Statistics View
 Multi-dimension Statistic View

4.4.1 Histogram
The Histogram View is for graphical display of metric data showing the proportion of data
that falls into each specific plot band. To display data in the Histogram, drag-and- drop the
metric data object from the Data Explorer into the Histogram View, or right- click the metric
data object and choose Send to Histogram from the pop-up menu.

The graphical display of metric data can be shown as a bar graph, a 2D pie chart, or a 3D pie
chart; all options can be freely converted from one to the other.

156  Main Project

4.4.1.1 Histogram Toolbar
Table Size. Display a Table Size selector for creating multiple Histograms. The
Histograms are always in sync.
Combo List the available configurations. Each configuration defines the collection of metrics to be loaded
box and in which Histogram to load them.
Save Configuration. Save the current metric configuration.

Save Configuration As. Save the current metric configuration as a new configuration.

Delete Selected Configuration.

Export Statistic Data to a Text File.

View Option. Open the Histogram View Option dialog. See Histogram View Options for
more information.
Pointer. Change the cursor to a pointer. Right-clicking the screen will bring up the following pop-
up menu:

Convert to 2D Pie Chart. Convert the

current display to a 2D pie chart.
Convert to 3D Pie Chart. Convert the
current display to a 3D pie chart.
Refresh Display with Current Data
Filters. Apply the new data filtering and
refresh the display.
Remove. Remove a particular chart from
the display.
Copy Histogram. Copy the current display to
the Clipboard to paste it outside of TEMS
Discovery.

Copy Statistic Data. Copy the current display statistic data to the Clipboard to paste it outside
of TEMS Discovery.
Page Setup. Page setup for printout or PDF generation.
Print / Generate PDF. See Create Output.
Generate Image File. See Generate Image File for more information.

Cell Merger Tool. Left-click, hold, and move the mouse to draw a rectangle to select the cells to be
merged. Release the cursor to merge the cells into a single cell spanning multiple columns and rows.

Split Merged Cell in Horizontal Direction. Click the cell created with the Cell Merger tool to
split it horizontally.
Split Merged Cell in Vertical Direction. Click the cell created with the Cell Merger tool to
split it vertically.
Refresh Display to Apply Current Data Filters. Apply the new data filtering defined in the
Data Explorer and refresh the display.
Cleanup. Clean up the display.

Help.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.4.1.2 Histogram View Options
The Histogram view options dialog can be accessed by clicking the View Options
button on the Histogram toolbar.

Label tab

 General. Select whether to display PDF, CDF, and/or top label on bar/pie. (The font
for the label can be modified.)
 Title Legend. Select what to display in the title – dataset name, mobile name,
and/or frame name.
 Statistic Attribute Options. Select the statistic attributes to be listed.
 PDF Bar Chart Style. Select a flat or 3D image.
 Bar Chart Extended Label. Select additional information to display – Count,
PDF%, and/or CDF% (other than the plot band displayed at the bottom of the bar
chart).

158  Main Project

Color tab

 Bar Chart Background Fill. The background of bar chart can be in filled as a
gradient to visually enhance presentation. You can define the start and end colors,
and the fill angle. Click the color bar to select a color.
 Pie Chart Background Fill. The background of the bar chart can be in-filled as a
gradient to visually enhance presentation. You can define the start and end colors, and
the fill angle. Click the color bar to select a color.
 Bar Color Pool. The color(s) of the bar chart can be picked from this color pool.
Click the color bar to select a color.
 Chart frame background color. Select the background color for the chart
frame.
Click the color bar to select a color.
 Legend background color. Select the background color for the legend.
Click the color bar to select a color.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.4.2 Batch PDF View
TEMS Discovery can generate data summary in a PDF file for any particular device based
on the Batch Configuration.
To display the PDF in this view, right-click a device in the Project List or Data Explorer and
select Send to Batch PDF View from the context menu.
The Batch Configuration List will be displayed, in which you can choose the configuration you
want to prepare. Page Setup options are available, where you can select page margins and
select an image to be included as a logo. When satisfied with your settings, click Print, and the
PDF file will be created.

4.4.3 Problem Summary View

The Problem Summary View lists the problem summary of devices based on pre- defined
problem sets (see Report Template Builder for how to define problem sets). If a device has
problems, its background color will be orange. Otherwise, the background color of the rows will
be displayed in the normal alternating, shaded format.
You can send a set of devices from the Project List or Data Explorer either by dragging-and-
dropping them into Problem Summary View or by selecting them from the context menu. All
of the devices will be listed with the number of the problems and their detail problem
information in a tabular format.
Click the Problem Only filter button on the toolbar to list the devices with problems, or
select a different problem set definition from the combo box to refine the list. You

160  Main Project

can also click the Detail button to view the details of a problem of a particular device, or the
Analysis button to analyze the device.
If any problem count displayed in a cell is actually the count of an event that is defined in a
script, and this event has an analysis set associated with it (see Script Builder for detail), you
can simply double-click that cell and TEMS Discovery will automatically open the analysis
view based on the associated analysis set.
All problem information can be saved to an Excel file. You can also create a composite dataset
from what is displayed in the spreadsheet, or simply generate a report from the data.

Problem Summary View Toolbar

Create New Problem Summary View

Cleanup. Clean up the spreadsheet.

Back to List. Go back to the list of devices.

Problem Only. List only the devices with problems.

Analyze. Analyze the selected problem (selected cell) if the problem has an associated
Analysis Set defined in the Script Builder.
Save to File. Save the problem summary to a text file.

Create Composite Dataset. Create a composite dataset from the devices listed in the
spreadsheet.
Generate Report. Generate a report from the devices listed in the spreadsheet.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 Help.

162  Main Project

4.4.4 Sector Statistics View

The Sector Statistics View displays a metric per sector binning; its functions are
similar to those of the Table View. To display data in the Sector Statistics View, drag- and-
drop the metric data object from the Data Explorer into the Sector Statistics View, or right-
click the metric data object and choose Send to Sector Statistics View from the pop-up
menu.

Sector Statistics View Toolbar

Combo Lists the available configurations. Each configuration defines the collection of metrics to be loaded.
box

Save Configuration. Save the currently displayed metric and its location as a configuration.

Save Configuration As. Save the current metric configuration as a new configuration.

Delete Configuration. Delete the current configuration.

Cleanup.

Export to Text File. Export the displayed statistic data to a tab-delimited text file.

Remove Columns. Delete the selected column and its corresponding statistic data from spreadsheet.

Help.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

4.4.5 Multi-dimension Statistic View
The Multi-dimension Statistic View displays on-demand statistic data of multiple metrics in
multiple user-selected dimensions.

To create an on-demand Multi-dimension Statistic View, you may:

1. Select any number of pre-defined global dimensions (device attributes, cell
configuration, or UDR attributes) in the Dimension tab.
2. To define a specific dimension using other metric data, you may drag-and-drop one or
many metrics from the Data Explorer into the specific dimension box. You can
remove a specific dimension by pressing the Delete button on the toolbar.
3. Drag-and-drop one or many metrics from the Data Explorer into the grid or chart
control in the right pane to display the view. You can remove a measurement by
pressing the Delete button on the spreadsheet toolbar.
4. Select Aggregation Methods for each measurement; select Time Group Interval and
other options in the Measurement tab.

164  Main Project

If you modify any display options, be sure to press the Refresh button on the toolbar to
refresh the display.
To visualize statistics data in a chart, you can select a desired data area on the grid by clicking
and holding the left mouse button.
To drill down to the detail of what contributes to the statistics data, click a cell in the grid,
and a list of files will be listed in the spreadsheet. You can save the list to a file, create a
composite dataset from the list, or generate a report from the list. All of the data can be
exported to an external file.
The display options can also be saved as a configuration and re-used.
As an alternative, you can right-click the metric data object in the Data Explorer and choose
Send to Multi-dimension Statistic View from the pop-up menu. See Data Explorer for
more information.

Multi-dimension Statistic View Toolbar

Combo Lists the available configurations.
box
Save Configuration. Save the currently displayed metric and its location as a configuration.
Save Configuration As. Save the current metric configuration as a new configuration.
Delete Configuration. Delete the current configuration.

Cleanup Grid.

User's Guide Main Project Windows 

 Refresh. Refresh the data.
Copy Grid.

Export Grid. Export the grid data or chart to an external file.

Help.

166  Main Project

5 Tools
TEMS Discovery provides the tools described in the following sections.
 Script Builder
 Report Template Builder
 ADP Management
 Plug-in Manager
 Neighbor List Analyzer
 Antenna Pattern Viewer
 Batch Printing
 Print Queue
 Signaling Message Browser
 Parameter Mapping
 Log File Database Browser
 Measurement Data Cleanup

User's Guide Tools 

5.1 Script Builder
The Script Builder provides an advanced function to extract data from messages and
apply customized algorithms to generate new metrics and events. Scripts can be written in C#
language.
The Script Builder can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Script Builder from the Tools menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Script Builder button on the Main Window toolbar.

The Script Builder allows creation of the following script types:

 Condition Expression
 Custom Metric
 Global Parameter
 Advanced Metric & Event. This is the most flexible type, and also the most
complicated. It allows you to generate multiple metrics, events, and report desired
parameters or including troubleshooting information in the script.

168 
5.1.1 Script Editor & Private Functions Editor
TEMS Discovery provides the Script Editor and the Private Functions Editor. The
Script Editor is used to implement algorithms; the Private Functions Editor is used to
create procedures that can be used only by the script.

Script/Private Functions Editor Toolbar

Cut.
Copy.

Paste.
Undo.
Redo.
Search.
Next. Search next.
Replace. Search and replace.
Size. Left-click or right-click mouse to enlarge or reduce font size.
Collapse. Collapse definitions.
Expand. Expand all definitions.
Split V. Split the editor to 50-50 in the vertical direction, or remove the vertical splitter.
Split H. Split the editor to 50-50 in the horizontal direction, or remove the horizontal splitter.

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.2 Data Object: Metric List
The Metric Definition tab lists all available information elements (IEs), including
Layer 3 signaling IEs, that can be used as sources of data. These IEs can be dragged- and-
dropped into the spreadsheet on the right to define an Alias, which will be used as a variable in
the script.

170 
5.1.3 Data Object: RRC IEs
The RRC IEs tab lists all available "terminal" WCDMA RRC information elements (IEs).
These IEs can be dragged-and-dropped into the spreadsheet on the right to define an Alias,
which will be used as a variable in the script.
When a script is executed, TEMS Discovery will automatically search for the values from
all RRC signaling messages containing the IEs defined.

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.4 Data Object: Threshold
The Threshold tab lists all of the available default and user-defined thresholds. These
thresholds can be dragged-and-dropped into the spreadsheet on the right to define an Alias,
which will be used as a variable in the script.
See User Defined Parameters for more information.

172 
5.1.5 Built-in Flags

5.1.5.1 CONDITION_FLAG
A pre-defined variable that is used to hold the result of a condition expression. This flag is valid
only for the Condition Expression script type.

Example:
CONDITION_FLAG = EcIo>-10 && EcIo<-5;

Where:
EcIo is a user-defined alias in the spreadsheet

5.1.5.2 TARGET_VALUE:
A pre-defined variable that is used to hold the result of a global parameter. This flag is valid
only for the Global Parameter script type.

Example:
TARGET_VALUE = EcIo+5;

Where:
EcIo is a user-defined alias in the spreadsheet

5.1.5.3 EVENT:
A qualifier that is used to describe an event type defined in the spreadsheet.

Example:
EVENT_TYPE = EVENT.Call_Drop;

Where:
Call_Drop is a user-defined event in the spreadsheet.

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.5.4 EVENT_TIMESTAMP:
A pre-defined Hash table that is used to store events and their corresponding
timestamp (in milliseconds) of the current computing iteration.

Example:
EVENT_TIMESTAMP[EVENT.Call_Drop] = TIMESTAMP-3000; //backward 3
second

Where:
Call_Drop is a user-defined event in the spreadsheet.
TIMESTAMP is a pre-defined variable in milliseconds.

Remarks:
By doing this, the timestamp of an event can be manually adjusted.

5.1.5.5 EVENT_TYPE:
A collection that is used to store one or many events in the current computing iteration.

Example:
EVENT_TYPE = EVENT.Call_Drop;

Where:
Call_Drop is a user-defined event in the spreadsheet

Remarks:
Each time you call 'EVENT_TYPE = EVENT.<specific event>;' the specified event type will
be added to the collection.

Related Functions:
ClearAllEvents(), ClearEvent(), ReplaceEvent()

5.1.5.6 MESSAGE:
A pre-defined variable that represents an additional message of the current computing
iteration.

Example:
MESSAGE += string.Format(""Current EcIo value: {0}"", EcIo);

Where:
EcIo is a user-defined alias in the spreadsheet.

174 
5.1.5.7 MESSAGE_INDEX:
A pre-defined variable that represents the index of the currently computing iteration.

Example:
MESSAGE_INDEX = MESSAGE_INDEX-10;

Remarks:
You can modify this variable so that the next computing iteration can go to a particular index.

5.1.5.8 EOF:
A pre-defined variable (Boolean) that indicates whether the current iteration is the end of file.

Example:
if(EOF)
{
//do something
}

5.1.5.9 TIMESTAMP:
A pre-defined variable that represents the time stamp (in millisecond) of current
computing iteration.

Example:
TIMESTAMP= TIMESTAMP-3000; //backward 3 second

Remarks:
By doing this, the timestamp of the result can be manually adjusted.

5.1.5.10 LOG_FILE_NAME:
A pre-defined variable that represents the log file name of the currently computing
iteration.

Example:
MESSAGE += ""Drive test data log file: ""+ LOG_FILE_NAME;

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.5.11 IS_NEMO_DATA:
A pre-defined variable that indicates whether the current drive test data was collected by
Nemo.

Example:
if(IS_NEMO_DATA)
{
//do something
}

5.1.5.12 IS_TEMS_DATA:
A pre-defined variable that indicates whether the current drive test data was collected by
TEMS.

Example:
if(IS_TEMS_DATA)
{
//do something
}

5.1.5.13 IS_QVOICE_DATA:
A pre-defined variable that indicates whether the current drive test data was collected by
QVoice.

Example:
if(IS_QVOICE_DATA)
{
//do something
}

5.1.5.14 IS_QVOICE_MASTER:
A pre-defined variable that indicates whether the current drive test data is QVoice master
data.

Example:
if(IS_QVOICE_MASTER)
{
//do something
}

176 
5.1.5.15 IS_QVOICE_SLAVE:
A pre-defined variable that indicates whether the current drive test data is QVoice slave data.

Example:
if(IS_QVOICE_SLAVE)
{
//do something
}

5.1.5.16 IS_JDSU_DATA:
A pre-defined variable that indicates whether the current drive test data was collected by
JSDU.

Example:
if(IS_JDSU_DATA)
{
//do something
}

5.1.5.17 QVOICE_MASTER_END_TIMESTAMP:
A pre-defined variable that represents the end timestamp (in milliseconds) of QVoice master
data.

5.1.5.18 QVOICE_SLAVE_END_TIMESTAMP:
A pre-defined variable that represents the end timestamp (in milliseconds) of QVoice slave
data.

5.1.5.19 TIMESTAMP_START_OF_FILE:
A pre-defined variable that represents the start timestamp (in milliseconds) of the log file.

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.6 Built-in User-defined Functions

5.1.6.1 ClearAllEvents:
Clear all events in the specified message index.

Syntax:
void ClearAllEvents(object oMessageIndex)
oMessageIndex: message index

Example:
ClearAllEvents(MESSAGE_INDEX-2);

178 
5.1.6.2 ClearEvent:
Remove a specific event in the specified message index.

Syntax:
void ClearEvent(object oMessageIndex, object oEventType)
oMessageIndex: message index
oEventType: event type to be removed

Example:
ClearEvent(MESSAGE_INDEX-2, EVENT.Drop_Call);

Where:
Call_Drop is a user-defined event in the spreadsheet.

5.1.6.3 ReplaceEvent:
Replace a specific event in the specified message index with another event.

Syntax:
void ReplaceEvent(object oMessageIndex, object oOrigEventType,
object oNewEventType)
oMessageIndex: message index
oOrigEventType: event type to be replaced
oNewEventType: new event type

Example:
//replace EVENT.Drop_Call with EVENT.Call_Release
ReplaceEvent(MESSAGE_INDEX-2, EVENT.Drop_Call,
EVENT.Call_Release);

Where:
Call_Drop and Call_Release are user-defined events in the
spreadsheet.

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.6.4 AddEvent:
Add a specific event in the specified message index.

Syntax:
void AddEvent(object oMessageIndex, object oEventType)
oMessageIndex: message index
oEventType: event type to add

Example:
//Add EVENT.Drop_Call
AddEvent(MESSAGE_INDEX-2, EVENT.Drop_Call);

Where:
Call_Drop is a user-defined event in the spreadsheet.

5.1.6.5 AssignMetricValue:
Assign a value to a specific metric in the specified message index.

Syntax:
void AssignMetricValue(object oMessageIndex, string
szMetricName, object oValue)
oMessageIndex: message index
szMetricName: target metric name
oValue: value to assign

Example:
AssignMetricValue(MESSAGE_INDEX-2, Metric_EcIo, -10);

Where:
Metric_EcIo is a user-defined metric in the spreadsheet.

180 
5.1.6.6 ReplaceMetricValue:
Replace the value of a specific metric within a certain message range from one to another.

Syntax:
bool ReplaceMetricValue(object oStartIndex, object oEndIndex,
string szMetricName, object oValueOrig, object oValueNew)
oStartIndex: start index of the message range
oEndIndex: start index of the message range
szMetricName: target metric name
oValueOrig: original metric value
oValueNew: new metric value
return true if metric valus has been successfully replaced,
otherwise, return false.

Example:
AssignMetricValue(MESSAGE_INDEX-2, Metric_EcIo, -10);

Where:
Metric_EcIo is a user-defined metric in the spreadsheet.

5.1.6.7 GetLatLon:
Get the geo position at the specfied timestamp.

Syntax:
void GetLatLon(object oTimestampInMs, out double dLat, out
double dLon)
oTimestampInMs: timestamp
dLat: latitude
dLon: longitude

Example:
double dLat, dLon;
GetLatLon(TIMESTAMP, out dLat, out dLon);

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.6.8 IsValueValidStatic:
Check whether a value is valid.

Syntax:
bool IsValueValidStatic(object oVal)
oVal: value to check
return true if the value is valid, otherwise, return false;

Example:
if( IsValueValidStatic(oValue))
{
//do somthing
}

5.1.6.9 IsValueValid:
Check whether a value is valid.

Syntax:
bool IsValueValid(object oVal)
oVal: value to check
return true if the value is valid, otherwise, return false;

Example:
if( IsValueValid(oValue))
{
//do somthing
}

5.1.6.10 GetDeviceAttribute:
Get the value of a specified device attribute.

Syntax:
string GetDeviceAttribute(string szAttribute)
szAttribute: name of device attribute
return value of the specified device attribute

Example:
string szIMEI = GetDeviceAttribute("IMEI");

182 
5.1.6.11 SetDeviceAttribute:
Set the value of a specified device attribute.

Syntax:
void SetDeviceAttribute(string szAttribute, string szValue)
szAttribute: name of device attribute
szValue: value of the device attribute

Example:
SetDeviceAttribute("Operator", "TEMS");

5.1.6.12 GetWcdmaUarfcnIndex:
Get the index of a specified UARFCN.

Syntax:
int GetWcdmaUarfcnIndex(object oUARFCN)
oUARFCN: UARFCN
return index of the specified UARFCN

Example:
int iIndex = GetWcdmaUarfcnIndex(4085);

Remarks:
Each WCDMA UARFCN will be assigned a unique integer automatically by TEMS Discovery
during data import.

5.1.6.13 ElementNotContain:
Return elements in an array list that do not exist in another array list.

Syntax:
string ElementNotContain(ArrayList sourceList, ArrayList
targetList)
sourceList: array list
targetList: array list
return a comma delimited string that represents the elements of
array list sourceList which do not exist in array list
targetList.

Example:
string szMissing = ElementNotContain(sourceList, targetList);

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.6.14 ElementMissing:
Return elements in an array list that do not exist in another array list.

Syntax:
ArrayList ElementMissing(ArrayList sourceList, ArrayList
targetList)
sourceList: array list
targetList: array list
return array list that represents the elements of array list
sourceList which do not exist in array list targetList.

Example:
ArrayList alMissing = ElementMissing(sourceList, targetList);

5.1.6.15 FindPairValue:
Find index of a given value in a specified array list; then return the value of the element in the
same index of another array list.

Syntax:
float FindPairValue(float key, ArrayList sourceList, ArrayList
targetList)
float: the value of element in sourceList
sourceList: array list
targetList: array list
return the paired value of the element in another array list.

Example:
float fEcIo = FindPairValue(218, alPSCList, alEcIoList)

5.1.6.16 MaxOfArrayList:
Find the maximum value of the specified array list.

Syntax:
float MaxOfArrayList(ArrayList al)
al: array list
return the maximum value of the specified array list

184 
5.1.6.17 CountOfArrayList:
Find the count of the specified array list.

Syntax:
int CountOfArrayList(ArrayList al)
al: array list
return the count of the specified array list

5.1.6.18 IsIdentical:
Check whether two array lists are exactly identical, including their sequences of
elements.

Syntax:
bool IsIdentical(ArrayList al1, ArrayList al2)
al1: array list
al2: array list
return true if two array lists are identical, otherwise, return
false

5.1.6.19 IsIdenticalIgnoreOrder:
Check whether two array lists are identical, ignoring the sequence of elements.

Syntax:
bool IsIdenticalIgnoreOrder(ArrayList al1, ArrayList al2)
al1: array list
al2: array list
return true if two array lists are identical, otherwise, return
false

5.1.6.20 IsIdenticalFloatArray:
Check whether two float array lists are exactly indentical, including their sequence.

Syntax:
bool IsIdenticalFloatArray(ArrayList al1, ArrayList al2)
al1: float array list
al2: float array list
return true if two array lists are identical, otherwise, return
false

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.6.21 GetDisplayString:
Get a string representation of the specified array list. Elements of the specified array list will
be concatenated and delimited with commas.

Syntax:
string GetDisplayString(ArrayList alValue)
alValue: array list

5.1.6.22 ArrayListContains:
Check whether an array list contains the specified value.

Syntax:
bool ArrayListContains(ArrayList arrData, object targetVal)
arrData: array list
targetVal: value to check

Example:
if(ArrayListContains(alPSCList, 218))
{
//do something
}

5.1.6.23 ArrayListIndexOf:
Get the index of the specified value in an array list.

Syntax:
int ArrayListIndexOf(ArrayList arrData, object targetVal)
arrData: array list
targetVal: target value

Example:
int index = ArrayListIndexOf(alPSCList, 218);

5.1.6.24 SameMemberInt:
Check whether two integer array lists are indentical, ignoring their sequences.

Syntax:
bool SameMemberInt(ArrayList al1, ArrayList al2)
al1: integer array list
al2: integer array list
return true if two array lists are identical, otherwise, return
false

186 
5.1.6.25 ConvertToInt:
Convert a float array list to an integer array list.

Syntax:
ArrayList ConvertToInt(ArrayList alFloat)
alFloat: float array list
return integer array list.

5.1.6.26 ConvertToDateString:
Convert a timestamp (in milliseconds) to date string such as MM/dd/YYYY.

Syntax:
string ConvertToDateString(object oTimestampIsMs)
oTimestampIsMs: time stamp in millisecond
return date string.

Example:
string szDate = ConvertToDateString(TIMESTAMP);

5.1.6.27 ConvertToTimeString:
Convert a timestamp (in milliseconds) to a time string such as HH:mm:ss.fff.

Syntax:
string ConvertToTimeString(object oTimestampIsMs)
oTimestampIsMs: time stamp is millisecond
return time string.

Example:
string szTime = ConvertToTimeString(TIMESTAMP);

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.6.28 ConvertToDateTimeString:
Convert a timestamp (in milliseconds) to a date time string such as
MM/dd/YYYY HH:mm:ss.fff.

Syntax:
string ConvertToDateTimeString(object oTimestampIsMs)
oTimestampIsMs: time stamp is millisecond
return date time string.

Example:
string szDateTime = ConvertToDateTimeString(TIMESTAMP);

5.1.6.29 ExtractNumericValue:
Extract a numeric value from a string that contains numbers.

Syntax:
float ExtractNumericValue(string szString)
szString: a string that contains numbers
return float value.

Example:
float fVal = ExtractNumericValue(""Call Duration: 300.5 ms"");
fVal will be 300.5.

188 
5.1.6.30 GetSectorParameter:
Get a sector parameter value.

Syntax:
string GetSectorParameter(string szSiteId, string szSectorId,
string szTech, string szParmName)
szSiteId: site ID
szSectorId: sector ID
szTech: technology flag (available flags: CDMA, EVDO, GSM,
WCDMA, TD, LTE)
szParmName: sector parameter name
return the value of the specified sector parameter.

Syntax of overloading function:

string GetSectorParameter(string szSector_SiteId, string szTech,
string szParmName)
szSector_SiteId: contains sector and site id in the format of
"<sectorID> [[<SiteID>]"
szTech: technology flag (available flags: CDMA, EVDO, GSM,
WCDMA, TD, LTE)
szParmName: sector parameter name
return the value of the specified sector parameter.

Example:
string szAngle = GetSectorParameter(SiteID,SectorID,"",
"Azimuth");
string szLtePCI= GetSectorParameter(SiteID, SectorID, "LTE",
"PCI");
string szLtePCI= GetSectorParameter(Sector_SiteID, "LTE",
"PCI");

Where:
SiteID is alias of [!Mid].[Common].[Cell ID - LTE].[Site ID].[Sort By: Signal
Strength].[Top #1] defined in Alias spreadsheet
SectorID is alias of [!Mid].[Common].[Cell ID - LTE].[Sector ID].[Sort By: Signal
Strength].[Top #1] defined in Alias spreadsheet
Sector_SiteID is alias of [!Mid].[Common].[Cell ID - LTE].[Serving Sector] defined in Alias
spreadsheet

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.6.31 GetSectorParameters:
Get sector parameter value by passing the sector keys and the geo location of sector detected.

Syntax:
string[] GetSectorParameters(string szKey1, string szKey2,
string szTech, double dLatitude, double dLongitude, string[]
arrParmName)
szKey1: first key of the sector. It is PN for CDMA and
EVDO, BSIC for GSM, PSC for WCDMA, CPI for TD, and PCI for LTE.
szKey2: second key of the sector. It is BCCH for
GSM,UARFCN for WCDMA and TD, and EARFCN for LTE. Pass ""null""
(DON'T include quotation marks) if this key is unknown.
szTech: technology flag (available flags: CDMA, EVDO, GSM,
WCDMA, TD, LTE)
dLatitude: latitude of the sector detected.
dLongitude: longitude of the sector detected.
arrParmName: list of sector parameter names
return the list of value corresponding to the specified list of
sector parameters.

Example:
if(IsValueValid(Psc)
{
string szUarfcn=null;
if(IsValueValid(Uarfcn))
szUarfcn=Uarfcn.ToString();
string[] arrResults = GetSectorParameters(Psc.ToString(),
szUarfcn, "WCDMA", dLat, dLon,
new string[]{"Latitude", "Longitude", "Azimuth",
"Antenna_Type"});
double dSectorLat, dSectorLon;
int iSectorAzimuth;
bool bSectorLocationOK = false;
if(double.TryParse(arrResults[0], out dSectorLat) &&
double.TryParse(arrResults[1], out dSectorLon))
bSectorLocationOK = true;
int.TryParse(arrResults[2], out iSectorAzimuth);
string szAntennaType = arrResults[3];
}

Where:
Psc is alias of [!M].[WCDMA].[WCDMA Cell
Measurements].[Categorized PSC:A1]
Uarfen is alias of [!M].[WCDMA].[WCDMA Cell
Measurements].[Categorized UARFCN_DL:A1]
dLat is the alias of [!M].[Common].[GPS Position].[Latitude]
dLon is the alias of [!M].[Common].[GPS Position].[Longitude]

190 
5.1.6.32 GetOperatorByMncMcc:
Get operator name from the lookup table (accessible from menu Configuration-
>Wireless Operator Lookup Table) by MNC and MCC

Syntax:
string GetOperatorByMncMcc(object MNC, object MCC)
MNC: MNC value
MCC: MCC value
return operator name.

Example:
string szOperator = GetOperatorByMncMcc(123, 321);

5.1.6.33 GetOperatorBySid:
Get operator name from the lookup table (accessible from menu Configuration-
>Wireless Operator Lookup Table) by SID

Syntax:
string GetOperatorBySid(object SID)
SID: SID value
return operator name.

Example:
string szOperator = GetOperatorBySid(123);

5.1.6.34 GetOperatorByOperatorId:
Get operator name from the lookup table (accessible from menu Configuration-
>Wireless Operator Lookup Table) by SID

Syntax:
string GetOperatorBySid(object SID)
SID: SID value
return operator name.

Example:
string szOperator = GetOperatorBySid(123);

5.1.6.35 TimeDiff:
Return the time difference of two messages in second

Syntax:
double TimeDiff(double msg1, double msg2)
msg1: the alias of first message
msg2: the alias of second message
return time difference in second.

User's Guide Tools 

Syntax of overloading function :
double TimeDiff(double msg1, double msg2, int Option)
msg1: the alias of first message
msg2: the alias of second message
Option: if set to 0, the output timestamp will be the
current timestamp which is timestamp of the second message; If
set to 1, change the output timestamp to timestamp of the first
message (May mess up output timestamps, be careful of using this
option)
return time difference in second.
.

Example:
double dDiff = TimeDiff(msg1, msg2);
double dDiff = TimeDiff(msg1, msg2, 1);

192 
5.1.7 Built-in Math Function
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.math.aspx

5.1.8 Built-in String Function

 string.Format
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.string.format.aspx

5.1.9 Built-in Classes

 ArrayList
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.collections.arraylist.aspx
 Hashtable
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.collections.hashtable.aspx
 SortedList
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.collections.sortedlist.aspx
 Queue
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.collections.queue.aspx
 Stack
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.collections.stack.aspx

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.10 Declaration

 Alias. An alias that can be referred as a metric when writing a script.

 Static Variables. Variables whose values will be kept valid while computing the next
data point. It is not possible to assign null to a static variable. In order to remove the
value of a static variable, it must be set to empty (for strings) or to the default minimum
value (for other types).
 MyString = “”;
 MyFloat = float.MinValue;
 MyTimestamp = double.MinValue;
 Event Enum. Event enumeration.
 Metrics. Metric to be generated.
 Report Variables. The varaibles to report around the timestamp when an event
occurs.
 Technologies Related. Define the technologies that the script can ba applied. This
information will be used to determine if the script will be visible under a particular
file/device in Data Explorer

All variable types may be tested for valid values using IsValidValue(MyVariable). It will
return false for both null and empty values.
Strings may be tested with String.IsNullOrEmpty(MyString). It will return true for both null
and empty values.

194 
5.1.11 Programming in C# Language
The Script Builder uses a subset of C# programming language. For more detailed information
about C#, refer to the online resource:
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/default.aspx.
This section describes basic programming concepts that apply to script building and
provides an example.

5.1.11.1 Statements
The sequence of a script’s execution is controlled by statements, which are executed for their
effect and do not have values. All C# statements end in a semicolon (;).
#region
#region lets you specify a block of code that you can expand or collapse when using the
outlining feature of the Script Editor. A #region block must be terminated with a
#endregion directive.
#region a loop statements
for(int i=0; i<50; i++)
{
statement 1;
statement 2;
}
#endregion

5.1.11.2 Declaring and Initializing Variables

The following build-in numeric data types are supported:
Build-in Numeric Data Type: Ranges
bool true, false
byte 0~255
short -32768~32768
int 2147483648 ~ 2147483647
long -9223372036854775808 ~ 9223372036854775807
double 5.0E-324 ~ 1.7E308, 15-digit precision

In the script, you can declare a variable by using its type and a given name:
int i; // create an integer

To initialize the variable, you can give it a value or use the new operator:
int j=5; // create an integer and set its value to 5

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.11.3 Casting Variables
To cast a data type to a different but compatible type, you may simply place (<new data type>)
in front of the variable of interest. For example:
Delta_PSCH_RS = (float) RP_PSCH[(int)CellIndex] -(float) RSRP[(int)CellIndex]

5.1.11.4 Writing Comments

C# uses two forms of comments: a single-line comment starting with //, and a multi-line
comment starting with /* and ending with */.
The single-line comment does not have a terminator. It ends at the end of the current line.
int i; //simple counter
i++;
Multi-line comments start with /* and end with */.
/*this code block is commented out
int i=3;
i++;
end of comments */

5.1.11.5 Using Blocks { }

C# does not contain special keywords for the end of many control statements (for, if,
switch, foreach, do, while, and others). Instead, C# uses the opening brace { to denote the
beginning of the block and the closing brace } to denote the end of the block.
for(int i=0; i<50; i++)
{
statement 1;
statement 2;
}

5.1.11.6 Declaring Functions

A function declaration contains any optional modifiers, the return type, the name of the function, any
parameters, and the body of the function. For example:
int foo()
{
return 5;
}

To define a function that does not return a value, specify a return type of void.
void bar()
{
//do work ...
}

196 
5.1.11.7 Using the return statement
The return statement exits a function. It is necessary for any function that returns a value.
int foo()
{
return 5; //necessary to get the value out of the
function
}

5.1.11.8 Branching Statements

Branching statements are the programming equivalent of “do this, or do that, or do something
else.” They provide the means to select which “branch” of code to take. C# contains two
different syntax elements that control branching: if/else and the switch/case/break
statement.

Using the if/else Statement

The if/else statement lets us pick one of two paths based on a Boolean expression.
Examine the following code:
if ( val > 5 )
{
//do work ...
}
else
{
//do work ...
}
If this expression is true, then the next statement is executed. If the expression is false, then the
next statement is skipped, and the statement after the optional else is executed.

Also, notice in this example that the else clause is optional. We can omit the else
clause if no actions will be taken if the expression is false.
if ( val > 5 )
{
//do work ...
}
//continue other works

User's Guide Tools 

However, the else clause can contain another if statement.
if ( val > 5 )
{
//do work ...
}
else if ( val > 3 )
{
//do work ...
}
else
{
//do work ...
}

Using the switch/case/break Statement

The switch/case statement provides a multi-way branching statement. The switch
statement defines the variable to use as the branching element. Each case statement defines
the beginning of a block. That block is executed only when the value control variable has a
value equal to the value in the case statement.
switch( day )
{
case "Monday"
//do work;
break;
case "Wednesday"
//do work;
break;
default:
//do work;
break;
}

5.1.11.9 Iterations
Iteration statements provide the means to execute a block of code multiple times.

Using while and do/while Statement

C# contains statements that let you execute a series of statements multiple times. The
while loop and the do/while loop are closely related:
int i=0;
while( i < 10 )
{
//do work...
i++;
}

198 
The above example works for every value of i from 0 to 9. The do/while loop can work in
almost the same way:
int i=0;
do{
//do work ...
i++;
} while ( i < 10 );

The only difference between the while loop and the do/while loop is that a do/while loop is
always executed at least once. The while loop evaluates the Boolean expression before entering
the block of code. The do/while loop evaluates the Boolean expression only after executing the
block of code the first time.

Using for Loops

The code in the preceding section can be just as easily written using a for loop. A for
statement contains three clauses: the first clause sets the initial value of the looping variable;
the second clause defines the loop termination expression; and the third clause defines the
expression that modifies the looping variable. The first and third clauses may contain multiple
statements separated by commas. The second clause must evaluate to a single Boolean
expression:
for( int i=0, j=0; ( i<10 ) & ( j<10 ); i++, j++)
{
// do work ...
}

Using foreach Loops

The foreach statement provides a shortcut to loop through a collection, as shown in the
following example:
foreach( int i in collectionOfi)
{
//do work...
}

Using break/continue in Loops

We use the break and continue statement to modify the execution paths of loops. The break
statement terminates the block being executed inside the loop and exits the loop. The continue
statement terminates the block being executed inside the loop and starts the next iteration.
for( int i=50; i<100; i++)
{
if( i > 80 )
continue; //terminate the block and start a new
iteration if the expression is true
if( i == 95)
break; //exit if the expression is true
//do work
}

User's Guide Tools 

5.1.11.10 Expression
An expression defines some kind of computation. Expressions include variables or literal
values, and some set of operators. They may be variable assignments, mathematical
computations, or Boolean computations.

Arithmetic Operators
The standard mathematical operators in C# are:
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
% Modulus
++ Increment
-- Decrement

Boolean Operators
C# supports the usual logical operators:
&& Logical AND
|| Logical OR
! Logical NOT

C# also supports bitwise Boolean operators: &

Bitwise AND
| Bitwise OR
^ Bitwise exclusive OR (XOR)
~ Bitwise NOT operator

Equality and Comparison Operators

C# contains operators that let you compare values:
< Smaller than
<= Smaller than or equal to
== Equal to
!= Not equal to
>= Greater than or equal to
> Greater than

All of these work in the same way. They compare two values of the same type and return a
Boolean value:
if( a == b )
//do work ...

200 
5.1.12 Example

1. Create Alias for Metric

Expand the tree in the Metric List. Drag-and-drop the target metric into the Source Data
column. An Alias should be defined for this metric so that when writing script, the alias will
represent the corresponding metric.

2. Create Static Variables

To retain the values of a variable from one message to another, one must define the variable
as a static variable. The static variable allows you to keep track of the timestamp of a
message or a status. By defining multiple static variables, you are effectively running
multiple state machines.

3. Create Event Enum

The Event Enum tab allows you to assign an event enum to be used in the script and defines
the following important information:
 Event category
 Event description: Event name to be displayed in the user interface.
 Priority
 Associated analysis set
 Color scheme
 Event icon selection
 Attributes (1-10) to be used in the tooltip when viewing an event in the Map View

User's Guide Tools 

4. Create Output Metric
The Metrics tab allows you to assign the names and properties of the metrics to be created
in the script.

5. Define Report Variable

The Report Variables tab allows you to define the parameters or variables to be
reported, along with any generated events.

6. Write Script
if( TxPw > -5 )
TxPw_TooHigh = TxPw;

7. Save Script
Click the Save button to save the script. If the coding has an error, an output window
will appear and list all errors. The errors must be corrected before the script can be saved.

202 
8. Run Script
From the Data Explorer, drag-and-drop the script into any view to generate the output metric.

User's Guide Tools 

5.2 Report Template Builder – Measurement Data
The Report Template Builder provides great flexibility when generating reports
from drive test data. Reports can be generated in several Excel formats.
The Report Template Builder eliminates the need to request customized report generation from
another tool vendor, or to manually conduct data manipulation. Data objects need only to be
dragged-and-dropped from the Specific Metrics tab to generate a final report.
For all of TEMS Discovery's supported metrics, prescriptives may be defined and the results
presented in a chart with all Microsoft Office Excel supported types. With a single operation, it
is possible to generate the final report from TEMS Discovery report templates.

The Report Template Builder has the following components:

 Toolbar and Context Menu
 Excel Templates. Lists all Excel type report templates defined by using the
Report Template Builder. See Generating Microsoft Office Word Report for more
information.
 Word Templates. Lists all Word type report templates defined by MS Word. See
Problem Summary View for more information.
 Problem Sets. Lists all problem sets defined by using the Report Template Builder.
Problem set definition is similar to report template definition, except that the B1 cell in
the spreadsheet is a flag to note whether the final report indicates that the device has
problem. If the value in B1 cell is 0, the device has no problems; otherwise, the device
does have problems. See Problem Summary View for more information.

204 
  Report Template Editor. For directly generating the final report or defining the
report template. To edit the report format or color, it is recommended that you use
Microsoft Office Excel.

User's Guide Tools 

5.2.1 Report Builder Toolbar and Pop-up Menu
Open. Open an Excel file.

Save. Save the information in the spreadsheet as the final report or report template.

Close. Close any open file and clear the spreadsheet.

Reload Template. Reload the report template.

Cut. Cut the selected text in the spreadsheet.

Copy. Copy the selected text in the spreadsheet.

Paste. Paste text to the spreadsheet.

Help.

Report Template Builder Right-Click Menu

Remove Chart. Remove the chart definition and clean up the
chart area.
Remove Map View. Remove the Map View definition and
clean up the view area.
Remove Correlation Chart. Remove the Correlation Chart
definition and clean up the view area
Repetition in Report. Define repetition options in the report
template. See Options of Repetition in Report.
Repetition Flag. Define a repetition flag in the cell as a
placeholder. This placeholder will be replaced with the value of
the repetition key when the report is generated.
GetGlobal. Define GetGlobal flag in the cell as a placeholder. This
placeholder will be replaced with the value that has been set by
SetGlobal definition when the report is generated. As a rule,
SetGlobal must be defined in the row after GetGlobal is defined.
Chart Skeleton. Define a Chart Skeleton.
Create With. Place a tag for reporting the version of TEMS
Discovery.

Report Date. Place a tag for reporting the date when the report is generated. Report
Options. Place a tag for reporting the report options. See Report Options. Name of
Data. Place a tag for reporting the file name of data.
Date Of Dataset. Place a tag for reporting the date range of the dataset from which the report is
generated.
Start Collection Time. Place a tag to report the start collection time of data.
End Collection Time. Place a tag to report the end collection time of data.
Collection Duration – hh:mm:ss. Place a tag to report the collection duration in the format of
hours:minutes:seconds.
Collection Duration – minutes. Place a tag for reporting the collection duration in the format of minutes.
Cluster Name. Place a tag to report the name of the cluster.

206 
File Detail (All). Place a series of tags to list file details of all data.
File Detail – Device. Place tags to list the device description of each file in the data.
File Detail – Name. Place tags to list the name of each file in the data.
File Detail – Duration. Place tags to list the duration of each file in the data.
File Detail – Gap. Place tags to list the time gap of each file in the data.
File Detail – Start Time. Place tags to list the start time of each file in the data.
File Detail – End Time. Place tags to list the end time of each file in the data.
File Detail – <Device Attribute>. Place tags to list specific device attributes of each file in the data.

5.2.2 File Formats and Limitations

The report template can be in any of the following Excel files types:
 Excel 97-2003 xls
 Excel 2007/2010 xlsx
 Excel 2007/2010 Macro-Enabled xlsm

Cross-referencing among different sheets is supported in each format, but VBA macros are
supported only as follows:
 Excel 97-2003 xls report template. Can contain VBA macros, but the maximum
worksheet size is 65536 rows by 256 columns.
 Excel 2007/2010 xlsx report template. Maximum worksheet size is 1048576 rows
by 16384 columns. Cannot contain VBA macros.
 Excel 2007/2010 macro-enabled xlsm report template. Maximum worksheet size is
1048576 rows by 16384 columns. Can contain VBA macros.
However, the Report Template Builder cannot edit an Excel 2007/2010 Macro-
Enabled xlsm file. You will need to open a report template (xls or xlsx) in Excel, add
macros as needed, and then save the file as an Excel macro-Enabled xlsm file.

Limitations of Report Builder and report output:

 Cell comments and form controls (such as buttons, checkboxes, list boxes, etc.) will not
be read from or written to .xlsx or .xlsm files.
 Reading and writing shapes from and to Open XML files is limited. Many
properties may be lost, and all complex shapes will be lost.
 When reading conditional formats, only Excel 2003 features are supported.
Conditional formats that use Excel 2007-2010 features are ignored (deleted).
Also, Report Builder does not support the new ability of Excel 2007-2010 to have
different conditional formats that overlap. Therefore, when a conditional format is
read that overlaps a previous conditional format, the cells in the previous conditional
format will be removed from the newly read conditional format.
 Table references in formulas such as [Sales] are converted to #REF!

User's Guide Tools 

 Report Builder does not support Excel tables. With no table to refer to, there is no way
to preserve these formulas in their original state. Excel will generate a warning when
reading the workbook.

Workaround to display image properly in report output:

 Open report template using Excel, remove the images from report template. You
may see many images overlapping, which may be instroduced by third- party
component TD uses.
 Create your image and save as BMP file, then select Excel menu “Insert-
>Picture” and insert your image to report template, then save.
 If you edit the report template and save the change in TD report builder, you will have
to repeat the above steps.

5.2.3 Define Report Template

A TEMS Discovery report template is actually a Microsoft Office Excel file with TEMS
Discovery formatted information. TEMS Discovery can read and write Excel files and
replace TEMS Discovery formatted information with the final values.
To define a report template, you can:
1. Open an external Excel file, open an existing internal report template, or work
directly on the right-side spreadsheet called the Report Editor.
2. Drag-and-drop any IE from the Metric List tab into the Report Editor.
3. Pick the desired aggregate or charting function from the pop-up menu. As a result, a
TEMS Discovery formatted string, along with additional information, will be placed
into the target cell.
4. Save the report template through the toolbar functionality. The saved report
template will be listed in the Report Templates list box.
It is recommended that you create an Excel file to define the reporting format, including font,
color, and formula and so on. Click the Open button on the toolbar to open the file and
define the TEMS Discovery report template. Additionally, you can right-click on any report
template in the list box and select Open In Excel to further edit the report format.
More information about defining a report template:
 Drag data objects from the Metric List.
 Drop data objects into the editor and select the report option (see Report
Options).
 To define a chart, see Define Single Chart.
 To define a chart with more than one series, see Define Multi-series Chart.
 To define a chart skeleton, see Define Chart Skeleton.
 To define generation of statistics data, see Define Statistic Data.
 To define a trend chart, see Define Trend Chart.

208 
5.2.3.1 Metric List

All TEMS Discovery supported metrics and user-defined events and metrics are listed in the
Metric List tree view. You can drag-and-drop any of the metrics (except for Layer 3 message
information elements) into the Report Editor.

NOTE: If you need to define a report from a Layer 3 message IE, define an advanced metric by
using the Script Builder and define the report using that advanced metric. See the Script
Builder for how to define an advanced metric.

When you drop an item into the Report Editor, the Report Options dialog will pop up.

User's Guide Tools 

5.2.3.2 Report Options
Once an information element is dropped into the Report Editor, the dialog shown below will
pop up. You can select the desired report type and descriptive, and even apply a threshold or
range to the data of target metric. Once you have selected the settings, a well-formatted string
and additional information will be placed in the target cell.

Report Types
 Chart. Defines a specific TEMS Discovery chart. See Define Single Chart and
Define Multi-series Chart.
 Correlation Chart. Defines a correlation chart between a pair of metrics. See
Define Correlation Chart.
 Correlation Key. Defines a correlated metric to generate a chart or statistic data.
See Define Single Chart and Define Multi-series Chart.
 Map View. Defines a Map View report.
 Multi-dimension Statistic View. Defines a Multi-dimension Statistics report.
 Name. Places the name of the dragged item into the target cell.
 Single Value. Differentiates between a Chart and a Statistic Data report. This type
of report definition produces one final value.

210 
  SetGlobal. Defines a global value (a single value or an array of value) generated from
a metric's data. This global value can be retrieved by the GetGlobal flag. Be aware that
SetGlobal must be defined after GetGlobalFlag in the report template. In other words, if
the GetGlobal flag is defined in row number 10, the corresponding SetGlobal flag must
be defined in a row number that is greater than 10.
 Statistic Data. Defines a Statistic Data report. See Define Statistic Data.
 Tabular. Defines a Tabular data report. See Define Tabular List.
 Trend Chart. Defines a Trend Chart report. See Define Trend Chart for details.

Descriptives
 Count. Count of the data points.
 Duration. The time span of the first data collected to the last data collected.
 Linear Average. Linear average of the data points.
 Mean. Mean of the data points.
 Max. Maximum value of the data points.
 Min. Minimum value of the data points.
 Mode. Mode of the data points.
 Percentage. Percentage of the data points that are within the range defined or
over/below a defined threshold. A threshold or a range must be defined if this report
type is selected.
 Standard Deviation. Standard deviation of the data points.
 Sum. Summation of the value of the data points.
 Unique Count. Count of unique values of the data points.
 Variance. Variance of the data points.
 X-Percentile. Value of the data point that is in the specified percentage – the
percentage must be defined.

Define Plot Bands

If you choose to report data in Chart, you can also define plot bands by providing the start
value, end value, and step value.

Apply Self Restriction

You can define a threshold or a range to filter data points, so that only the data points satisfying
the threshold/range are computed for what is described. You can select a logical operator and a
corresponding operand (numerical value or text) to form a logical expression. Up to two logical
expressions are supported and these two logical expressions will be joined. The settings in this
section apply to the selected metric itself.
Under the metric list, there are some special metric groups like WCDMA PSC Scanning
- UARFCN #=? and WCDMA PSC Scanning - UARFCN =?. If you drag-and-drop a

User's Guide Tools 

metric under the group name ended with "#=?" to the Report Template Builder, you can then
specify an index so that only data in the specified index will be reported. Also, if you drag-and-
drop a metric under the group name ended with "=?" to the Report Template Builder, you can
specific a key so that only the data of the specified key (e.g., UARFCN) will be reported.

Apply Condition Filter

You can also select one or multiple condition filters. Only the data points at the times or
locations meeting the criteria defined in the condition filters will be included for reporting. To
define a condition filter, see Report Template Builder.
You can choose to embed the condition filter definition into the template so that the report
template will be self-contained and can be exported for sharing without exporting the associated
condition definition.

Apply (Geographical) Cluster Region Filter

You can choose to enable or disable UDR data filtering for the data you select. If the Enable
UDR Filtering option is selected, by enabling the Consider data only in cluster region
index # checkbox and selecting an index, you can create a report template containing flags for
a cluster region index. Before generating a report for a specific set of data, you can then
associate a set of specific UDRs with the region index. See Generate Report From Report
Template for detail. To be more flexible, you can even choose to filter the data based on the
attributes of each polygon.

Apply Device Attribute

You can attach certain attributes to mobile data (see Device Attribute Assignment) so that
mobile data can be identified by its attributes. For example, consider that you have data from
two operators, Blue and Green. You can import this data into the same dataset, and set
attributes to Blue and Green, respectively. In the report template, you can define the report with
data of the Blue attribute, Green attribute, or both.
Check the checkbox in front of each attribute to include that attribute in the definition.
When generating the final report, the attributes will be used to identify what data is to be
considered for reporting. See Generate Report From Report Template.
You can also check the Enable delta between different device attributes option to generate
the delta between the data of two different attribute sets. A plot band must be defined so that
the delta can be presented in a chart.

212 
5.2.3.3 Define Trend Chart
Defining a trend chart is similar to defining a regular chart, except that you can select
periodicity — Hourly, Daily, Weekly, and Monthly — for the trend report.

5.2.3.4 Define Single Chart

As an example, you can drag-and-drop the IE cdma2000 > CDMA Top Pilot Scanning
> Peak Ec/Io >Top 1 from the Metric List into the Report Editor, and select Chart > Linear
Average from the pop-up menu. When moving the mouse, an area will be dynamically
highlighted in light grey. This area defines the chart location and size. After you move the
mouse to the bottom-right corner of the desired chart area, left-click and the definition will be
generated in the Report Editor. Some of the definitions are automatically filled in, but you can
manually edit some of the fields to adjust the display of chart to your preference.

User's Guide Tools 

The first column in the highlighted area is the title of the definition, and the series
definitions start from the second column. Each column represents one series of the chart.
The following information is used to define a series:
Definition Define the IE with a formatted string including the size of the chart area. (Do not edit this
information!)
Descriptive Select what to calculate for the IE. For each plot band, one value will be computed and
those values will be defined as the Y values. The plot band of this IE, by default, will be
defined as X values, unless a correlation metric is defined.
Display Select what to display in the chart as the Y values. The options are Value, PDF, and CDF.

Series Title Define a title for the series.

Chart Type Select a chart type. These chart types are fully compatible with those in Microsoft Office
Excel 2007. However, if an earlier version of Excel is installed, some of the chart types
will not be viewable.
Chart Layout # Excel provides a set of predefined layouts for each chart type. Each layout is indicated
by an integer number. See Available Chart Types for an overview. You can refer to
Excel for more detailed information.
Plot By Indicates the way columns or rows are used as data series on the chart: xlColumns or
xlRows.
Chart Title Define a title for the chart. This title must be defined only in the second column; the other
columns must be left blank.
X Values The starting Cell label of the X-values. By default, the X-values of the chart will be the plot
band of the metric, and the Y-values will be the values (computed by the selection of the
"Descriptive") that are allocated in each band. If a correlated metric is defined for this
metric, the X values will be the plot bands of the correlated metric. This value will be
automatically filled when the final report is generated.
X Title Title for the X-axis.
Y Values The starting Cell label of the X-axis values. This value will be automatically filled when the
final report is generated.
Y Title Title for the Y-axis.
# of Bands Define the number of bands to be considered for generating the chart.
Sort Order Define the sort order for sorting the Y-axis values. The options are Ascending,
Descending, and None.
Correlation By default, the X-axis value is the plot band assigned to this IE. For some cases,
you can correlate this IE with another IE and use the plot band of that IE for the X values.

214 
The report template shown above will result in a final report similar the one shown below. The
H and I columns of the spreadsheet are generated by TEMS Discovery and are used by
Microsoft Office Excel to generate the chart. Do not delete or hide this data.

For example, if you want to create a chart to visualize the linear average of the Peak Ec/Io of
each serving sector, this metric can be correlated with Common > Cell ID - cdma2000 >
Sector ID > Sort By: Signal Strength > Top 1. Drag-and-drop that metric from the Metric
List into the Correlation cell, as shown below.

User's Guide Tools 

The final report will be similar to the following:

For the example shown above, you can even elect to sort the Peak Ec/Io in Ascending or
Descending order so that the chart can be better visualized. If you further define a # of
Bands (for example, 5), only the stronger or weaker 5 serving sectors will be shown in the
chart.
Of course, you can elect to correlate with any other metrics, and, by combining those
charting options, you can produce a rich report just by dragging-and-dropping data.

5.2.3.5 Define Multi-series Chart

You can define more than one series in a single chart by dragging-and-dropping another IE
into the column immediately after the previous series. Other than defining the chart area (the
highlighted area in light grey), all operations are the same as for defining the first series.
For example, refer to the following report template, which defines three series. For Chart
Layout #, Plot By, Chart Title, and Correlation, only the first series requires definition.
The other series will apply the same settings.

216 
The report template shown above will result in a final report similar to the one shown here:

The chart type for different series can be set to different types. This way, one series can be
plotted as the xlColumn type and the other can be plotted as the xlLine type. However, the
mixed chart type can only be defined to a 2D chart type. If you define a mixed 3D chart type,
or one to the 2D type and another to the 3-D type, all the series will be plotted to the chart
type of the first series.

User's Guide Tools 

5.2.3.6 Define Chart Skeleton
In some circumstances, you may want to manually define a list of X-values and Y- values one
by one. Each value could be computed by a Microsoft Office Excel formula, constant value, or
cross-referred value; or computed by TEMS Discovery through a Single Value report type.
TEMS Discovery provides a way to define a chart skeleton and, when generating the final
report, TEMS Discovery will create the chart based on the definition.
To define a chart skeleton, right-click the Report Editor and select Chart Skeleton from the
context menu. As when a chart is defined, an area will be dynamically highlighted in light grey
while moving the mouse. At the right-bottom corner of the desired chart area, left-click, and the
following definition will be generated in the Report Editor.

For this skeleton, you need to at least manually define the starting cell label of X values and Y
values, along with the # of Bands. Cross referencing is allowed, but the format of the reference
should be as such: 'Sheet Name'!M24. Be sure to place an exclamation mark (!) after the sheet
name. The following is an example of a well-defined chart skeleton.

218 
The report template shown above will result in a final report similar to the one shown here:

User's Guide Tools 

5.2.3.7 Define Statistic Data
You may choose to describe a metric in a tabular format. Drag-and-drop a metric and select
Statistic Data in the Report Options. The definition that will be generated is shown below.

Figure 1

Cell B2 (the cell that the metric is dropped into) defines the metric information, Cell B3
defines what to compute, and, by default, Cell B4 defines where the starting cell is to place the
range. If you don't want the range to be listed, clear the cell. You can list other metrics side-by-
side by defining another Statistic Data report in the C column; however, all of the metrics must
have the same plot band definition.
Following is the final report generated:

Figure 2

220 
Simply generating statistic data per its own plot band is not enough. More desirable
information is the correlation between two metrics. In Figure 1, you can drag-and-drop another
metric to Cell B5 and define it as the correlation metric. For example, you can drag-and-drop
Common > Cell ID - cdma2000 > Sector ID > Sort By: Signal Strength > Top 1 into Cell
B5, as shown below.

Figure 3

Be aware that if you define other metrics side-by-side, all of these metrics must have the
same correlation defined. In this example, Cell C5 must be the same as Cell B5. The final
report generated from the above example is shown below:

Figure 4

The above example lists the linear average of Ec/Io and Io of each sector’s coverage. To
correlate with Cell ID - <technology> under the Common tree node, scanner data and its
corresponding cell configuration must all be imported to the same project.

User's Guide Tools 

5.2.3.8 Define Tabular List
You may use the Tabular report type to create a tabular list of multiple metrics. You need to
reserve at least three columns to the left for Time, Latitude, and Longitude.

5.2.3.9 Define Correlation Chart

You may include one or more correlation charts in your report template.

One or more of the following options can be included in a correlation chart:

 Draw fitting curve with 1~4 fitting degree
 Draw scatter points
 Draw aggregation curve. This option allows you to divide the X-axis metrics
into multiple steps, and TEMS Discovery will calculate the corresponding aggregate
values and Y-axis metrics for each of the steps and draw lines connecting adjacent
data points.
 With the Default option, TEMS Discovery will find the ranges from all
available data points and automatically assign up to 10 steps.
 For predictable X-axis steps, the Customize option is recommended. Define Start
value, End value, and Step size according to the nature of the X-axis metric.

222 
Following is the sample output expected for a final report:

To create a report like this, do the following:

1. Drag-and-drop the X-axis metric from the Metric List into a cell in the report
template.
2. Select Correlation Chart as the report type, and define other settings as
necessary.
3. Click OK, and drag the mouse to define the chart space.
4. Left-click to finalize the chart space.
5. Drag-and-drop the Y-axis metric from the Metric List into the gray chart space.
6. Repeat step 5 for additional Y-axis metrics.

User's Guide Tools 

 7. Resize cell height or cell width and format the cells in Excel.

The final template may look something like this. The content above the chart space is automatically
filled by TEMS Discovery and will not appear in the final report output. Experienced users may
further edit the contents of those cells to alter the final output.

224 
5.2.3.10 Options of Repetition in Report
In cases where you need to generate a report with repetitive information (e.g., for each cluster
UDR), you can define the report type and descriptive in a block of cells in the report template as
usual, and then provide repetition options in the first cell immediately under the definition
block. TEMS Discovery can then automatically repeat the report generation of the definition
block for each available cluster UDR in the data source.
To access the following dialog, right-click at the first cell immediately under the definition
block on which you intend to repeat, and select Repetition in Report from the context
menu.

 Repetition Flag. Repetition flag is a user-defined flag that will be placed in any cell
of the definition block as a placeholder. During report generation, this placeholder will
be replaced with the value of the Repetition Key. Select Repetition Flag from the right-
click context menu, and place the flag at the desired location. If the flag will be placed
inside any text, including online script, embrace the flag with braces, like this:
"{{RepeatFlag}ServingSector}"

User's Guide Tools 

  Repetition Key. You can select from several different repetition keys:
 Cluster UDR. Select this option to make TEMS Discovery repeatedly report on
each available cluster UDR in the data source. You can also enter a list of cluster
UDR mapping indexes to limit the reporting scope, using commas as delimiters to
separate the indices. For more information about cluster UDR mapping, see Project
Properties.

 Polygon attribute. A cluster UDR can contain a number of polygons, and each
polygon can be assigned to a number of attributes. Those attributes can be utilized
as a repetition key for reporting. For more information about creating UDRs and
assigning attributes to polygons, see GIS in Map View.
For this repetition type, select a default geo region in the Report Generation dialog
so that the definition block will be reported on polygon regions with each unique
attribute defined in this default geo region.

226 
  Device attribute. Select this option to make TEMS Discovery repeatedly report
on each available device attributes in the data source. You can also enter a list of
attribute values to limit the reporting scope, using commas as delimiters to
separate the values. Device attributes will normally be taken from drive test data.
For information about creating new device attributes, see Device Attribute
Assignment.

 Metric Group. Select this option to make TEMS Discovery repeatedly

report on each specific metric group key in the data source.

 Metric. Select this option to make TEMS Discovery repeatedly report on each
distinct value of the specific metric key in the data source.

User's Guide Tools 

  Global Array (From SetGlobal). Select this option to make TEMS
Discovery repeatedly report on the array defined by SetGlobal in Report
Options. This array contains distinct values of the selected metric.

 Unique ID (represents number of data rows). The number of rows that will
be occupied by the results of report types such as Statistic Data, Multi- dimension
Statistic Data, and Tabular is dynamic and unknown in the design stage. However,
you can assign a unique global ID (on the Additional Options tab in Report
Options) for any of these report types, and refer to this unique ID in repetition
definition. In this way, you can define the number of repetitions of a block to be
the same as the number of data rows generated.

The most useful usage case is to define cross-references to the results of report
types. For example, we defined Multi-dimension Statistic with unique ID "ABC"
in sheet "Events", as shown below.

In another sheet which must be a sheet not in front of the above sheet, we created
a formula "=IF(Events!B4<>"",Events!B4,"")" in Cell B4 (it doesn’t have to be in
Cell B4) that refers to Cell B4 in the above sheet, "Events."

228 
 Then, we defined repetition to repeat Row 4 for the number of times that is
represented by the unique ID "ABC" in sheet "Events". As a result, Row 4 will be
repeated by the same number of times as the number of data rows generated for
the defined Multi-dimension Statistic, and each row will be calculated
corresponding to each data row of the multi-dimension statistic data.

5.2.4 Generating Microsoft Office Word Report

TEMS Discovery word reporting currently supports tabular data, charts and images (map,
correlation chart). Word report can also have static contents (contents that are not required
to be replaced during report generation).

5.2.4.1 Requirement
 Microsoft Office Word 2007 or current
 TEMS Discovery report template (Microsoft Office Excel file .XLSX format) for
word report.
 MS-Word report template (.Docx) based to on the TEMS Discovery .XLSX
format report template.

5.2.4.2 MS-Word reporting template

To generate MS-Word report from TEMS Discovery; provide a Microsoft Office Word file
containing place holder for tabular data, chart or image. The MS-Word files name should
be same name as the TEMS Discovery Excel (.XLSX) report template file name and
should have .Docx extension.

5.2.4.2.1 Import tabular data from excel report template

To import tabular data (rows and columns) in MS-Word mark the rows in the
TEMS Discovery excel report template with [Table:Start-TableName] and
[Table:End-tag]. See the following example for tabular data with tag name ‘Power’.

User's Guide Tools 

 There are 2 ways to import ‘Power’ tabular data in Ms-Word report from the MS- Excel
template.
 Just add a line in MS-Word report template with text ‘{table:power} ‘
 Or create a table with column header ‘RxPower’ and ‘TxPower’ and write
{power} in the first cell of the table.

5.2.4.2.2 Import Chart from Excel report template

Provide all the charts in TEMS Discovery excel report template a unique title to include them
in the MS-Word report. The following picture shows a chart titled ‘Agg. Active Ec/Io (db)’.

To include this chart in the MS-Word report, add a line with text ‘{chart: Agg. Active
Ec/Io (db)} ‘.

5.2.4.2.3 Import image from Excel report template

 Correlation Chart – provide a unique name to the correlation chat in
TEMS Discovery excel report template. See the figure below.

230 
 Here the correlation chart ID is ‘RxPowerCorrelationChart’. To include this chart to
Ms-Word report, add line with text ‘{Image: RxPowerCorrelationChart.jpg}’.
 Map View – provide a unique ID to the map object in the TEMS Discovery
excel report template. See the figure below.

User's Guide Tools 

 To include the ‘MapTxPower’ in MS-Word report add a line with text
‘{Image:MapTxPower.jpg}’ in the MS-Word report template.

General syntax for adding an image in the MS-Word report:

{Image:ImageName}

232 
5.2.4.3 Sample Word Report Template

5.2.5 Generate Report From Report Template

A report can be generated from a report template in the following ways:

From Walk-U-Through
1. Go to the step Generate Report.
2. Select the target project from the combo box.
3. Select the target data.
4. Click the Generate Report button.
5. The report will be displayed in Microsoft Excel/MS-Word.

User's Guide Tools 

From Project List
1. Expand the tree view to the target mobile data or dataset; then right-click on that
target.
2. Select Generate Report.
3. The report will be displayed in Microsoft Excel/MS-Word.

From Data Explorer

1. Expand the tree view to the target mobile data or dataset; then right-click on that
target.
2. Select Generate Report.
3. The report will be displayed in Microsoft Excel/MS-Word.

Before the report can be generated from the template, the following Report Generation dialog
will open:

 Collection Date. You can report all the data in the selected dataset/mobile, or you
can report only on the data collected from a specified start date to a specified end
date.
 Data Filtering

234 
  Sector Group. You can report data from all sector groups, or you can select a
particular sector group.
 Condition. You can select one or multiple condition expressions on which to
filter data points, so that only the data points satisfying the condition expressions
will be computed. See Script Builder for how to define a condition expression.
 Default Geo Region. You can report only the data that falls within a selected geo
region. In Project Properties, you can assign a cluster index for those UDRs created
in the Map View. If you selected Consider data only in cluster region index and
given an index (see Report Options) in the report template, the target data will be
filtered by those indexed cluster UDRs. If you do not define cluster region filtering
for some data, that data will be filtered by the default geo region selected in this
dialog.
 Generate sector report from sector group. By identifying a sector group, you
can force TEMS Discovery to generate a report on that sector group only.
 Save report as an Excel file (and Word file if template exists). You can use
the Windows browser to save the report to an Excel file in a target folder, and if the
paired Word report template exists, the output Word file will be saved in the same
folder.
 Open generated report in Excel/Word. This option will cause the report to be
automatically opened when the generation process is finished.
 Generate report only on sheet index. By providing a sheet index, you can
force TEMS Discovery to generate a report on that particular sheet only.

After all options have been selected, select a report template and click Generate
Report. The final report can also be saved to a file.
If an Excel template has a paied Word template, in another word, has the Word template with
the same file name, an indicator “*Paired Word template exists” will be display in the header of
the tree view after Excel template selected.
The final report generated will be in the same Excel format as the report template. If you
select a report template with the extension xls, the final report will have an extension of xls,
and the same to extension xlsx. In addition, if the paired Word template exists, a final Word
report will be generated in the same target folder.

User's Guide Tools 

5.2.6 Available Chart Types
Microsoft Excel supports many kinds of charts to help you display data in ways that are
meaningful to your audience. You can easily select the type you want from a list of standard or
custom chart types.
Following is an overview of some standard chart types and their subtypes. For more detailed
information, please refer to Microsoft's online resources.

5.2.6.1 Column Charts

A column chart shows data changes over a period of time or illustrates comparisons among
items. Column charts have the following chart sub-types:
 Clustered Column. This type of chart compares values across categories. It is also
available with a 3-D visual effect. As shown in the following chart, categories are
organized horizontally, and values vertically, to emphasize variation over time.

 Stacked Column. This type of chart shows the relationship of individual items to
the whole, comparing the contribution of each value to a total across categories. It is
also available with a 3-D visual effect.
 100% Stacked Column. This type of chart compares the percentage each value
contributes to a total across categories. It is also available with a 3-D visual effect.
 3-D Column. This type of chart compares data points along two axes. For
example, in the following 3-D chart, you can compare four quarters of sales
performance in Europe with the performance of two other divisions.

NOTE: Data points are individual values plotted in a chart and represented by bars,
columns, lines, pie or doughnut slices, dots, and various other shapes called data
markers. Data markers of the same color constitute a data series.

236 
5.2.6.2 Bar Charts
A bar chart illustrates comparisons among individual items. Bar charts have the following
chart sub-types:
 Clustered Bar. This type of chart compares values across categories. It is also
available with a 3-D visual effect. In the following chart, categories are organized
vertically, and values horizontally, to place focus on comparing the values.

 Stacked Bar. This type of chart show the relationship of individual items to the
whole. It is also available with a 3-D visual effect.

 100 % Stacked Bar. This type of chart compares the percentage each value
contributes to a total across categories. It is also available with a 3-D visual effect.

5.2.6.3 Line Charts

A line chart shows trends in data at equal intervals. Line charts have the following chart sub-
types:
 Line. This type of chart displays trends over time or categories. It is also
available with markers displayed at each data value.

 Stacked Line. This type of chart displays the trend of the contribution of each value
over time or categories. It is also available with markers displayed at each data value.

User's Guide Tools 

  100% Stacked Line. This type of chart displays the trend of the percentage each
value contributes over time or categories. It is also available with markers displayed at
each data value.
 3-D Line. This is a line chart with a 3-D visual effect.

238 
5.2.6.4 Pie Charts
A pie chart shows the size of items that make up a data series (data series: Related data points
that are plotted in a chart. Each data series in a chart has a unique color or pattern and is
represented in the chart legend. You can plot one or more data series in a chart. Pie charts have
only one data series.), proportional to the sum of the items. It always shows only one data
series and is useful when you want to emphasize a significant element in the data. Pie charts
have the following chart sub-types:
 Pie. This type of chart displays the contribution of each value to a total. It is also
available with a 3-D visual effect, as shown in the following chart.

 Exploded Pie. This type of chart displays the contribution of each value to a total
while emphasizing individual values. It is also available with a 3-D visual effect.
 Pie of Pie. This is a pie chart with user-defined values extracted and combined into a
second pie. For example, to make small slices easier to see, you can group them
together as one item in a pie chart and then break down that item in a smaller pie or bar
chart next to the main chart.
 Bar of Pie. This is a pie chart with user-defined values extracted and combined into a
stacked bar. More information

5.2.6.5 XY (Scatter) Charts

An xy (scatter) chart shows the relationships among the numeric values in several data series
(data series: Related data points that are plotted in a chart. Each data series in a chart has a
unique color or pattern and is represented in the chart legend. You can plot one or more data
series in a chart. Pie charts have only one data series.), or plots two groups of numbers as one
series of xy coordinates. Scatter charts are commonly used for scientific data and have the
following chart sub-types:
 Scatter. This type of chart compares pairs of values. For example, the following
scatter chart shows uneven intervals (or clusters) of two sets of data.

User's Guide Tools 

 When you arrange your data for a scatter chart, place x values in one row or
column, and then enter corresponding y values in the adjacent rows or columns.

 Scatter with Data Points Connected by Lines. This type of chart can be
displayed with or without straight or smoothed connecting lines between data points.
These lines can be displayed with or without markers.

5.2.6.6 Area Charts

An area chart emphasizes the magnitude of change over time. Area charts have the
following chart sub-types:
 Area. This type of chart displays the trend of values over time or categories. It is also
available with a 3-D visual effect. By displaying the sum of the plotted values, an
area chart also shows the relationship of parts to a whole. For example, the following
area chart emphasizes increased sales in Washington and illustrates the contribution
of each state to total sales.

 Stacked Area. This type of chart displays the trend of the contribution of each
value over time or categories. It is also available with a 3-D visual effect.
 100% Stacked Area. This chart type displays the trend of the percentage each value
contributes over time or categories. It is also available with a 3-D visual effect.

240 
5.2.6.7 Doughnut Charts
Like a pie chart, a doughnut chart shows the relationship of parts to a whole; however, it can
contain more than one data series (data series: Related data points that are plotted in a chart.
Each data series in a chart has a unique color or pattern and is represented in the chart legend.
You can plot one or more data series in a chart. Pie charts have only one data series.). Doughnut
charts have the following chart sub-types:
 Doughnut. This type of chart displays data in rings, where each ring represents a data
series. For example, in the following chart, the inner ring represents gas tax revenues,
and the outer ring represents property tax revenues.

 Exploded Doughnut. This chart type is like an exploded pie chart, but it can
contain more than one data series.

5.2.6.8 Radar Charts

A radar chart compares the aggregate values of a number of data series (data series: Related
data points that are plotted in a chart. Each data series in a chart has a unique color or pattern
and is represented in the chart legend. You can plot one or more data series in a chart. Pie
charts have only one data series.). Radar charts have the following chart sub-types:
 Radar. This type of chart displays changes in values relative to a center point. It can be
displayed with markers for each data point. For example, in the following radar chart,
the data series that covers the most area, Brand A, represents the brand with the highest
vitamin content.

 Filled Radar. In this type of chart, the area covered by a data series is filled with
a color.

User's Guide Tools 

5.2.6.9 Bubble Charts
A bubble chart is a type of xy (scatter) chart. It compares sets of three values and can be
displayed with a 3-D visual effect. The size of the bubble, or data marker (data marker: A bar,
area, dot, slice, or other symbol in a chart that represents a single data point or value that
originates from a worksheet cell. Related data markers in a chart constitute a data series.)
indicates the value of a third variable. To arrange your data for a bubble chart, place the x
values in one row or column, and enter corresponding y values and bubble sizes in the adjacent
rows or columns. For example, you would organize your data as shown in the following
picture.

The following bubble chart shows that Company A has the most products and the greatest
market share, but not the highest sales.

5.2.6.10 Stock Charts

This chart type is most often used for stock price data, but can also be used for scientific data
(for example, to indicate temperature changes). You must organize your data in the correct
order to create stock charts. Stock charts have the following chart sub-types:
 High-Low-Close. The high-low-close chart is often used to illustrate stock prices
and requires three series of values in the following order (high, low, and then close).

 Open-High-Low-Close. This type of chart requires four series of values in the

correct order (open, high, low, and then close).

242 
  Volume-High-Low-Close. This type of chart requires four series of values in the
correct order (volume, high, low, and then close). The following stock chart measures
volume using two value axes: one for the columns that measure volume, and the other
for the stock prices.

 Volume-Open-High-Low-Close. This type of chart requires five series of

values in the correct order (volume, open, high, low, and then close). More
information

5.2.6.11 Cylinder, Cone, or Pyramid Charts

These chart types use cylinder, cone, or pyramid data markers to lend a dramatic effect to
column, bar, and 3-D column charts. Much like column and bar charts, cylinder, cone, and
pyramid charts have the following chart sub-types:
 Column, Stacked Column, or 100% Stacked Column. The columns in these
types of chart are represented by cylindrical, conical, or pyramid shapes.

 Bar, Stacked Bar, or 100% Stacked Bar. The bars in these types of chart are
represented by cylindrical, conical, or pyramid shapes.

 3-D Column. The 3-D columns in this type of chart are represented by
cylindrical, conical, or pyramid shapes.

User's Guide Tools 

5.3 ADP Management
Automatic Data Processing (ADP) is an advanced configurable function that monitors
newly arrived drive test data, automatically imports the data, generates reports, deposits the
reports to a specified location, and/or sends the reports via email. ADP allows multiple
computers to use distributed data processing. See Data Networking Configuration for more
information.
The ADP Management window can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting ADP Management from the Tools menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Automatic Data Processing button on the Main Window
toolbar.

You can create a new ADP task by clicking the New Task button on the toolbar and following the
wizard steps.
ADP tasks can be defined in the following ways:
 A purely file monitoring task that monitors file folders to import and processes the
data files into TEMS Discovery.
 A purely output generating task that generates output (pdf and/or report) from
project/datasets.
 A dual file monitoring and output task.
The Tasks tab on the ADP Management window lists the created ADP tasks in a table with
the following columns and functions:
 Task Name. Shows the name of the task.
 Status. Shows the status of the task (e.g., Active or Inactive).
 Start/Stop button . Starts or stops a task.
 Edit/View button . Edits or views a task definition.

 Delete button . Deletes an inactive task.

 Check Time. Shows the check time of the output generation.
 From and To. Shows the date range of the output data.

244 
  Task Description. Shows a description of the task.

The Log tab shows the logging information for the ADP tasks.
To configure ADP to achieve distributed data processing, click the Networking button on the
toolbar to access the Data Networking dialog. To distribute the created tasks
by this computer, this computer will serve as the Dispatcher and maintain a list of
computers that are available to process data. See Data Networking for more
information.

5.3.1 ADP Step1: File Monitor

The step 1 window of configuring an ADP task is shown below:

If you are creating a new ADP task for purely output purposes, you can skip this step by
clicking the Next button.
The table lists all the file folders to be monitored by this ADP task.
 To add a new file folder to be monitored by this ADP task, click the Add button
on the toolbar.
 To remove a file folder from the table, select the row to be removed and then click
the Remove button on the toolbar.

The table has the following columns and functions:

 Select. Used to select or unselect a folder to be actively monitored by the task.

User's Guide Tools 

  Host. Indicates the folder to be monitored is Local to this computer or from an
FTP server.
 Browse. Used to browse the Local folder or the FTP server folder and related
information. More detailed information about the FTP server information is in the
next section.
 Project Root Folder. Shows the folder name of the root folder of the project
data.
 Data Type. Indicates what kind of drive test data file is to be monitored in this
folder.
 Frame Configuration. Indicates which frame information is to be imported from the
files in the folder being monitored. Click the Frame Config button on the toolbar
to access the ADP Task Configuration dialog, where you can create or modify a Frame
Configuration.
 More. Used to set up more data import options for the folder being monitored. These
options include the rules for automatically assigning device attributes based on the
device attribute assignment template (see Device Attribute Assignment for more
information), antenna gain offset, and smart file merge.

If UETR or PCAP is selected, the following more options will be shown below.

 FTP Additional Info. Used to display additional information for the FTP monitor
folder.

246 
Set up Monitored Folder (Project Root Folder) and Sub-folders
In order to monitor multiple projects and multiple datasets automatically, it is recommended
that the monitored folder be set up according to the following structure:
<Monitored Folder>
<Sub folder 1 for Project 1>
<Sub-sub folder 1 for Dataset 1>
<Drive Test *.log files>
.....
<Sub-sub folder n for Dataset n>
...
<Sub folder n for Project n>
If no project sub-folders are under the monitored folder, TEMS Discovery will create the
following default project and default datasets:
_ADP_Created_Project_From_Folder_<Monitored Folder>
_ADP_Created_DataSet
Also, TEMS Discovery will automatically create the following two sub-folders after
execution of an ADP task:
 Imported. Log files that are successfully processed will be moved to this folder.
 FailedToImported. Log files that are not successfully processed will be moved to
this folder.
You should never manually place any log files to be processed under the Imported or the
FailedToImported folders.

Additional Settings
Task can be distributed across distributed network. If you would like to utilize
processing resources from other computers on the same network to help process new
monitored data files when this computer is busy, turn this option on.
Member of Distributed Network. If you want to add or modify the distributed network information,
click this button to access the necessary dialog.
Email template. If you want TEMS Discovery to send task status by email to the email
recipients defined by the Email Template, turn this option on.

FTP Setting. If you have selected FTP as the Host type, clicking the button in the Browse
column will bring you to the FTP Setting window.

User's Guide Tools 

FTP Setting Window parameters:
 Address. IP address of the FTP server to be monitored.
 Port. Port number of the FTP server to be connected to. If you don't know this value,
contact the FTP server administrator.
 Use HTTP proxy server (non-default). If you do not explicitly define the proxy
server setting, the default proxy setting in your Windows Internet options will be
applied when connecting to FTP.
 Need authentication. If the FTP folder to be monitored can be accessed
anonymously, do not check this option, and TEMS Discovery will try to connect to the
FTP server as an anonymous user. Otherwise, check this option and provide the user
name and password to be used by TEMS Discovery when connecting.
 Check FTP folder every x minutes. TEMS Discovery does not monitor the FTP
folder constantly; it checks for new files periodically. The default interval for checking
files is 5 minutes. If a shorter interval is selected, the CPU usage and network traffic
will increase, and vice versa.
 Handling for Files in FTP after Download. After downloading the data files from
FTP, you can elect to keep a copy in the local folder and then remove them from the
FTP server, or you can relocate the files to another FTP folder as a backup. It is OK to
leave them in the monitored FTP folder without further action, but this option is not
recommended.
 Keep a copy in local folder. Specify a local folder where TEMS Discovery can
download the new data file from the FTP server and keep it as a copy.
 Project root folder. As when monitoring a local folder, you need to specify the
Project root folder to be monitored on the FTP server. This folder must follow the
same rules as for the locally monitored folder.

NOTE: You can put any text notes here for your own reference purpose.

248 
Select the Select a folder to be monitored or the Select a backup folder radio button
before selecting a folder to be monitored or selecting a backup folder from the folder browser
by highlighting the folder.
When you click OK, TEMS Discovery will try to connect to the FTP server with the
information you provided and check whether at least one set of project/dataset folders is
available under the Project root folder being monitored.

5.3.2 ADP Step2: Output Data Source

The step 2 window of configuring an ADP task is shown below:

This window has two tree views showing projects and datasets that can be selected as the
output data source.
The left side tree view shows the current project and dataset folders under the monitored
Project Root Folder of this task. The right side tree view shows the output from the existing
projects/datasets. When you select/unselect a tree node on one tree, TEMS Discovery will
automatically select or unselect the corresponding node on the other tree if there is one on the
other tree.
Download & Show monitored FTP project/dataset names. If you have an FTP folder
to be monitored by this task, enable this checkbox (it is unchecked by default). If your computer
is connected to the network and you want to make a specific tree node selection, checking this
option will direct TEMS Discovery to connect to the FTP server and download the current
project and dataset subfolder names from the monitored FTP folder. (If the network or the FTP
server is slow and/or the folder has many subfolders, it could take a while for Discovery to
download all the information.)

User's Guide Tools 

5.3.3 ADP Step3: Output Scheduler
The step 3 window of configuring an ADP task is shown below:

Output Data Checking Options

Check Time. These settings tell TEMS Discovery when to check the project/dataset for the
defined time interval to generate the output. You can check at a certain time of day, or you can
wait for a certain number of minutes after the last drive test data file of a batch is placed in the
import queue. For example, if you define a check time of 30 minutes after the last file of a batch
is placed in the import queue and then start an upload of 10 files, if the upload interval between
the sixth file and the seventh file is more than 30 minutes, TEMS Discovery will automatically
group these 10 files into two batches and generate a report for each batch 30 minutes after the
last file of a batch is placed in the import queue, or at the time when all the files in the batch are
imported.
Check by. These settings tell TEMS Discovery how to check the data, by Data
processing time or by Data collection time.
At the check time, the active ADP task will check the project/dataset selected at Step 2 up to
the beginning of the start time interval and generate the output as defined by the task.
If the Check by option is set to Data collection time, the delayed by hours value will be
added. For example, if the delayed by hours value is 6, then the time range of a day's data will
be 6 AM to 6 AM on the following day.
Date Range. These settings tell TEMS Discovery what date range should be considered
when generating the output. For example, if you have data in the project/dataset as old as
January 1, 2010, but you only want to generate output from March 1, 2010, you can set the
starting date as March 1, 2010. Note that you can

250 
define a more flexible date range by defining the number of hours to look back from the check
time.
Once an ADP task with an output option set is activated and TEMS Discovery keeps running
on the computer, TEMS Discovery will try to generate the output based on the settings every
day at the Check time. TEMS Discovery will keep track of which days’ data have been
processed for output. If you stop and restart a task that has generated some output for some
days, TEMS Discovery will ask whether you want to re-generate the output from the Start date.

Output Data Grouping Options

Time options:
 Daily. The output will be generated daily, and every day's data will appear in one
output file (if set to Weekdays, output will only be generated Monday through
Friday).
 Weekly. The output will be generated at weekly intervals (every week or every few
weeks) according to the definition of the week's start day.
 User-defined. The output will be generated according to the date range defined by the
user.
 Per Import Batch. The output will be generated according to the data which has
been imported in the latest batch.

Device Output options:

 One per device. The output will be generated as one per device.
 One for all devices. The output will be generated as one for all the devices.

Project/Dataset Output options:

 Project. The output data will be grouped by project.
 Dataset. The output data will be grouped by dataset.

Save output files to each project subfolder (create if not exist)

Normally TD will output all files to used-defined output folder. The project name will be
concatenated in the output file name. If you like to group output files by each project, you shall
check this option. A subfolder will be created for each project and the output files will be saved
in each subfolder respectively.

User's Guide Tools 

5.3.4 ADP Step4: Output Type
The step 4 window of configuring an ADP task is shown below:

In this window, you can specify whether you want the output data to be sent to Batch PDF files
and/or Report files.
You can specify the output folder, and you also have the option to send the output file to the
email recipients specified in the Email Template.
If you want to edit the batch configuration, click the Edit button, which will bring you to the
Batch Configurations dialog. For more information, see Batch Configuration.

252 
5.4 Plug-in Manager
This feature allows you to view more detailed information about plug-ins that TEMS
Discovery recognizes.
The Plug-in Browser can be accessed from the Tools menu on the Main Window.

User's Guide Tools 

5.5 Neighbor List Analyzer
TEMS Discovery can generate an HO matrix from drive test data, and then, from the HO
matrix, create a neighbor list. If you link the generated HO matrix to an existing network
configuration, TEMS Discovery can even generate a neighbor list work order. For more
information on direct import of an HO matrix for neighbor list analysis, see Import HO Matrix.
The Neighbor List Analyzer can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Neighbor List Analyzer from the Tools menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the NL Analyzer button on the Data Explorer–Cells List toolbar.

254 
5.6 Antenna Pattern Viewer
This feature provides a view of the radiation pattern of the imported antenna files.
The Antenna Viewer window can be accessed from the Tools menu on the Main Window.

User's Guide Tools 

5.7 Batch Printing
TEMS Discovery provides a convenient means of batch printing. The user can select an
unlimited number of data sources and print them per the Batch Configuration.
The Batch Printing dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Batch Printing from the Tools menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Batch Printing button in the Main Window toolbar.

256 
5.8 Print Queue
In addition to Batch Printing, TEMS Discovery allows the user to define a print job by
specifically picking a metric from the Data Explorer of an open project and selecting the
visualization of data. This eliminates the process of defining the Batch Configuration, as is
required by the Batch Printing task.
The Print Queue dialog can be accessed by clicking the Print Queue button on the Dataset
toolbar or from the Dataset right-click context menus.

User's Guide Tools 

5.9 Signaling Message Browser
The Signaling Message Browser provides a highly organized view of the following signaling
messages:
 3GPP RRC, NAS, X2AP, and S1AP, covering WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE
 GSM Layer 3, RLC/MAC
 cdma2000 Signaling Messages
 1xEV Signaling Messages
 WiMAX MAC
You can also specify a keyword, and check the existence and the path leading to the
information elements containing the items searched.

NOTE: If the label of an IE starts with "<number>" or "[number]", it indicates that the
number specified is a possible numeric value of its upper level IE.

The Signaling Message Browser can be accessed from the Tools menu on the Main Window or by
clicking the Layer 3/RRC IE Browser button on the Messages View.

Signaling Message Browser Toolbar

Save. Save the check status of each IE to file.

Uncheck All.

Search Global. Search for an IE that contains the text phrase defined in the text box,
Global starting from the current selected tree node to the end of the tree view.

258 
 Search Local. Search for an IE that contains the text phrase defined in the text box, only from
Local the current selected tree node and its child nodes.
Stop. Cancel the search.

Help.

User's Guide Tools 

5.10 Parameter Mapping
On the Parameter Mapping dialog, all TEMS Discovery metrics and the mapping
between the names of the metrics used in TEMS Discovery and those from different vendors
are displayed. Use the Search Text function to find a target metric.
This feature is accessed from the Tools menu on the Main Window.

The possible values of a metric are listed in the TEMS Discovery Metric List. Each possible
value contains two parts, a numeric value used internally and a text value for display.
In Script Builder, if you define the data type of this metric to be float in the Alias spreadsheet,
the numeric value of this metric will be reported; otherwise, the text value will be reported.

260 
5.11 Log File Database Browser
This feature provides the functionality to browse the log files and download selected log files
from the database. An Excel-like spreadsheet is provided for easy filtering and sorting.

User's Guide Tools 

5.12 Log File Database Cleanup
This feature provides the functionality to cleanup the log files that were processed in a
particular date.

262 
5.13 Measurement Data Cleanup
This feature provides the functionality needed to clean up the measurement
database.
Use the Specific Data tab to select a specific project and delete the data for the
specified dates.

Or, use the Scheduler tab to set up the scheduler to clean up data automatically.

User's Guide Tools 

6 Statistic
TEMS Discovery Enterprise provides a set of tools, as described in the following sections, for
reporting statistic data.
 Cube Management, including the Cube Creator
 Statistic Browser
 Dashboard
 Report Generation
 Dashboard Builder
 Report Template Builder
 Cube Data Scope Configurations
 Statistic Data Cleanup
 Default GIS Builder
 Default Network Configuration Builder
 Database User Management
 Database User Access Permission
 Measurement Data Server List
 Enterprise License Information

NOTE: The TEMS Discovery Statistic feature incorporates the concept of OLAP “cubes.”
An OLAP cube is a set of data, organized in a way that facilitates non- predetermined
queries for aggregated information, or, in other words, online analytical processing.
OLAP is one of the computer-based techniques for analyzing business data that are
collectively called “business intelligence.” (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/OLAP_cube)

User's Guide Statistic 

6.1 Cube Management
Cube Management is a configurable function that creates new cubes, edits or deletes
existing cubes, and activates/de-activates cube processing. It also shows the cube filling
progress.
The Cube Management function can be accessed by selecting Cube Management
from the Statistic menu on the Main Window.

You can create a new cube by clicking the New button on the toolbar to bring up the cube
creator dialog. After the cube is created, its default status will be set to “Inactive”. You will
need to click the Process All Cubes button to activate it, so that the imported drive test
data can be extracted and stored in the statistic database according to the definition of the cube.

Cube Management Toolbar

Local Host. Open the Data Networking dialog and set up local host options.
Process All Cubes. Trigger the action to process all activated cubes.
New. Open the Cube Creator dialog to create a new cube.
Deactivate All. Deactivate all cubes.
Help.

266 
6.2 Cube Creator
The dialog illustrated below allows you to define how measurement data will be extracted and
what data will be stored into the statistic database.
This dialog is accessed by clicking the New button on the Statistic Cube Management
dialog.

To build measurement group for a cube, you can drag-and-drop the desired metric from the
Metric List on the left to the Measurement Group spreadsheet on the right.
To build the dimension of the cube, you can drag-and-drop the desired metric from the Metric
List, or the desired device attribute from the Device Attributes tab, or the desired cell attribute
from the Cell Attributes tab to the Dimension spreadsheet.
To apply condition filtering, you can select one or many condition expressions from
“Condition” sheet. Only the data meeting all selected conditions will be sent to statistic
database.

Metric List tab Device Attributes tab Cell Attributes tab

User's Guide Statistic 

UDR attribute can be defined as a cube dimension. To do so, you can draw UDRs in Map
View, assign attributes to each polygon, and then save. In the Data Explorer, right-click at the
newly created UDR, select context menu to copy it to the global UDR list. The attributes of
the polygon can be selected as global attributes for the statistic database in the UDR Attribute
Editor. After definition is complete, they will be listed in the UDR & Area | UDR Global
Attributes tab.
From the UDR Groups tab, select the UDR group for which statistic data is to be
calculated, based on the UDR attributes.

UDR & Area | UDR Global Attributes tab UDR & Area – UDR Groups tab

To enable calculation of area bin statistics, check the Calculate Area Statistics box and
define a minimum area size, in meters. TEMS Discovery will automatically generate the
statistic data for the area with bin sizes in multiples of the defined minimum area size. For
example, if the minimum area size is 100, TEMS Discovery will calculate data for bin sizes of
200, 400, 800, 1600, and up to 12800 meters.

NOTE: Once the cube definition has been modified, all statistic data associated with this
cube will be DELETED.
If data like UDR or network configuration refered by a cube has been modified, the
data of the cube processed before will be kept intact. However, you can force TD to
reprocess all data to reflect the change.

268 
6.3 Statistic Browser
With the Cube Viewer, you can browse statistic data in various presentations.
The Statistic Data Cube View dialog is accessed by selecting Statistic Browser from the
Statistic menu on the Main Window.
You can 1) select the desired presentation type tab – Grid, Chart, or Map; 2) select the desired
cube objects by clicking the checkboxes on the Objects tab; 3) click the Refresh button to
present the data in the selected view.

You can simply change the data scope to apply the same presentation to different data source.

User's Guide Statistic 

Filtering
You can filter the
displayed data.
All available filtering
dimensions for the
selected cube are listed in
the upper pane of the
Filters | Dimension tab.

by Dimension:
Once a dimension is
checked, the available
values for that dimension
will be listed in the lower
pane. You can select any
one of them as a filter.

by Date:
You can also filter data
based on the time range.

270 
6.3.1.1 Statistic Data Cube View – Grid

Statistic Data Cube View – Grid Toolbar

Refresh Data. Apply the new data selection and refresh the display.

Save As Excel. Save the current display as an Excel file.

File/Device Drilldown. Bring up the File/Device List. Then, double-click any of the cells in the grid
to list the contributed file/device in the dialog. Each row in the spreadsheet lists the processed
file/device and the location (data source) of that file/device. See File/Device Drilldown .

Help.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.3.1.2 Statistic Data Cube View – Map

Statistic Data Cube View – Map Toolbar

Table Size Selector. Display the Table Size selector for creating multiple Map Views.
Multiple views can be synchronized by clicking the Synchronization button .
Save. Save all the currently displayed views, or save an individual view as an image.
Turn On/Off Subview Synchronization Mode.
Synchronize all Map subviews created by the Table Size button .
Combo OnlineMap. List the available online map data source that you have been licensed.
box
Draw GIS in Grayscale. Display the GIS image in grayscale.

Pointer. Change the cursor to a pointer.

List of File/Device Contribute to Area Bin. Bring up the File/Device list. Click at any area bin
in the Map View to list the contributed file/device to the dialog. Each row in the spreadsheet lists
the processed file/device and the location (data source) of the file/device. See File/Device Drilldown
.
Reset.
Pan. Pan view to user-selected direction and distance.
Zoom In/Out:
1. To zoom in, left-click the desired location, which will be used as the center for the zoom in.
2. To zoom out, right-click the location, which will be used as the center for the zoom out.
3. Left-clicking and holding will draw a rectangle that will zoom in the view port to the area
within the rectangle.
4. Right-clicking and holding will draw a rectangle that will zoom out of the view port to that area
within the rectangle.

Unzoom. Undo the last zoom action. Clicking the Reset button will clear the history of
previous zoom actions.
Define Statistic Data Area. Only the statistic data in the defined area with Geo center defined in
“Cube Data Scope Configurations” will be loaded and displayed in Map View. This
area can also be defined in options

272 
 Refresh Data. Apply the new data selection and refresh the display.
Clean. Clean up the display.
UDR Polygon Selector.
Data Label. Display value of data points in the screen.

6.3.1.3 Statistic Data Cube View – Chart

Statistic Data Cube View – Chart Toolbar

Table Size. Display the Table Size selector for creating multiple Map Views.
Multiple views can be synchronized by clicking the Synchronization button .
Refresh. Apply the new data selection and refresh the display.

Clean. Clean up the display.

Save. Save all the currently displayed views, or save an individual view as an image.

6.3.1.4 File/Device Drilldown

Clicking at any area bin in the Map View, or double-clicking at any cell in Grid will list the
contributed file/device to the dialog below. You can:
 Download the processed measurement, or the original log files if you have
confiured Log file database,
 immediately send all files or multiple selected files to problem summary view
 Immediately open analysis set to analyze all files or multiple selected files

User's Guide Statistic 

File/Device Drilldown Toolbar
Save. Save the list to an Excel file.

Remote Servers. The Remote Data Sharing Servers dialog lists all remote servers that can be
accessed for peer-to-peer data sharing. If you want to download the listed file/device, make sure the
according server (data source) is in your remote server list.

Problem Summary View. Send all files or multiple selected files to Problem Summary View

Analysis Set. Open analysis set to analyze all files or multiple selected files.
Composite. Create new composite dataset from all files or multiple selected files, or add all files or
multiple selected files to an existing composite dataset.
Download. If TEMS Discovery detects that the data source is located in a remote server, it will
download the selected file/device and list the data in the Project List with the same data structure as
that in the remote server.
Pack. If TEMS Discovery detects that the data source is located in the local machine, rather
than downloading measurement data from a remote server, it will pack the selected file/device to a
zip file for sharing.

274 
6.4 Statistic Dashboard
The Statistic Dashboard is the user interface that presents statistic data in the way predefined
in the Dashboard Builder.
The Statistic Dashboard is accessed by selecting Dashboard from the Statistic menu on the
Main Window.
You can simply change the data scope to apply the same dashboard template to different data
source.

Statistic Dashboard Toolbar

Load. Load the statistic data based on the selected template.

Expand/Collapse Tree View. Expand/collapse the template tree view.

Dashboard Builder. Open the Statistic Dashboard Builder.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.5 Statistic Dashboard Builder
The Statistic Dashboard Builder is a user interface that builds a template that contains
information about the view layouts and the content to be presented in each view. The
available views are Pivot Grid View, Map View, and Chart View.
The Dashboard Builder can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Dashboard Builder from the Statistic menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Dashboard Builder button on the Dashboard toolbar.

All available dashboard templates are listed in the Templates tab on the left pane. You can
delete or edit those templates.
To start creating a new template, click the Prepare for New button , which will clean up
all assignments in the views on the right pane. Switch to the Cubes tab, select a cube, and then
make the desired selections.

276 
Pivot Grid View
For the Pivot Grid view display, you can select one or more measurements and dimensions in
the Object tab, apply a filter in the Filters tab, and then click the Assign button on the
Pivot Grid tab to assign the definition string to the target grid view.

User's Guide Statistic 

Map View
The Map View display has more options: Map Options and Miscellaneous Options.

Map Options
 Color shows UDR statistic data. To use this option, you must select one UDR
attribute as a dimension in the Objects tab. This option directs TEMS Discovery to
draw the UDR polygon with the selected attribute, calculate the statistic data of each
polygon, and then fill the polygon with the color determined by the plot band
definition.
 Include Cell Sites. Based on the boundaries of the statistic data, this option directs
TEMS Discovery to search the default network configuration list, locate all the cell
sites within the boundary, and draw those cell sites in the Map View.
 Include GIS map from group. Based on the boundaries of the statistic data, this
option directs TEMS Discovery to search the selected default GIS group, locate all
the GIS data within the boundary, and draw that GIS data in the Map View.
 UDR as print area. This option selects a list of UDRs as a fixed print area. TEMS
Discovery will determine the bounding rectangle of the selected UDRs and adjust
the view port of the Map View accordingly.

278 
Miscellaneous Options
 Map View/Chart Title. Enter the text of your choice to define a title for the Map
View or Chart.
 Font. Select the font for the text.
 Chart type. For Charts, select the chart type.

Layout
Use the options on the Layout tab to define the view layout.

User's Guide Statistic 

User-defined KPI
The user can create customize KPI from the pre-defined KPI.

For syntax reference, please visit pages below

http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.data.datacolumn.expression.aspx

280 
6.5.1.1 Dashboard Builder Toolbars
Prepare for New. Prepare for a new assignment. This cleans up all existing assignments and prepares
for creation of a new template.
Save. Save the template.

Save As. Save the template as a new template.

Delete. Delete the selected template.

Help.

Dashboard Builder Toolbar – View tabs

Table Size. Define the number of subviews.

Move Field Down. In Grid view, you can move a measurement or dimension field up or down to
change the order of the field in the grid.
Move Field Up. In Grid view, you can move a measurement or dimension field up or down to
change the order of the field in the grid.
Cell Span.

Horizontal Split.

Vertical Split.

Assign. Assign the selected option as a definition for the view.

Create/Edit User-defined KPI.

Redo. Redo the previous modification.

Undo. Undo the previous modification.

Clean. Clean up.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.6 Report Template Builder – Statistic Data
The Report Template Builder for statistic data is designed to provide great flexibility
when generating reports (in Microsoft Office Excel XLS format) from statistic data. The basic
operation is the same as described for the Report Template Builder used for measurement data.
The Report Template Builder for statistical data is accessed by selecting Report
Template Builder from the Statistic menu on the Main Window.

Currently, TEMS Discovery provides four types of statistic reporting: Chart, Map View,
Single value (the result is a single value), and Tabular.
A right-click at the spreadsheet will bring up the context menu described below.

282 
 Remove Chart. Remove the chart definition and clean up the
chart area.
Remove Map View. Remove the Map View definition and
clean up the view area.
Repetition in Report. Define repetition options in the report
template. See Options of Repetition in Report.
Repetition Flag. Define a repetition flag in the cell as a
placeholder. This placeholder will be replaced with the value of the
repetition key when the report is generated.
Chart Skeleton. Define a Chart Skeleton.

Single Value. Generate a single value

User's Guide Statistic 

Chart: Generate a chart

Map View: Generate a map view

284 
Tabular: Generate a tabular

Certain filters can be applied to any of the report types.

User's Guide Statistic 

Dimension Filter: When you generate a report based on a report template, you may want to
apply certain filters to all reports. (See Generate Statistic Report From Report Template for
more information.)
The following dialog provides a way to list those filters in the final report.

286 
6.6.1 Generate Statistic Report From Report Template
The Statistic Report Generation dialog is accessed by selecting Report Generation
from the Statistic menu on the Main Window.

The process is similar to that described for generating a report from the Report Template
Builder for Measurement Data. Time and dimension filters can be applied.
You can simply change the data scope to apply the same report template to different data
source.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.7 Cube Data Scope Configurations
The Cube Data Scope Configurations allows you to define geo center for calculating geo
area bins, select the data source for a cube, and define cube processing scheduler.
TEMS Discovery applies Azimuthal Equidistant projection for map display and geo area bin
calculation, therefore, geo center is crucial. If you make change to geo center, all the effected
statistical data shall be re-processed. You can always make change to the definition of a
particular cube to force it to be re-processed.
TEMS Discovery will extract the data within the certain time range from the selected
projects and fill the cubes associated in the statistic database.
In addition, you can schedule when to extract measurement data and fill statistic database
for a cube group. But for better performance, it is highly recommended to select option
“Immediate – Fill all active cubes(s) during data import”.
The Cube Data Scope Configuration dialog is accessed by selecting Cube Data Scope
Configuration from the Statistic menu on the Main Window.

288 
6.8 Statistic Data Cleanup
The Statistic Data Cleanup function cleans up the selected data from the statistic
database.
The function is accessed by selecting Statistic Data Cleanup from the Statistic menu on
the Main Window.

Specific Data
Use the Specific Data tab to select data to be purged from the database.
Date Range
Use the Date Range tab to identify data to be purged from the database by date.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.9 Default GIS Builder
The Default GIS Builder function allows you to select GIS data from the existing GIS data
list and build a default set of GIS data. In the Dashboard, Cube Viewer, and Report Generator,
based on the bounding rectangle of the statistic data, TEMS Discovery will determine what GIS
data is to be displayed in the view from this default GIS list.
This function is accessed by selecting Default GIS Builder from the Statistic menu on the
Main Window.

Drag-and-drop the desired maps from the list of available GIS maps on the left pane into the
list of default GIS maps on the right pane.
If no GIS map group exists, a dialog will pop up to ask whether a new one should be created.
You can also click the Add button on the toolbar to create a new map group. More than
one GIS map can be added to a group.

NOTE: See Import GIS data for more information.

Default GIS Builder Toolbar

Expand. Expand/collapse the tree view.
Help.

Add. Add a new GIS map group.

Delete. Delete the selected map.
Save. Save the current GIS configuration.

290 
6.10 Default Network Configuration Builder
The Default Network Configuration Builder function allows you to select a network
configuration from the existing list and build a default network configuration list. In the
Dashboard, Cube Viewer, and Report Generator, based on the bounding rectangle of the
statistic data, TEMS Discovery will determine what cell sites to be displayed in the view from
this default network configuration list.
This function is accessed by selecting Default Network Configuration Builder from the
Statistic menu on the Main Window.

Drag-and-drop the desired configuration from the list of available network configurations on
the left pane into the list of default network configurations on the right pane.

NOTE: The existing networking configuration lists are collected from measurement data
projects. See Import Network Configuration for more information.

Default Network Configuration Builder Toolbar

Help.
Delete. Delete the selected network configuration.
Save. Save the current network configuration.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.11 Database User Management
The Database User Management feature is used to create database users and to assign them
to user groups. Only TEMS Discovery users with administrator rights can create users who
can access the statistic database.
User groups created in this dialog are used for assigning permissions for statistic database
access.
This feature is accessed by selecting Database User Management from the Statistic
menu on the Main Window.

NOTE: Prior to using this feature, the user will need to configure the default statistic database
in the Statistic Database dialog, providing the correct user name and password.
The Statistic Database dialog is accessed by selecting Configuration |
Options | Statistic Database from the Main Window.

Database User Management Toolbar

Add. Add a new user (or user group).

292 
 Delete. Delete the selected user (or user group).
Save. Save the user group.
Help.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.12 Database User Access Permission
The purpose of the Database User Access Permission feature is to control and limit user
access to the statistic database.
This feature is accessed by selecting Database User Access Permission from the
Statistic menu on the Main Window.

Use the checkboxes in the three panels on the Database User Access Permission window
to limit user group access according to:
 Specific cubes
 The data in specific projects
 Device attributes in specific files/devices.

Database User Access Permission Toolbar

Save. Save the current user group.

Help.

Select All. Select All items in the panel.

Unselect All. Unselect All items in the panel.

Add Rows. Add rows for more device attributes.
Remove Row. Remove device attribute rows.

294 
6.13 Measurement Data Server List
The Measurement Data Server List is a list of servers that contain measurement data
that contributes to the current statistic database.
If the IP address of a server that processes measurement data and provides statistic data has
been modified, you will need to update the information in this dialog.
The Measurement Data Server List is accessed by selecting Measurement Data
Server List from the Statistic menu on the Main Window.

Measurement Data Server Toolbar

Remote Servers. The Remote Data Sharing Servers dialog lists all remote servers that can be
accessed for peer-to-peer data sharing. If you want to download the listed file/device, make sure the
according server (data source) is in your remote server list.
Modify IP. When TEMS Discovery extracts measurement data and stores the data in the statistic
database, it will also record the IP address of the measurement data server in the statistic database. This
information will be used for tracing the cube data back to measurement data.
If the IP address of the measurement data server is changed, selecting this tool will modify the record in
the statistic database accordingly.

Help.

User's Guide Statistic 

6.14 Enterprise License Information
The Enterprise License Information feature is used to display the license status. All
licensed technologies are listed in the spreadsheet on the License Status tab, and the
corresponding maximum active test units are listed on the Active Test Units tab.
The Database License Information dialog is accessed by selecting Enterprise License
Information from the Statistic menu on the Main Window.

296 
7 Configuration and Settings
The following sections describe the interface for TEMS Discovery configuration and
settings.
 Configuration Management
 Metric Frame Import Configuration
 Generic Text DT Data Import Configuration
 Data Networking
 ADP Management
 Email Templates
 Batch Configuration
 Message Coloring
 Messages View KeyInfo Settings
 Point Detail Settings
 Instant Chart Configuration
 Options

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  297

7.1 Publish/Update via FTP Setting
Using the Publish/Update Configurations via FTP Setting feature, TEMS Discovery users can
set up an automatic configuration publish/update process via an FTP server.
This feature is accessed from the Configuration menu on the Main Window.

If you turn on the Automatically update from the FTP server before generating
Reports option, TEMS Discovery will automatically update your TEMS Discovery
configurations based on the latest published configurations on the specified FTP server before
generating reports or before generating output by the ADP tasks.
Once an FTP server is set up, you can use the action buttons on the Configuration
Management toolbar to publish the selected configurations to the FTP server or to make
updates if new published configuration files are available on the FTP server.
 To publish configurations to the FTP server, select the configuration tree nodes to be
published, and then click the Publish button on the Configuration Management
toolbar.
 To update configurations from the FTP server, simply click the Update button on
the Configuration Management toolbar, and TEMS Discovery will automatically
check the specified FTP server's folder, download any new configuration files, and
import them into TEMS Discovery.

298  Configuration and Settings

7.2 Configuration Management
Configuration Management provides a user interface to manage all TEMS Discovery
configurations and settings that can be shared, saved, or deleted. You can select one or more
configuration items and export them to a ZIP file. This ZIP file can be imported into another
user’s TEMS Discovery application, allowing a group to share the same TEMS Discovery
configuration and settings.
This feature is accessed from the Configuration menu on the Main Window.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  299

To protect intellectual property, TEMS Discovery provides options to export script and report
templates with certain protection.

 Content Editable. The exported content will be totally open for modification.
 Content View-only. The exported content can be viewed only and cannot be
modified.
 Content Hidden. The exported content cannot be viewed and will totally hidden from
the GUI.
 Content Password Protected. The exported content will be protected from view
and modification. However, by providing the correct password, the user can
deprotect the content and both view the content and make modifications.
 Usage/Content Password Protected. The exported content cannot be viewed or
modified. However, by providing the correct password, the user can use it but will not
be able to deprotect the content.

Configuration Management Toolbar

Import. Import a TEMS Discovery configuration from a TEMS Discovery exported ZIP file.

Export. Export the selected configuration to a ZIP file.

Update. Update the TEMS Discovery configuration from the FTP server.

Publish. Publish the TEMS Discovery configuration to the FTP server.

Select All. Check all tree view checkboxes.

Unselect All. Uncheck all tree view checkboxes.

Delete. Delete the selected configuration.

Help.

Exit.

300  Configuration and Settings

7.3 Document Management
Document Management provides a user interface to manage all TEMS Discovery
documents that can be shared, saved, or deleted. You can select one or more documents
and export them to a ZIP file. This ZIP file can be imported to another user’s TEMS
Discovery application, allowing a group to share the same TEMS Discovery documents.
This feature is accessed from the Configuration menu on the Main Window.

Document Management Toolbar

Import. Import a TEMS Discovery document from a TEMS Discovery exported ZIP file.

Export. Export the selected document(s) to a ZIP file.

Update.

Publish.

Select All. Check all tree view checkboxes.

Unselect All. Uncheck all tree view checkboxes.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  301

 Delete. Delete the selected document(s).

Help.

Exit.

302  Configuration and Settings

7.4 Generic User-Defined Metric Group
TEMS Discovery can import drive test data from a delimited text file, and then the imported
data can be manipulated in a similar manner as drive test data from other formats. In other
words, the imported data can be displayed in all views, and it can be used to generate reports
through the Report Template Builder and produce new metrics or events through the Script
Builder.
To enable TEMS Discovery to import a text file, you must define a user-defined metric group
in the dialog shown below. This dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Generic User-Defined Metric Group from the Configuration menu
on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Edit button in the Import Drive Test Data dialog.
Once the metric group is defined, you can reuse it to import any text file with a compatible
format. This metric group will be listed in the Report Template Builder and the Script Builder
under the tree node _Plugin: UDMG (User-defined Metric Group).

To define a user-defined metric group from scratch, follow the steps below:

1. Click the Browse button to locate the delimited text file you intend to
import.
TEMS Discovery will display the first few lines of the selected file in the Partial
Preview tab, and populate the Source Column/TD Metric Name in the
Configuration tab. The names in Source Column/TD Metric Name are simply
copied from the column headers of the selected text file. Since the TD Metric

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  303

 Name strings will be displayed in the TEMS Discovery GUI, you can modify a
TD Metric Name to one that better describes the nature of the data.
You can also specify the column delimiters and data array delimiters if a column
contains a data array.

2. For any user-defined metric group, source columns must be mapped to

the TEMS Discovery metric name Time or Latitude/Longitude/Position.
You can select those pre-defined TEMS Discovery metric names, listed below, from
the combo box in the Internal Metric Name column.
Date If you have a source column that contains only date information such as 10/25/2010, you
can map it to this TEMS Discovery metric name. Further, you need to define the date format
in the text box at the bottom so that TEMS Discovery can parse this date information
correctly.
The date can be in compact format without a leading 0 (m/dd/yyyy, if the data is like
3/20/2010 (March 20, 2010)). Otherwise, the date is in the format mm-dd-yyyy.
(December 30, 2009 would be 30-12-2009.)
DateTime If you have a source column that contains both date and time information, such as
10/25/2010 10:23:59.232, you can map it to this TEMS Discovery metric name.
Further, you need to define the date format as described above.
Latitude The source data must be a numerical value in degrees.
Longitude The source data must be a numerical value in degrees.
Position The source data can be in a standard format such as 34:22:22N 117:34:22W
Time If you have a source column that contains only time information, such as 21:05:59.333, you
can map it to this TEMS Discovery metric name. If you don't have source data providing
date information, you can select a target date in the Import Drive Test Data dialog to provide
the missing information.

3. Define the binning type for each metric.

The following binning types can be selected from the combo box in the Binning Type
column.
_None_ No binning
AVG Take the average value of the bin
COUNT Take the count of data in the bin
ID Only take unique values of this metric in the bin (i.e., treat this metric as an ID)
FIRST Take the first value in the bin
LAST Take the last value in the bin
LATLON The value is GIS data and shall be treated specially
LAVG Take the linear average value of the bin
MAX Take the maximum value of the bin
MIN Take the minimum value of the bin
SUM Take the sum value of the bin

4. Assign the data type for each metric.

For different data types, the metric data will be displayed differently in the output. If
you assign text to a metric, this metric will not be used to generate statistic data such
as Mean, Average, etc. even though the nature of the data might be numeric.

304  Configuration and Settings

 float Assign this data type if the source data is numeric. You can also define the number of digits
after the decimal point to be kept.

If the data source contains a special value that indicates an exception, you can put that
value in the Exception Val column, or if you want to exclude a range of values, you can
define that range in the Exception >=" and "Exception <= columns. TEMS Discovery
will not import the exception value, but will set it to No Data.
integer Similar to the data type float.
text Assign this data type if the data source is text.

5. Define the group by metric

You can use Group By to separate data belonging to different identifiers, such as
WCDMA PSC or CDMA PN. By grouping the Ec/Io values or Ec values by PSC or
PN, you may avoid incorrect aggregation of Ec/Io or Ec values.

6. Define the sort by metric

By defining a metric as the Sort By entity, you can arrange a set of data according to
the values of the metric. Sort By is used in conjunction with Group By. However, it is
rare for one to use the same metric as the key for both Group By and Sort By. Using
PSC or PN as a Group By key and Ec/Io or Ec as a Sort By key is a good example for
typical usage.

7. Select where the metric can be displayed.

Select Time Chart, Map View, or Histogram. The plot band for the metric can also
be defined in this window.

User-Defined Metric Group Toolbar

New. Create a new metric group configuration.

Save. Save the current metric group configuration.

Save As. Save the current metric group configuration under a new name.

Delete. Delete the current metric group configuration.

Help.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  305

7.5 Metric Frame Import Configuration
When importing drive test data (Configuration type is “Regular”), TMI or UETR data, you
have the option to import only selected frames and to define the binning resolution for each
frame. You can also enable or disable the binning of data.
If binning is enabled, you can define different binning resolutions for each frame, or use a
uniform binning resolution for all of the frames. Note that some frames, such as Layer 3
messages, do not have any defined binning resolution.
This feature is accessed from the Configuration menu on the Main Window.

Metric Import Configuration Toolbar

New. Create a new metric import configuration.

Save. Save the current metric import configuration.

Save As. Save the current metric import configuration under a new name.

Delete. Delete the current metric import configuration.

Help.

306  Configuration and Settings

7.6 Plot Band Definition
TEMS Discovery provides a set of default plot bands. However, you can modify,
create, or choose a plot band definition for a metric.
The Plot Band definition dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Clicking the Plot Band button in the toolbar on the Main Window.
 Right-clicking a metric in the Data Explorer–Dataset List and selecting Edit Plot
Band from the context menu.

Plot Band Toolbar

Delete. Delete the selected plot band definition.

New. Create a new plot band.

Save As. Save the currently displayed plot band as a new plot band.

Generator. Generate a new plot band definition from scratch. This option will bring up the Plot Band
Auto Generator.
Insert Band. Insert a band to the spreadsheet.

Remove Band. Remove a band from the spreadsheet.

Help.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  307

7.6.1 Plot Band Auto Generator

 Settings. The plot band definition will always include the first band that is from the
minimum and the last band that is up to the maximum. You need to define the second
band and the second-to-last band. For the middle bands, you can define the number of
bands and the step.
 Colors. Define the color of the first and last bands, respectively, by clicking
Color of first band and Color of last band. For the rest of the bands, after
defining the start and end colors, the colors will be generated automatically.

Click Generate, and the plot bands will be generated automatically and the
spreadsheet will be populated.

To save the definition, click the Save button.

308  Configuration and Settings

7.7 User-Defined Parameters
The User-Defined Parameters tab allows you to view and define certain parameter
constant values that can be used in a script. Changing the parameter values may directly
affect the results of scripts using the affected parameters.
This feature is accessed by selecting User Defined Parameter from the
Configuration menu on the Main Window.

Two steps are required for creating and using a user-defined parameter:
 Create a threshold set.
 Create an alias in a script for the user-defined parameter. These
steps are described below.

Create a Threshold Set with a UDP:

1. From the Main window, go to Configuration | User Defined Parameter.
2. Click the New button and enter a new Threshold Set Name.
3. In row 1, enter the Technology (e.g., Common, GSM, etc.). This will allow
grouping of the UDPs within the Threshold Set.
4. Enter the Compact Name (e.g., CoverageOK).
5. Enter the threshold Value (e.g., -80). This value will be used by the script.
6. Enter the Unit, if applicable (e.g., dBm). The unit entry is optional information for the
user.
7. Save the new Threshold Set.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  309

Add an Alias for the UDP to Your Script:
1. In Script Builder, go to the Threshold tab.
2. Find your Threshold Set name in the tree and expand it.

3. Find the UDP name (the Compact Name defined when you created the
threshold), drag it into the Alias list, and give it an alias.
4. Use the alias in your script.

User Defined Threshold Toolbar

New. Create a new threshold setting.

Save. Save the current threshold settings.

Save As. Save the current threshold settings under a new name.

Deleted. Delete the current threshold settings.

New Row. Add a new threshold.

Insert Row. Insert a new threshold above the selected threshold.

Delete Row. Remove the selected threshold.

Help.

310  Configuration and Settings

 7.8 Dynamic Composite Dataset
Dynamic Composite Dataset is different from Static Composite Dataset in terms of how the
data is grouped. Dynamic Composite Dataset is a set of criteria that can be applied to any
particular project; as such, you will obtain only the data that meets those criteria.
The Dynamic Composite Dataset Settings dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Dynamic Composite Dataset Settings from the Configuration
menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Edit Composite Dataset button in the Data Explorer–Dataset
toolbar. The Dynamic Composite Dataset will be listed in the Data Explorer– Dataset
list together with the Static Composite Dataset.

Each attribute listed on the Attributes tab can be Each problem set listed on the Problem Sets
selected to be used with comma separated tab can be checked with a minimum value to be
values to construct the dynamic dataset. used to construct the dynamic dataset.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  311

7.9 Batch Configuration
A Batch Configuration can be used in the Batch PDF and ADP Management output tasks.
Many sets of options for generating the data summary of any particular device in PDF can be
defined. The PDF file can then be displayed in the Batch PDF View. See Project List and Data
Explorer for more information about how to select summary view options and generate batch
PDF for a device.
This feature can be accessed from the Configuration menu on the Main Window.

If you enter specific key values for the metric under the Options of current metric section,
separated by commas, TEMS Discovery will generate output only for the metrics that have the
specified key values. Otherwise, the metric for each key value will be output.
You can define or select a map group so that all the metrics with the same group name are
displayed in the same Map View. Otherwise, each metric will be displayed in the Map View
alone.

312  Configuration and Settings

7.10 Event Set Filter
An Event Set Filter is a set of time ranges defined by each event. For example, if an event
occurred at 8:00:00.000 AM, and the Before Time is defined as 6000 ms and the After Time as
4000 ms, then the time range from 7:59:54:000 AM to 8:00:04:000 AM is one of the time
filtering ranges.
You can use an Event Set Filter to filter metric values along with the other filters (e.g., Sector
Group, Condition, and Region).
Event Set Filters are created with the Event Set Filter Configuration dialog. To access this
dialog, select Event Set Filter Configuration from the Configuration menu.

Drag-and-drop any Script Event from the tree view on the left into the spreadsheet on the
right.
You can add as many events as you need, and you can modify the Before Time and
After Time for each event.
Typing directly into the Event column in the spreadsheet is not recommended because if you
make a syntax error, that event will not be used in the filter.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  313

7.11 Selective Task Condition Expression Builder
Selective Task Condition Expression Builder is used to simplify the creation of condition
expression that basically defines measurement task cycle, which can be applied to filter
data for display or report.
Those condition expressions can be used the same as other condition expressions created
by Script Builder

314  Configuration and Settings

7.12 Message Coloring
The Message Coloring feature provides a way to distinguish messages listed in the
Messages View with different colors.
The Message Coloring feature can be accessed in the following ways:

 Clicking the Layer 3 Message Coloring button in the Messages View

toolbar.
 Selecting Message Coloring from the Configuration menu on the Main
Window.

Drag-and-drop an element from the tree view into the spreadsheet on the Signaling
Message tab in the right panel. Click the cell in the Color column to choose a color. You
can associate a message or a channel with color. If color is associated to a channel, all
messages in that channel will be displayed in the same color in the Messages View.
Or, you can manually type keywords into the spreadsheet on the Case-sensitive Keyword
tab and associate a color. When building the Messages View, TEMS Discovery will check
whether the key information of a message contains any defined keywords, one-by-one, from
the first row to the last. If found, the background color of the row on the Messages View will
be colored accordingly. The order of the keywords in the spreadsheet will affect the coloring.
Click the Save button to save the color settings after any modification.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  315

7.13 Messages View KeyInfo Settings
To directly view information in a message, you can configure the key information so that it
is displayed in the KeyInfo column in the Messages View.
The Messages View KeyInfo Settings dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Select Message View KeyInfo Settings from the Configuration menu on the
Main Window.

 Click the KeyInfo Settings button in the Messages View toolbar.

Drag-and-drop an IE into the spreadsheet on the right side, and define an alias for the IE. Save
the settings and resend the mobile information to the Messages View; the information for the
defined IEs will then be displayed in the KeyInfo column.

316  Configuration and Settings

7.14 Point Detail Settings
TEMS Discovery can present detail information from a certain location and time (see
Point Detail View for more information). The user interface for Point Detail Settings is
similar to that of the Messages View KeyInfo Settings.
The operations are similar; however, you may define any named configuration, which will let
you freely pick the configuration needed to get the detail information of any particular IE set
at the moment.
The Point Detail Settings dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Select Point Detail Settings from the Configuration menu on the Main
Window.
 Clicking the Point Detail Configuration button on the Point Details toolbar.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  317

7.15 Instant Chart Component Content
The Instant Chart Component Content window provides a way for the user to create and
modify content of an Instant Chart. The tree view in the panel at the left lists all the
frame/metric candidates that can be dragged-and-dropped into the spreadsheet at the right. You
can give each metric selected in the configuration a fixed color, or you can use another metric's
plot band color in the same frame to mark the metric in the chart when it is displayed.
The Instant Chart Component Content dialog can be accessed by selecting Instant Chart
Component Content from the Configuration menu on the Main Window.

Instant Chart Component Content Toolbar

New. Create a new Instant Chart configuration.

Save. Save the current Instant Chart configuration.

Save As. Save the current Instant Chart configuration under another name.

Delete. Delete the current Instant Chart configuration.

Rename. Rename the current Instant Chart configuration.

Help.

318  Configuration and Settings

7.16 Data Networking
TEMS Discovery's architecture allows it to archive data networking; TEMS Discovery
peers can share data and participate in distributed data processing.
The Data Networking configuration dialog can be accessed by selecting Data
Networking from the Configuration menu on the Main Window.
After the settings on the Data Networking dialog have been made, the private data folder will
be visible and can be shared by other TEMS Discovery peers. See Project List for more
information.

NOTE: TEMS Discovery peers must run in the same local network. In other words, TEMS
Discovery cannot connect to TEMS Discovery peers through a router.

Make myself visible to peers. Check this option and provide the requested
authentication information to make TEMS Discovery visible to other TEMS Discovery peers
running on remote computers.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  319

Machine Information:
 Machine IP. The IP address of the local computer running TEMS Discovery. This
IP field will be filled automatically and is not editable.
 Use dedicated TCP port. The TCP port number used for TEMS Discovery
communication can be a positive integer from 0 to 32768.
Important: If Windows Firewall is running on the computer that hosts TEMS
Discovery, TEMS Discovery needs to be added to Windows Firewall as an exception to
open the specific TCP port. Please refer to Windows Help for more information.

Authentication Methods. To verify the identity of users who attempt access, use the
settings in this section to authenticate users and thus prevent unauthorized users from
establishing a TEMS Discovery TCP connection.
 Anonymous access. Select this option to allow users to establish an
anonymous connection. Your server logs on the user with an anonymous or guest
account.
 Basic authentication. Select this option to enable the Basic authentication
method for TEMS Discovery peers.
Important: Basic authentication results in the transmission of passwords across the
network in an unencrypted form. It is possible for a third party equipped with a network
monitoring tool to intercept usernames and passwords.
 Integrated Windows authentication. Integrated Windows authentication uses a
cryptographic exchange to confirm the identity of the user. TEMS Discovery, serving
as a data sharing server, will require that the user be a Windows user of the computer
that hosts this instance of TEMS Discovery. (Please see Windows operating system
Help for more information on how to add a user to a computer.)

Distributed data processing network. TEMS Discovery can also be configured to be

involved or uninvolved in distributed data processing. Select one of the following options:
 Can not be a member. Prevent this computer from being involved in distributed
data processing.
 Can be a member all day long. Allow this computer to be involved in
distributed data processing at any time.
 Can be a member from x to y. Allow this computer to be involved in distributed
data processing for a particular period only.
 Dispatcher. This computer will be involved in distributed data processing. It also
serves as the dispatcher responsible for monitoring newly arriving drive test data,
and dispatching processing tasks to the members of the distributing network.
Once a computer is assigned as Dispatcher, the members of the distributing network
can be built by clicking Members of Distributed Network.
The distributed data processing task is configured in Automatic Data Processing.

320  Configuration and Settings

7.16.1 Data Networking Configuration
A typical data networking can be configured as described, and the typical data flow could
be as follows:
1. The collected drive test data is uploaded to a data source server via internet.
2. A primary server, configured as the data processing dispatcher, continues to watch
the data source. It will immediately dispatch the information to the available
processing server, which processes the newly arrived data.
3. The processing server stores the data at a specific data storage location.
4. Reports can be sent by email, or deposited to a specific location via FTP.
5. The processed data can be shared by local TEMS Discovery users, or a TEMS
Discovery application hosting the server through a LAN.
6. Remote users can log in to a TEMS Discovery application hosting server and access
the processed data and report.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  321

7.16.2 Distributed Processing System
In the following distributed processing system (DPS), PC1 is running TEMS Discovery
designated as the dispatcher, PC2 through PC4 are running TEMS Discovery acting as remote
processing servers, and PC5 can be a pure data storage server.

Once all servers are set up and PC1~PC4 are running TEMS Discovery Professional as
described above, you can:
1. Create two mapped network folders.
These two mapped network folders will be accessible by all PCs with a common drive
and folder name (e.g., x:\monitored_folder, y:\private_data_folder). These folders can
be physically in one server or in separate servers.
 Shared Source Folder. Drive test data to be processed is placed in this
folder. When the ADP task is created in the dispatcher, this folder will be
configured to be monitored.
 Shared Private Folder. This folder will hold the processed data. For all
PCs, set this folder as a Private Data folder in the Options dialog
(Configuration | Options | Data Storage).
2. Set each of the Processing Servers (PC2~PC4) as Can be a member (Data
Networking dialog).
3. Set PC1 as Dispatcher (Data Networking dialog).
4. Add Processing Servers (PC2~PC4) as members of a distributed network to
Dispatcher PC1 (Data Networking dialog).
5. Create an ADP task in Dispatcher PC1 to monitor the Shared Source folder.
6. Start the ADP task from Dispatcher PC1.

This distributed processing system (DPS) will act once new log files arrive in the
Shared Source Folder.

322  Configuration and Settings

7.17 UDR Project Mapping
The user can select the target project and target dataset when importing drive test data.
The user can also use the predefined global UDRs and UDR Project Mapping setting to
decide which project and dataset will be the target. The following window shows how the
UDR and Project mapping is defined.

Each available global UDR can be used to match against one project and dataset.
A predefined default project named _No_UDR_Matched_Project will be used as the target
project and _UDR_Match_Default_Dataset will be used as the target dataset if:
 You selected the Use global UDR specified project/dataset option when the data
was imported.
 No project and/or dataset name was specified for a global UDR and a drive test
overlaps, or the drive test data doesn't overlap with any global UDRs.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  323

7.18 Device Attribute Assignment Template
After drive test data is imported, some key pieces of information will be extracted and saved
as attributes of the file/device. New attributes can also be created. Attributes can be used to
categorize files/devices for the following purposes:
 Organize mobile data in Data Explorer. Mobile data can be categorized and
logically displayed under the same attributes.
 Create Composite Data. Before creating a composite dataset, you can group the
mobile data by its attributes and drag-and-drop the entire group to create composite
data. See Composite Dataset for more information.
 Generate Reports. By assigning appropriate attributes to mobile data, you gain great
flexibility to generate reports from specific data. These attributes can be part of the
definition in the report template. See the Report Template Builder Metric List for
information about applying these attributes. When generating final reports from large
amounts of data, TEMS Discovery can internally categorize the data based on its
attributes and produce reports of defined attributes from the data.
New attributes are defined and edited on the Device Attributes dialog, which can be
accessed through the right-click context menus for data in the Data Explorer, the Composite
Dataset dialog, or the Report Template Builder. The attributes can be globally applied to all
data, conditionally or unconditionally.

User-defined Attributes
Users can define any number of attributes and assign values to them. These attributes can then
be used to group data for display or to identify data for reporting.

324  Configuration and Settings

Editable Attributes
The value of attributes can be assigned unconditionally, or changes to their value can be
assigned conditionally by providing a list of conditions and the associated change. In the event
you don't want to overwrite the value of an attribute that has been assigned a value, check the
Don't overwrite the value of attribute if it is not empty option.

The device attributes assignment can be saved as a template, and it can be configured to
automatically assign device attributes at the time drive test data is imported. (See Import Drive
Test Data and ADP Management for more information.)
With conditional editing, you can define a condition that checks for certain text phrases in the
file name. You can include the wildcard (*) in the text phrase to create more flexible condition
checking.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  325

Following are some examples of conditional editing:
Condition
ABC* Checks if file name starts with ABC
*ABC Checks if file name ends with ABC
*ABC*DEF* Checks if file name contains ABC, then DEF

Time Offset
Time offset is a special device attribute that can be set to artificially offset the data
collection time. This is extremely useful if you want to synchronize messages from
different devices.

326  Configuration and Settings

7.19 Wireless Operator Lookup Table
Wireless Operator can be looked up from MNC/MCC, SID or Operator ID. In Script
Builder the following built-in functions are created for accessing this table.
string GetOperatorByMncMcc(object MNC, object MCC)
string GetOperatorBySid(object SID)
string GetOperatorByOperatorId(object OperatorId)

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  327

7.20 Email Templates
During Automatic Data Processing, reports or status notifications can be sent by email to
specified groups of recipients. The Email Template dialog allows definition of email
templates that can be reused.

If Zip all attachment to single file with name is checked, all the attached data or
reports will be compressed to a single ZIP file, under a user-defined name.

328  Configuration and Settings

7.21 Options
The following categories of options are available: General Options, Measurement
Data Storage Options, Statistic Database Storage Options, Log Files Storage
Options, and Color Scheme. The Options feature can be accessed from the Configuration
menu on the Main Window.

7.21.1 General Options

 Enable Multi Threading Processing. When importing multiple drive test data
files, TEMS Discovery can create multiple threads with one thread for each imported
file. The number of threads will equal the number of processors the computer has
(dual-core computers have two processors, and quad-core computer have four).
However, the more threads that are created by TEMS Discovery, the more memory
will be consumed. The computer must have sufficient memory to support this
function; otherwise, the multi-threading processing feature will only slow down
processing.
You can also use this option to turn off multi-threading processing.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  329

  Max. Number Of ADP Import Threads (0 for default). Within the license
allowable number of ADP import threads, you have control of how many
simuteniouse import threads for importing data. If 0 is selected, TD will figure out a
proper number of ADP import thread base on machine configuration.

 Text Font. Define the font for the TEMS Discovery application. Clicking the
Text Font cell in the Value column will bring up the dialog to define a font.

 Text Color. Define the color of the font by clicking the Text Color cell in the
Value column, and then selecting a color.

 Max. Sector-Point Link Distance (km). Define the maximum distance of sector
coverage. This value will affect all the functions that associate the drive test data
point and sector.

 Sector Filtering Based On. In the Data Explorer, a sector group can be
selected to filter the data points. There are two options for filtering:
 All: A data point will be picked if it is covered by any of the sector in this
sector group.
 Top 1: A data point will be picked only if the Top 1 serving sector at this geo
location is in this sector group.

 WiMAX Default Version. Select the WiMAX default version for decoding.

 Measurement System. Select the measurement system for GUI display.

 Hyperlink to Multimedia Presentation Index File. In addition to the built-in

multimedia, you can set up a hyperlink to the multimedia presentation index file
located in your own server accessible by TEMS Discovery, so that you can maintain
your own multimedia and present them in the TEMS Discovery video player.
The index file will look something like this, where ### indicates a comment line and
[x] represents a kind of definition:

### [W] the home page for the video. NOT REQUIRED
### [B] video file base. Shall only define one [B]. REQUIRED

### List all video files one by one, using the following format
### [C] Category of the video
### [D] Description of the video
### [H] Hyperlink to the video file

[W]
http://nqlweb.tems.net/TEMS_Discovery/DiscoveryGE/Video/VideoHom
e.htm
[B] http://www.ascom.com/en/index

[C] Introduction
[D] TEMS Discovery
[H] tems-flash-discovery.htm

[C] Introduction

330  Configuration and Settings

 [D] TEMS Discovery Indoor
[H] tems-flash-discovery-Indoor.htm

 QVoice: CDMA Scanner Processing Cutoff Ec/Io (-28 to -15 dB). When
importing QVoice CDMA scanner data, ignore the PNs with Ec/Io values weaker
than the cutoff specified here.

 Max. Allowable Time Interval for GPS Interpolation (1 to 600 sec.). If the
time interval of two good GPS positions is longer than this maximum allowable time
interval, no GPS interpolation will be performed for the messages captured in this time
period. In other words, those messages will not be visualized in the Map View.

 Generate Statistic Data Along with Table View. If set to True, statistical data of
the metric will be calculated and displayed in a separate sheet. If the statistical data is
not needed, set to False for better user interface performance.

 Qvoice: Calculate Throughputs from PCAP Message. TD is able to calculate

UL/DL throughputs from PCAP message. However, you have option to directly import
the UL/DL throughputs from QVoice log file, or allow TD to conduct calculation only
if QVoice log file does not contains that information.

 Sampling of PCAP ACK Message Within (ms) (-1 for no sampling). A log
file could contain millions of PCAP ACK messages, which not only increase data
processing time, but also consume huge memory. Those ACK messages can be safely
skipped. TD can sample ACK message in user-defined time interval, or if -1 is set,
will not perform sampling.

 Enable Qualcomm Timestamp Adjustment. When importing log files that

contain qualcomm trace data, using timestamp in the original qualcomm message
to adjust the message timestamp.

 Max. Number of Files To Be Listed For Each Dataset (0 for no limit). Limit
the number of file/device to be listed for each dataset for performance purpose. If set to
0, all file/devices will be listed.

 GIS: Default Font Character Set. If GIS vector data contains certain non-
Unicode characters, the display may not proper. This option will allow the user to
define the proper character set which will take effect after restarting TD.

 Enable decoding of Qualcomm trace in *.QMD (Trace may not be

complete): Since the Qualcomm trace data may not be embedded completely in
QMD file, enabling the decoding of it could generate wrong result. This is an option
to disable or enable this decoding.

 Max Cube Process Interval in Miutes. The interval for processing cubes.

 Statistic Browser: Latitude range for Map View display (degree). Define the
area for browser to load statistic data. The geo center of this area is defined in “Cube
Data Scope Configurations”.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  331

  Statistic Browser: Longitude range for Map View display (degree). Define
the area for browser to load statistic data. The geo center of this area is defined in
“Cube Data Scope Configurations”.

 Report: Auto-adjust Resolution of Map View Chart to Optimize Memory

Usage. When reporting, the higher resolution of map view chart is set, the bigger
contiguous memory block TEMS Discovery may request. To avoid problem, TEMS
Discovery can automatically adjust the resolution to reduce the memory usage.

Folder Configuration
The user can specify a dedicate folder to storing system configuration files and
temprary data as well.

As a general guideline, the system data folder shall be in local machine, and the temp file
folder shall be located in a fast drive that has plenty of free space, and try to avoid C drive.

332  Configuration and Settings

7.21.2 Measurement Data Storage Options
TEMS Discovery provides Flat File and MS SQL Server options for data storage. Both
options have advantages and disadvantages; the decision is up to the user.

 Use Flat File for data storage. This option is the default. If desired, you can
select one folder for Private data and another for Public data. For TEMS Discovery
Enterprise, the default data storage is SQL server.

 Use MS SQL Server for data storage. With this option, you should install at least
MS SQL Server Enterprise 2008 R2. After the SQL server installation is done, check
the Pick a local SQL Servers to list available SQL servers in the local area network.
You can select one of the SQL servers and the database for TEMS Discovery will be
automatically created. You can also type in a remote SQL server and connect to an
existing remote database.

You can make the selection for Private Database and/or Public Database, then click
Save and exit from the dialog. TEMS Discovery will be restarted to reflect the
change.

If the SQL server you have picked is in a remote server, you will need to configure the
path for database data as below.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  333

 Data folder (Local). Even though the measurement data storage is a database, but
some working data will still be saved as a file in the defined data folder.

System data folder (UNC or network mapped in remote server, Optional).

When you run TEMS Discovery Professional and connect to the SQL server in a
remote server, you are running TEMS Discovery Professional as a read-only client. In
this scenario, If you like to apply the system settings like report template, scripts, etc
in the remote server, you will need to provide the path to the system data folder in the
remote server. Otherwise, you can leave it blank.

Data folder (UNC or network mapped in remote server, Optional). In the

scenario that you run TEMS Discovery Professional as a read-only client and you like
to utilize the intermediate result created by remote server, you will need to provide the
path to the Data Folder (Local) setting in the remote server.
Otherwise, you can leave it blank.

Temp file folder for SQL data transfer. (UNC path, Mandatory if SQL server
is in remote machine). When you run TEMS Discovery Enterprise and connect to
the SQL server in a remote server, you must provide the path to the temporary folder
that will be used for TEMS Discovery to dump text files for the remote SQL server to
perform data transfer.

334  Configuration and Settings

7.21.3 Statistic Data Storage Options
The Statistic Database dialog displays all the SQL servers that can be accessed by the user to
store statistic database information.
One, and only one, statistic database can be selected as the default statistic database. The data
extracted from the measurement data will be stored in this default database.

NOTE: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise version with Analysis Service must be
accessible from the user’s computer in order to use this dialog.

The Statistic Database dialog is reached by selecting Configuration | Options |

Statistic Database from the Main Window.

Temp file folder for SQL BulkInsert. (must be UNC path in remote server if
database in in remote server). When you run TEMS Discovery Enterprise and connect to
the SQL server in a remote server, you must provide the path to the temporary folder that will
be used for TEMS Discovery to dump text files for the remote SQL server to perform
BulkInsert.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  335

Statistic Database Toolbar
Add. Add a new statistic database. Brings up the Add SQL Server dialog, where information for the new
statistic database can be entered. For accessing remote statistic database, please refer to “TEMS
Discovery Enterprise system configuration”.

Edit. Edit the information for the selected database.

Remove. Remove the selected database.

336  Configuration and Settings

7.21.4 Log File Storage Options
The Log Files dialog displays all the SQL servers that can be accessed by the user to store log
file information. One, and only one, log file database can be selected as the default log file
database. The log files imported by TEMS Discovery will be stored in this default database.

NOTE: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise version with FILESTREAM enabled must
be accessible from the user’s computer in order to use this dialog. Please see Enabling
FILESTREAM in SQL Server 2008 R2 for more information.

The Log Files dialog is reached by selecting Configuration | Options | Log Files from the
Main Window.

Log Files Toolbar

Add. Add a new log files database. Brings up the Add SQL Server dialog, where information for the new
database can be entered.

Edit. Edit the information for the selected database.

Remove. Remove the selected database.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  337

7.21.5 Color Scheme Options

The Color Scheme options allow you to associate one color for each data type displayed in
the tree view. Clicking on a cell in the Color column will bring up a dialog in which you can
choose a color.
As an option, you can check Use System Color instead of this color scheme to
apply one color for all data types.

338  Configuration and Settings

7.21.6 TA Database Options
TEMS Discovery can directly access TEMA Automatic database to import uplink data
created by call generator, and fetch other information like area information.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  339

7.22 Import Data
Drive test data, cell configuration data, and GIS data can be imported into TEMS
Discovery. The imported data will be well organized, can be presented in various formats,
and can be shared.

7.22.1 Import Drive Test Data

The Import Drive Test Data dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Import | Import Drive Test Data from the File menu on the Main
Window.
 Clicking the Data Import button in the Main Window toolbar.

 Clicking the Import Drive Test Data button in the Walk-U-Through wizard
toolbar.

TEMS Discovery can import the following data formats:

 TEMS Log (TEMS Investigation, TEMS Pocket, TEMS Automatic)
 QVoice Symphony
 JDSU AOD/SD5

340  Configuration and Settings

  Qualcomm
 Nemo Outdoor, Nemo Handy
 PCTel Scanner
 Wave File
 Generic Text File (Delimited)

Follow these steps to import data:

1. Click the Select Data Format & Add Files button to add one or more drive test
data files to import. Please be aware that you must select the data format from the
pop-up file open dialog.
2. If the file you have selected is a supported archive file, clicking the file will list all its
entities in the Archive File Entities tab page. To select which entity or entities to
import, check or uncheck as needed.
3. Select the Use global UDR specified project/dataset option if you have global
UDRs and have specified the UDR Project Mapping and want to use the global UDRs
to decide which project and dataset should be used as the target.
 If you have selected this option and the imported drive test data does not
overlap with any of the global UDRs that have a project specified in the
mapping, then a default project named _No_UDR_Match_Project will be
used as the target project and a default dataset named
_UDR_Match_Default_Dataset will be used as the target dataset.
 If a drive test data file does overlap with multiple global UDRs and each of the
UDRs is mapped to a different project, then each of these projects will be used as
the target project to take the drive test data. You can skip the next two steps if
you have chosen this option.
4. Select or enter a new target project name in the Target project field.
5. Select or enter a new target dataset name in the Target dataset field.
6. When importing some drive test data formats, you may be asked to select or enter a
new target mobile name in the Target mobile field.
7. If your source drive test data does not contain collection date information, or you
want to change the collection date, define the desired data information in the Target
Date field.
8. You can define the time offset for the data, or skip it.
9. In the Smart File Merge section, you have the following independent options:
 Merge file if timestamp gap is less than or equal to x seconds. This
option allows you to physically merge the selected files (different from
creating a composite dataset, which is logically merged). If you want to merge
all the files, not limited to the selected files to be imported, in a dataset, do so
by selecting the context menu in Data Explorer–Dataset.
 Merge TEMS DCx to MSx. This option is applicable only to TEMS files.
 All TEMS indoor files share the same floor print and way points. This
option is applicable only to TEMS indoor files. Please be advised that the
selected files must be collected in the same floor and in the same time period.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  341

 10. Select the frame import configuration from the Frame Import Configuration field, or
create/edit the configuration by clicking Edit/View. See Metric Frame Import
Configuration for more information.
11. If importing a generic text file, select an import configuration from the Generic
User-Defined Metric Group field, or create/edit configuration by clicking
Edit/View. See Generic User-defined Metric Groups for more information.
12. In the Additional tab page, you have the following additional options:
 Apply antenna gain offset to user-specified devices.
 Include multiple levels of log file's parent folders as file name prefix.
This may avoid overwriting file names if you are importing the data from multiple
data collection teams and every team is using the default mmdd.log naming
convention for log file name.
 Define Default (Device) Attributes. This option allows you to globally assign
certain device attributes for the data to be imported. These attributes can then be
utilized for data grouping or for report generation. See Device Attribute
Assignment for more information. You should be very cautious when using this
feature to avoid incorrect assignment of device attributes if you are dealing with
simultaneous multi-device testing.
 You can select a device attribute assignment template and TEMS Discovery will
automatically assign device attributes for the imported device based on these rules.
See Device Attribute Assignment for more information.

Once you click Import, the task will be placed into the task queue for scheduling, and its
status will be indicated in the Task Window. After the data is imported, it will be listed in the
Project List and the Data Explorer.

342  Configuration and Settings

7.22.2 Import UETR
The Import UETR dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Import | Import UETR from the File menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Import Data button in the Main Window toolbar.

Currently, TEMS Discovery supports the import of Ericsson UETR files. You can select one or
more UETR files and import those files into the selected project and dataset.
You can adjust UETR messages by defining your time zone.
After a UETR file is imported, it will be listed under the selected dataset with its sub- network
name as the file name and IMSI as the device name. If you want to view how the UETR
message is aligned with the drive test data, you can drag-and-drop the corresponding UETR
message frames (in red color) from the drive test data listing to the Messages View. Then,
TEMS Discovery will only display the UETR messages within the time span of the drive test
data.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  343

344  Configuration and Settings
7.22.3 Import Network Configuration
The Import Network Configuration dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Import | Network Configuration from the File menu on the Main
Window.
 Clicking the Import Data button in the Main Window toolbar.
 Clicking the Import Cell Configuration button in the Walk-U-Through
wizard toolbar.

TEMS Discovery can import network configuration files of the following formats:
 TEMS .cel or .xml files for GSM and WCDMA. These files can be imported
directly without requiring additional mapping by the user.
 ACTIX™ cellref. These files can be imported directly without requiring
additional mapping by the user.
 ASSET™ .xml files for GSM and WCDMA. These files can be imported
directly without requiring additional mapping by the user.
 ATOLL™ .xml files. These files can be imported directly without requiring
additional mapping by the user.
 Ericsson Bulk CM files. These files can be imported directly without requiring
additional mapping by the user.
 Text delimited files. Any text delimited file can be imported, although a first- time
parameter mapping must be done by the user. Afterward, the mapping configuration
can be saved and shared across multiple users for future import.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  345

To import a text delimited network configuration file, the following procedures must be completed.
1. Prepare Network Configuration File
2. Set General Configuration
3. Create Mapping
After you have done the configuration and clicked Import, the task will be placed into the task
queue for scheduling, and its status will be indicated in the Task Window. After the data is
imported, the imported data will be listed in Data Explorer–Cells.

7.22.3.1 Prepare Network Configuration File

The network configuration will be a text delimited file.

The file MUST contain the following network information:

 Cell site ID
 Cell site location
 Sector ID
 Sector location, if it differs from the cell site location
 Sector azimuth

The file should PREFERABLY contain the following information, as well:

 Cell site cluster
 Cell site type
 Sector antenna type
 Sector horizontal beamwidth
 Sector vertical beamwidth
 Sector antenna height
 Sector mechanical down tilt
 Sector electronic down tilt
 Sector neighbor list

For cdma2000, the PREFERRED carrier parameters are:

 PN offset
 MCC
 SID
 NID

346  Configuration and Settings

  BID
 Pilot channel power
 Synch channel power
 Paging channel power
 Maximum amplifier power(Watt)
 Pilot power fraction
 Non-pilot overhead power fraction
 Traffic power fraction

For EVDO, the PREFERRED carrier parameters are:

 PN offset

For GSM, the PREFERRED carrier parameters are:

 BCCH
 BSIC
 MCC
 MNC
 LAC
 CI
 Transmitter power

For WCDMA, the PREFERRED carrier parameters are:

 PSC
 MCC
 MNC
 LAI
 RAI
 CPICH power
 Primary synch power
 Secondary synch power
 Traffic channel power
 Maximum amplifier power (Watt)
 Pilot power fraction
 Pilot overhead power fraction
 Traffic power fraction

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  347

For TD-SCDMA, the PREFERRED carrier parameters are:
 UARFCN
 CPI
 Cell ID

Additional information, other than the information required/preferred above, can also be included in
the file and imported into TEMS Discovery.

A sample of a network configuration file is shown below.

SiteNo SectorID Longitude Latitude Radius Sector Azimuth Model LAC CI Ant High Terrain Tilt TYPE BSIC BCCH
Width
Site1 Site1_O 120.9445 -40.88181 0.2 360 360 Repeate r 16761 40422 62 0 0 0 60 85

Site12 Site12_O 120.9552 -40.8872 0.2 360 360 Repeate r 16761 40422 62 0 0 0 60 85

The format of longitude and latitude can also be like E 120.9445, N 40.88181, using N, S, E, or
W instead of the + or – signs.

348  Configuration and Settings

7.22.3.2 General Configuration
After the network configuration file is well formatted, you can start to define the column
delimiters and create mapping between your source file and TEMS Discovery's internal
parameters.

Target project and Scenario Name. To associate a new name to the network
configuration, select or enter a new project name in Target Project, then select or enter a new
scenario name in Scenario Name.

Mapping Configuration. The mapping can be saved as a mapping configuration that can
be reused to import network configurations of the same data format.
There are two options:
 Existing. Select and apply an existing mapping configuration from the dropdown
menu in the Mapping Configuration panel; changes made to the mapping
configuration will be saved.
 Save as new. Build a new mapping configuration and save.
To delete any mapping configurations, select a mapping configuration from the
dropdown menu and click Delete.

General Configuration. The network configurations can be contained in one file, or

separated into several files. For example, one file can contain cell site information, another file
can contain sector information, and a third file can contain carrier information. If multiple files
are used for the network configuration, uncheck All information is in a single file, and click
Site File, Sector File, and Carrier File to identify the corresponding file.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  349

The preview spreadsheet displays the first 50 lines of the Site file. Select the correct column
delimiter and data array delimited to preview the source file.

350  Configuration and Settings

7.22.3.3 Create Mapping
Create mapping between source fields and TEMS Discovery's internal data structure by
dragging-and-dropping a source field from the list into the spreadsheet on the right side.
When creating mapping, all of the parameters in the Mandatory spreadsheet must be mapped
to the source field. Parameters in the Preferred spreadsheet are preferred, but not required; be
aware that missing some preferred parameters could make certain TEMS Discovery functions
unavailable. In Others, map any source field to a user- defined internal parameter; the user-
defined parameters are primarily used for display purposes.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  351

7.22.4 Import Antenna Data
If the Network Configuration contains Antenna_Type as a parameter of the Sector table,
TEMS Discovery can provide a view for the antenna pattern of a sector.
The Import Antenna Pattern dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Import | Import Antenna from the File menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Import Data button in the Main Window toolbar.

After you have selected the files and clicked the Import button, the task will be placed into the
task queue for scheduling and its status will be indicated in the Task Window. After the data
is imported, the imported file will be displayed in the Antenna Pattern Viewer, and can be
assigned to a sector parameter in the Cell Configuration Editor.

352  Configuration and Settings

A sample MSI Planet/TEMS Discovery Antenna file is shown below.

NAME 420
FREQUENCY 455
H_WIDTH 360
V_WIDTH 7
FRONT_TO_BACK 0
TILT ELECTRICAL
gain 9.2 dBI
Polarization VERTICAL
Comment
HORIZONTAL 360
0 0.2
1 0.2
2 0.2
...
353 0.2
354 0.2
355 0.2
356 0.2
357 0.2
358 0.2
359 0.2
VERTICAL 360
0 0
1 0.5
2 1.4
3 2.6
....
354 8.2
355 5.1
356 2.9
357 1.4
358 0.5
359 0

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  353

7.22.5 Import GIS Data
The Import GIS Data dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Selecting Import | Import GIS from the File menu on the Main Window.
 Clicking the Data Import button in the Main Window toolbar.
 Clicking the Import GIS button in the Walk-U-Through wizard toolbar.

You can select multiple GIS data files in various formats, then select or enter a new geo folder
in the field, and click Import. The import task will be placed into the task queue for scheduling,
and its status will be indicated in the Task Window. After the data is imported, the imported
data will be listed in the GIS List and the GIS/Coverage Map tab in the Data Explorer.
As a reference, the following is a partial list of spatial data products and formats that can be
imported into TEMS Discovery. However, it is strongly recommended to attempt import of any
GIS data, even if it is not known whether that format is supported.
 USGS Digital Line Graph, Optional Format (DLG-O)
 USGS Digital Line Graph, Spatial Data Transfer Standard Format (DLG/SDTS)
 USGS Digital Elevation Model (DEM)
 USGS Digital Elevation Model, Spatial Data Transfer Standard Format
(DEM/SDTS)
 USGS Digital Elevation Model, GeoTIFF Format
 USGS Digital Raster Graphic (DRG)
 USGS Digital Orthophoto Quads (DOQ), Native USGS Format
 USGS Digital Orthophoto Quads (DOQ), GeoTIFF Format

354  Configuration and Settings

  USGS Digital Orthophoto Quads (DOQ), JPG w/ Native Header Format
 USGS Geographic Names Information System (GNIS)
 USGS Land Use and Land Cover Data (LULC)
 USGS National Elevation Dataset (NED) - ArcGrid, BIL, Grid Float Format
 Global 30-arc-second Digital Elevation Data (GTOPO30)
 NOAA DSDATA Geodetic Control, SDTS Format
 NOAA TerrainBase Elevation Data
 Canadian Digital Elevation Data (CDED)
 JPEG Image with World File
 PNG Image with World File
 AutoCAD DXF (Drawing Interchange File)
 ESRI Shapefiles
 Surfer Grid (ASCII and Binary) Format Files
 Canada 3D Files
 International Bathymetric Chart of the Arctic Ocean (IBCAO) Files
 Global 2' Elevation Data (ETOPO2)
 GLOBE (Global Land 1-km Base Elevation) Data
 Arc/Info ASCII Grid
 Arc/Info Binary Grid
 LizardTech MrSID Data
 Arc/Info Export Format (E00)
 ERMapper Compressed Wavelet (ECW) Format
 ERDAS Imagine Image Format
 DTED (Digital Terrain Elevation Data) Format
 MapInfo MIF/MID and TAB/MAP Formats
 NIMA GNS (GeoNet Names Server) Format
 Terragen Terrain Format
 MicroStation DGN Format
 SRTM (Shuttle Radar Topography Mission)
 BIL/BSQ/BIP/RAW Imagery
 ASTER DEM and L1A/L1B Imagery and MODIS imagery
 BSB Nautical Charts
 MapTech Topo Maps and Aerial Navigation Charts
 MapTech Nautical Charts (PCX Format)
 TIGER/Line Files
 ADRG Files
 ASRP (Arc Standard Raster Product) and USRP Files
 CADRG and CIB Files
 VPF (VMAP0, VMAP1, DNC) Files
 S-57 Digital Chart Files
 JPEG2000 Files
 Erdas GIS/LAN Files
 GIF Files
 NOS/Geo Chart Files
 Garmin PCX5 Format Waypoint (WPT), Route (RTE), and Track (TRK) Files
 OziExplorer Waypoint (WPT), Route (RTE), and Track (PLT) Files
 GPX (GPS eXchange Format) Files
 Zmap Plus Grid Files
 DBF (DBase III+) Files
 BT (Binary Terrain) Elevation Grid Files

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  355

  GXF (Geosoft ASCII Grid) Files
 Geosoft Binary Grid Files
 ASPRS LIDAR LAS Files
 Hypack Matrix Files
 Marplot MIE Files
 DHM - Swiss DEM Files
 Lowrance USR
 GPS TrackMaker
 Landsat 7A FAST Format
 NTF Grid/Contour Format
 TerraScan .bin/.ts Format
 Idrisi Format
 Japanese DEM (JDEM) Format
 SEGP1/UKOOA Seismic Shotpoint Format
 CompeGPS RTE, TRK, and WPT Formats
 KML/KMZ Formats
 Lowrance SonarViewer Format
 NITF - National Imagery Transmission Format
 Geodas Grid (GRD98) Format
 Intergraph COT Format
 CDF (GES Cartographic Data Format)
 Platte River ASCII Digitizer Format
 AutoCAD DWG (DraWinG) File
 WAsP .MAP Format
 PGM Grayscale Grid Format
 SMT KINGDOM Software Planimetric Polygon Format
 Polish MP (cGPSMapper) Format
 GML (Geography Markup Language) Format
 DMDF (Digital Map Data Format) Format
 EMF (Windows Enhanced Metafile) Format
 PCX Files
 RIK (Swedish Topo Map) Files
 MPR/MPH (German Topo Map) Files
 OCAD .OCD Files
 HF2/HFZ Files
 PLS-CADD XYZ Files
 OpenStreetMap (OSM) Files
 TomTom OV2 Files
 Vulcan3D Triangulation (.00t) Files
 Delft3D (LDB) Files

356  Configuration and Settings

7.22.6 Import Coverage Map
Coverage maps exported from external planning tools can be imported into TEMS
Discovery.
These coverage maps can be displayed in the Map View, and they can be used to generate
delta metrics.

The procedure for importing a coverage map is similar to that of importing GIS data.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  357

7.22.7 Import HO Matrix
TEMS Discovery can import Handover (HO) matrices. Based on the HO matrices, TEMS
Discovery can use the Neighbor List Analyzer to perform neighbor list analysis and
eventually export a Neighbor List Work Order.
The HO Matrix formats supported include those from Huawei and Alcatel-Lucent WCDMA
networks. The support for other formats from other equipment vendors can be added upon
request. Please contact our customer support or sales team if you have additional questions.

7.22.8 Plug-in for Custom Import

TEMS Discovery provides API for users to develop their own parser to import data into TEMS
Discovery. Please see the TEMS Discovery API document for more information.

358  Configuration and Settings

7.23 Specific Topics

7.23.1 Floor Print Rectifier

For indoor type projects, you can use the Floor Print Rectifier tool to rectify the floor print
so it can be used with outdoor maps.

To rectify a floor print, perform the following steps:

1. Open the indoor project you want to rectify.
2. Go to the GIS/Coverage Map tab.
3. Right-click the floor print you want to rectify – it should be listed under the Floor
Prints tree node.
4. Select Rectify (Georeference) Floor Print from the context menu.
5. Click a corner point on the floor print as the 1st mapping point.
6. Find the corresponding point on the GIS Map (Google Earth or Bing Map, depending
on your TEMS Discovery license) display on the right-side window.
 If you are using Google Map, select Earth mode from the top menu list.
 If you are using Bing Map, select 2D mode with only Road or Aerial map
type.
7. Click the Update 1st Mapping button in the toolbar.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the next two corner points for the 2nd and 3rd
mapping.
9. Save the result and close the window.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  359

7.23.2 Save & Restore Working Environment
TEMS Discovery can easily restore the working environment. The Save Working
Environment dialog can be accessed in the following ways:
 Clicking the Save button on the toolbar.
 Selecting Save from the File menu on the Main Window.

 Save TEMS Discovery Document. Multiple projects and display data can be
opened and shown in multiple views, then saved as a TEMS Discovery document.
All data, including the view layout, will be saved. To open a TEMS Discovery
document, select from the list in Document List
 Save View Layout. The current view layout can be saved and restored for any
project by right-clicking the target project in the Project List and selecting Open
View Layout from the context menu.
 Save Analysis Set. Save the current view layout, along with the type of data
currently displayed as an Analysis Set. This analysis set can then be applied to any
mobile data by right-clicking a target mobile in the Project List or Data Explorer–
Dataset and selecting Open Analysis Set from the context menu. It can also be
selected when opening a project/device in the Walk-U-Through wizard.

360  Configuration and Settings

7.23.3 Cell Configuration
TEMS Discovery can import network configurations in a text delimited file format (see Import
Network Configuration for more information). The imported configuration can then be
displayed graphically in the Map View, and the information can be manipulated in various
ways (see Data Explorer–Cells and Map View for more information).

NOTE: Since TEMS Discovery is not intended for network planning purposes, its editing
capacity is limited. TEMS Discovery does not provide the functions to add or remove
new cell sites or sectors, but does allow a user to modify parameter values or to
add/remove parameters (see Edit Cell Configuration and Edit Cell/Sector Parameters
for more information).

7.23.3.1 Edit Cell Configuration

Cell configurations can be imported with the Import Network Configuration feature via a
customized text delimited file. The cell configuration can be displayed in the Map View for
various operations. Once the cell configuration is imported, it can be manipulated directly in the
Map View, or from the Cell Configuration Editor.
The Cell Configuration Editor can be accessed from the Data Explorer–Cells right-click menu.

The Cell Configuration Editor contains four spreadsheets of information for cell sites, sectors,
technology, and the neighbor list. You cannot add or delete cell sites or sectors, but you can
modify the values of the parameters and add new parameters. In

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  361

the Neighbor List spreadsheet, you can add a new neighbor list to a sector and modify the
neighbor list. All changes can be permanently saved.
A dropdown menu in the toolbar lists the sector filter expressions that have previously been
created. Select any of the filters to apply it to the cell configuration, and the filtered sectors
will be listed in the spreadsheet. Click the Filter Expression Builder button to bring up
the Sector Filter Expression Builder, where filter expressions can be edited.
In each column header, you can click the small filter button and select a string to
filter the data in that column. Press the Reset Row Filter button to reset the filters.

Cell Configuration Editor Toolbar

Save Network Configuration. Save any changes to the cell configuration.

Save As Excel File. Save the cell configuration to an Excel file.

Delete the Selection. Cut the text in the selected cell.

Copy the Selection to Clipboard. Copy the text in the selected cell to the Clipboard.

Paste to the Specified Cell. Paste the text into the selected cell.

Search Text. Bring up the Search dialog to search text in the spreadsheet.

Filter Expression Builder. Open the Sector Filter Expression Builder.

Global Edit. Global edit a parameter.

Reset Row Filter.

Help.

Highlight in Map View. Put a red flag in the site that is selected in the spreadsheet.

Highlight the Site/Sectors Listed in the Spreadsheet in Map View.

Save as Sector Group. Save the sectors listed in the spreadsheet as a sector group with name.

Unify Location of Sectors and Sites.

Add New Column. Add a new parameter to the spreadsheet.

Remove Selected Column. Remove the selected parameter from the spreadsheet.

Insert Rows. Insert the neighbor list to a sector.

Remove Selected Rows. Remove the neighbor list from a sector.

Shift the Selected Cells to Left. Move the selected neighbor to the left.

Shift the Selected Cells to Right. Move the selected neighbor to the right.

Insert a Cell. Insert a neighbor in front of the selected neighbor.

Remove the Selected Cells. Remove the selected neighbor from the list.

Filter Neighbor List.

362  Configuration and Settings

7.23.3.2 Cell Site/Sector Filter Expression Builder
The Cell Site/Sector Filter Expression Builder can create comparison expressions that can be
used in sector searches.
You can access the Cell Site/Sector Filter Expression Builder in the following ways:
 Selecting Sector Filter Expression from the Data Explorer–Cells context
menu.
 Clicking the button in the Cell Configuration Editor toolbar.

To search for a particular sector, create an expression containing the parameters of the
Cell Site, Sector, or Carrier, in the respective “Expression for” window.
Drag-and-drop the parameter name from the list on the left side into the corresponding editor on
the right side. The supported concatenation operators, logical operators, and arithmetic
operators are listed on the far right. Click one of the buttons and the corresponding operator will
be placed in the active editor.
The expressions can be saved with a name, after which the expression name will be listed in the
Data Explorer–Cells tab under the target scenario in cell configuration. You can use this
expression to search for sectors and highlight them in the Map View. The sectors can be saved
into a sector group, which can then be used to filter drive test data.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  363

Drag-and-Dropping Parameters
When dragging-and-dropping a parameter to the editor, a menu will pop up with two
options, Compare with number and Compare with text.

If you choose to compare the parameter with a number, a string Convert(<parameter_name>,

'System.Double') will be dropped into the editor; otherwise, <parameter_name> will be
dropped into the editor and the parameter will be compared with text.

Concatenation operators AND and OR

Concatenation is allowed for Boolean AND and OR operators. Use parentheses to group
clauses and force precedence. The AND operator has precedence over other operators. For
example:
(Antenna_Type = '731DG85V1EXM_850' OR Antenna_Type = '731DG85V1EXM_1900')
AND Convert(Height, 'System.Double') >= 80

Matching operator LIKE

The LIKE operator is used in character string comparisons with pattern matching. Both the *
and % can be used interchangeably for wildcard characters in a LIKE comparison. If the string
in a LIKE clause contains a * or %, those characters should be escaped in brackets ([]). If a
bracket is in the clause, the bracket characters should be escaped in brackets (for example [[] or
[]]). A wildcard is allowed at the start and end of a pattern, or at the end of a pattern, or at the
start of a pattern. For example:
Antenna_Type LIKE '*DG85V1EXM_*'
Antenna_Type LIKE '*DG85V1EXM_850'
Antenna_Type LIKE '731DG85V1EXM_*'
Wildcard characters are not allowed in the middle of a string. For example, 'te*xt' is not
allowed.

364  Configuration and Settings

7.23.3.3 Edit Cell/Sector Parameters
The Properties of Cell Site dialog, where the properties of a cell site or sector can be edited,
can be accessed in the following ways:
 Select one of the Data Explorer–Cells context menus.
 Click the Cell Site Property button in the Map View toolbar, and then click the
cell site or sector.

This dialog contains multiple sheets containing information on the Site, Sector, Carrier and
Neighbor List. You can modify the value of the parameters and save them permanently. You
can also export the information to an Excel file.
Using the Add Column or Remove Column buttons on the toolbar, you can also
add or remove a sector of the cell site, or add or remove a carrier of the cell site.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  365

7.23.3.4 Cell Configuration View Options
Other than displaying the icon of the cell site and sector in the Map View, the icon can be
colored based on the value of a particular cell parameter or sector statistics data. Besides, the
value of a cell parameter or sector statistics data can be printed on the screen as a label.
To edit the view options, right-click a scenario version in the Data Explorer–Cells List and
select Edit View Options from the menu.
The available view options are:
 Icon size
 Central Circle
 Color of Pie and Pie Tip
 Labels

366  Configuration and Settings

7.23.3.4.1 Icon Size
Cell sector can be displayed as a fixed pie or pie with width per antenna beamwidth. To better
distinguish different technologies/bands in each sector, a specific radius of the pie for the
technology/band can be defined.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  367

7.23.3.4.2 Central Circle
The center circle of the cell site icon can be colored by the plot bands defined for a particular
cell site parameter. Select a cell site parameter from the dropdown menu; then click Discrete
Bands Generator to generate discrete plot bands or Continuous Bands Generator to
generate continuous plot bands. When displayed in the Map View, the color of the center
circle will be colored according to the plot band.

368  Configuration and Settings

7.23.3.4.3 Color of Pie and Pie Tip
The color of pie can be used to indicate information from two categories:
 Sector/Carrier parameter
 Sector Statistics data
You can select any Sector or Carrier parameter and create the plot band following the same
procedure as previously described for the Center Circle; or you can select a specific data
from the tree view in the dropdown menu to generate sector statistics data, and the plot band
for showing sector statistics data will be auto-generated based on the plot band definition of
this specific data (see Data Explorer–Dataset for how to edit a plot band).
The Cell Configuration Name and Version fields define the cell configuration to which the
statistic data will be generated. This cell configuration must be consistent with the default cell
configuration of current project (see Project Properties for more information).

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  369

7.23.3.4.4 Labeling
The value of particular parameters can be printed as labels in the Map View; you can also
choose the colors of the labels. Additionally, specific data can be chosen from the tree view in
the dropdown menu and print the sector statistics data as labels.

370  Configuration and Settings

7.23.3.5 Cell Site Grouping Logic
The cell sites listed in Data Explorer–Cells can be grouped with user-defined grouping logic
for better data organization. To do this, right click a scenario version in Data Explorer–Cells,
and select Edit Grouping Logic from the menu.

Drag-and-drop a parameter from the tree view on the left side into the Logic pane on the right
side. For each parameter, define its range in the spreadsheet. Multiple parameters can be
dragged into Logic pane, and their levels can be modified by dragging-and-dropping them to
the desired level. All configurations can be saved with a name.
From Data Explorer–Cells, right-click a scenario version and select Apply Grouping
Logic from the menu. The name of the configuration and the logical display of cell
configuration will refresh and be grouped as defined, as shown below:

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  371

372  Configuration and Settings
7.23.3.6 Neighbor List Work Order
After using the Neighbor List Editing tools in the Map View (see Cells in Map View for more
information) to modify the neighbor list, you can generate a work order and save it to a file.
To access the Neighbor List Work Order dialog, click the NL Word Order button in
the Data Explorer–Cells List toolbar.

You can select a cell configuration and generate a neighbor list work order based on two
versions. After the work order is generated, click Save to File to save the result to an Excel
file or a tab-delimited text file.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  373

7.23.4 Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric
TEMS Discovery provides an easy approach to generating delta metrics between any given
metric pair or metric-coverage map pair, or generating grid-binned metrics with a user-defined
binning type.
The Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metrics Generator can be accessed as follows:
 Clicking the Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric button in the Data
Explorer–Dataset toolbar.
 Right-clicking any metric in the Data Explorer–Dataset List, and selecting the
Generate Delta/Special-type Grid-binned Metric option.
After the delta metric is generated, it will be listed under the Delta/Special-type Grid- binned
Metric tree node in the Data Explorer–Dataset. This delta/special metric can be displayed in the
Map View, Table View, Report View, etc., as are other geo-binned metrics.
Normally, when generating delta metrics, you would select [Pre-defined] as the binning type,

which is the aggregation method pre-defined in TEMS Discovery by the nature of the data.
However, you have the option to overwrite this default aggregation method by selecting any
other from the combo box. The available binning types are: AVG, LAVG, MIN, MAX,
COUNT, SUM, FIRST, and LAST.
After you select a base metric in the right panel, go to the combo box labeled Delta with: and
select the option to generate delta with another metric, with coverage map (see Import Coverage
Map), or with None. If None is selected, TEMS Discovery will actually perform geo-location
binning for the selected base metric with the selected binning type. You can also add an offset
to the result of each bin so that you can create more meaningful metrics.

374  Configuration and Settings

7.23.5 Pilot Pollution Analysis
Pilot pollution analysis can be run from selected scanner data, and the data can be listed
according to serving cell and secondary cell combinations.
The Pilot Pollution Analyzer can be accessed from the context menus on the Project List or
the Data Explorer–Dataset.

 Best EcNo. The strongest EcNo (dB) recorded for the serving cell across all bins in
which the respective serving cell and secondary cell were seen together.
 Best RSCP. The strongest RSCP (dBm) recorded for the serving cell across all bins in
which the respective serving cell and secondary cell were seen together.
 DL interference. The mean downlink interference reported by the scanner
across all bins in which the respective serving cell and secondary cell were seen
together.
 Max d. The maximum distance (meters) reported between the measured BIN and the
secondary cell, across all bins in which the respective serving cell and secondary cell
were seen together.
 Distance between cells. The distance (meters) between the serving cell and the
respective secondary cell.
 Too many servers event count. The number of Too many server events was
triggered across all bins in which the respective serving cell and secondary cell were
seen together. The definition for Too many server can be configured as shown in
user interface.
 Distance samples. The number of distance measurement samples were
recorded in which the respective serving cell and secondary cell were seen
together.
d < 1000, 1000 < d < 5000, d > 5000

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  375

 For each particular serving cell and secondary cell combination, this value shows
what percentage of distance measurement samples fell within a particular range
(meters) of the serving cell.

376  Configuration and Settings

7.23.6 GSM Interference Matrix
A GSM interference matrix can be generated from selected scanner data while the serving
sector is determined from phone data, and the data can be listed according to serving cell and
suspected cell combinations.
The GSM Interference Matrix can be accessed from the context menus on the Project List or
the Data Explorer–Dataset.

 Distance, km. The distance between the serving cell and the suspected cell
 C/I Average. The C/I average of all bins in which the respective serving cell and
suspected cell were seen together.
 C/I Std_Dev. The C/I standard deviation of all bins in which the respective
serving cell and suspected cell were seen together.
 C/I Worst. The worst C/I of all bins in which the respective serving cell and
suspected cell were seen together.
 Sample Count. The count of all bins in which the respective serving cell and
suspected cell were seen together.
 Bad Count (C/I). The count of the bins in which the respective serving cell and
suspected cell were seen together and C/I is less then threshold.
 Bad Count (C/A). The count of the bins in which the respective serving cell and
suspected cell were seen together and C/I is less then threshold.
 ITR C/I. Interference traffic rate
 ITR C/I, %. The lost traffic percentage for serving sector due to co-channel
interference.
 ITR C/A, %. The lost traffic percentage for serving sector due to adjacent
channel interference.

User's Guide Configuration and Settings  377

8 Appendix
This appendix contains two sections:
 Event List in Pre-defined Scripts
 Enabling FILESTREAM in SQL Server 2008 R2

8.1 Event List in Pre-defined Scripts

8.1.1 CDMA_Events
Event Category Event Description
Call Ending Call Drop
MT Call Drop
MO Call Drop
Call Network Release
MT Call Network Release
MO Call Network Release
Call Mobile Release
MT Call Mobile Release
MO Call Mobile Release
On Incoming Call @ EOF
On Outgoing Call @ EOF
On Call @ EOF
Call Setup Results On Incoming Call Setup @ EOF
Call Setup OK
Outgoing Call OK
Call Fail
Outgoing Call Fail
Incoming Call Fail
Incoming Call OK
Outgoing Call Setup Failure
Call Setup Failure
On Incoming Call @ SOF
CDMA Search Window SRCH_W_N too small
CDMA Soft Handoff Consecutive Handoff Direction
Soft Handoff Complete
Soft Handoff 2-Way
Soft Handoff 3-Way
Soft Handoff 4-Way
Soft Handoff 5-Way
Soft Handoff 6-Way
Soft Handoff Failed
EVDO_Handoff EVDO Single Server
EVDO 2-Way Softer
EVDO 2-Way Soft
EVDO 3-Way Softer-Softer
EVDO 3-Way Soft-Softer
EVDO 3-Way Soft
EVDO 4-Way Soft
EVDO 4-Way 2 Softer

User's Guide Appendix 

Event Category Event Description
EVDO 4-Way 3 Softer
EVDO 4-Way 4 Softer
EVDO 5-Way
EVDO 6-Way
Missing Neighbor Alerts Missing Neighbor Alert

Not Categorized Events

EVDO Access Failure
EVDO Access Success
EVDO Connection Attempt
EVDO Connection OK
EVDO Connection Fail
EVDO Connection Close
CS Call Drop
PS Call Drop
MT CS Call Drop
MT PS Call Drop
MO CS Call Drop
MO PS Call Drop
CS Call Network Release
PS Call Network Release
MT CS Call Network Release
MT PS Call Network Release
MO CS Call Network Release
MO PS Call Network Release
CS Call Fail
Outgoing CS Call Fail
CS Call OK
Outgoing CS Call OK
Incoming CS Call Fail
Incoming CS Call OK
CS Call Mobile Release
PS Call Mobile Release
MT CS Call Mobile Release
MT PS Call Mobile Release
MO CS Call Mobile Release
MO PS Call Mobile Release
On Incoming CS Call @ EOF
On Incoming PS Call @ EOF
On Outgoing CS Call @ EOF
On Outgoing PS Call @ EOF
On CS Call @ EOF
On PS Call @ EOF
On Incoming CS Call Setup @ EOF

380 
Not Categorized Events
On Incoming PS Call Setup @ EOF
On Outgoing CS Call Setup @ EOF
Outgoing PS Call Fail
PS Call Fail
Outgoing PS Call OK
PS Call OK
Incoming PS Call Fail
Incoming PS Call OK
Outgoing PS Call Setup Failure
CS Call Setup Failure
PS Call Setup Failure
EV-DO to 1xRTT
1xRTT to EV-DO
Supplemental Channel Assignment
Entering 1x Traffic Mode
Entering 1x Idle Mode
Dedicated_SOF
On Call at Start of File
On Incoming CS Call @ SOF
On Incoming PS Call @ SOF
On Outgoing CS Call @ SOF
Access Probe
Access Probe Retry
Origination Message
Page Response Message
Base Ack-to-Access Request
ECAM Received
BaseAckFTC
MSAckRTC
Call Blocked

8.1.2 EVDO_Events_Logbased
Event Category Event Description
N/A EVDO Access Failure EVDO
Access Success EVDO
Acquisition Failure EVDO
Acquisition Success EVDO
Connection Failure EVDO
Connection Success
EVDO Connection - Access HO
EVDO Connection - User Abort
EVDO AT Close
EVDO AN Close
EVDO Abnormal Release

User's Guide Appendix 

Event Category Event Description
EVDO Release Others
EVDO Reacquisition OK
EVDO Reacquisition Fail

8.1.3 GSM_WCDMA_Events
Event Category Event Description
.Common Entering WCDMA Dedicated Mode
Entering GSM Idle Mode
Entering WCDMA Idle Mode
Dedicated Mode at SOF
Paging Answered
Attach and Detach PS Attach Failure
PS Attached
PS Detach Failure
Network-initiated PS Detach
UE-initiated PS Detach
Channel Type Switching R99-to-HS Switching
Cell_FACH-to-Cell_DCH
Cell_FACH-to-Cell_DCH Failed
HSPA Mode Entered
HS-to-R99 Switching R99
PS Mode Entered Entering
Cell_DCH Failed to Enter
Cell_DCH Transition to
Cell_FACH
Dedicated Channel Not Allocated
Data Transfer Ready
Data Transfer Request with Cell Update
Data Transfer Request with E4a
Compressed Mode Entering Compressed Mode
Leaving Compressed Mode
Dropped on Compressed Mode
Critical RF Conditions Lack of Dominant Pilot
Pilot Pollution Alert
Poor Active Set Pilot Quality
Strong DL Interference Alert
Weak Pilot Alert
GMM Service GMM Service Request
MO GMM Request for PDP Deactivation
MT GMM Request for PDP Deactivation
GPRS Packet Access GPRS Packet DL Transfer Done
GPRS Packet Access Failure GPRS
Packet Access Success
GPRS Packet Access Retry
GSM RR Setup GSM Channel Request Failure
GSM Channel Request Success
GSM Channel Request Retry
Idle Procedures Registration Failure
Registration Success

382 
Event Category Event Description
IRAT Entering GSM from WCDMA
Entering WCDMA from GSM
Measurement Report Events e1a - Above Reporting Range
e1b - Below Reporting Range
e1c - Nonactive Better than Active
e1d - Change of Best Cell
e1e - Above Abs Threshold
e1f - Below Abs Threshold
e2a - Change of Best Frequency
e2b - (Q @ Own F<Thr1) & (Q @ Other F>Thr2)
e2c - Q @ Other F > Threshold
e2d - Q @ Own F < Threshold e2e
- Q @ Other F < Threshold e2f -
Q @ Own F > Threshold
e3a - (Q @ Own F<Thr1) & (Q @ Other RAT>Thr2)
e3b - Q @ Other RAT < Threshold
e3c - Q @ Other RAT > Threshold
e3d - Q @ Other RAT - Best Cell Change e4a
- RLC Buffer Above Threshold
e4b - RLC Buffer Below Threshold e5a -
CRC Errors Above Threshold e6a - UE
TX Power Above Threshold e6b - UE
TX Power Below Threshold e6c - UE
TX Power Hits Minimum e6d - UE TX
Power Hits Maximum
e6e - RSSI Hits Dynamic Receiver Range e6f
- Rx-Tx Time Difference > Threshold e6g -
Rx-Tx Time Difference < Threshold
Consecutive e1a~c Requests
Missing Neighbor Alerts Missing Neighbor Alert
Mobility Location Update Failure
Location Update Success
Routing Area Update Failure
Routing Area Update Success
PDP Activation PDP Context Activation Failure
PDP Context Activated
PDP Context Activation Request
PDP Deactivation PDP Abnormal Deactivation Request
PDP Context Deactivation Failure PDP
Regular Deactivation Request
PDP Context Deactivated
RRC Release RRC Connection Release
RRC Setup RRC Connection Setup Fail RRC
Connection Setup Rejected RRC
Connection Request Retry
RRC Connection Setup OK
RRC State Transition Cell_PCH-to-Cell_FACH
Cell_DCH-to-Cell_PCH
Cell_DCH-to-Cell_FACH
Cell_DCH-to-URA_PCH
Cell_FACH-to-Cell_PCH

User's Guide Appendix 

Event Category Event Description
Cell_FACH-to-URA_PCH
Transition to Cell_PCH
Transition to URA_PCH
ura_PCH-to-Cell_FACH
SMS SMS Send Attempt SMS
Paging Received SMS
Received
SMS Reception Fail
SMS Sending Fail
SMS Sent
Supplementary Services MO_CS_Call2_End
MO_CS_Call2_Start
Call Holding
MO_GSM_Call2_End
MO_GSM_Call2_Start
GSM Call Holding
MT_CS_Call2_End
MT_CS_Call2_Start
MT_GSM_Call2_End
MT_GSM_Call2_Start
UE-Reported Failures Active Set Update Failure
Cell Change Order from UTRAN Failure
Cell Update with Failure Cause
Measurement Control Failure
Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure
cellUpdate w/ radiolinkFailure
Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failure
Radio Bearer Release Failure
Radio Bearer Setup Failure cellUpdate
w/ rlc-unrecoverableError Security
Mode Failure
Transport Channel Reconfiguration Failure
Transport Format Combination Control Failure
UTRAN Mobility Information Failure
WCDMA DCH Bearer Rate PS DCH Rate Assigned
PS DCH DL Rate Decrease
PS DCH DL Rate Increase PS
DCH UL Rate Decrease
PS DCH UL Rate Increase

Not Categorized Events

CS Call Dropped
CS Call On-Call @ EOF
CS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
CS Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
CS Call Abnormal Release
MO CS Call Dropped
MO CS Call On-Call @ EOF
MO CS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
MO CS Call MS Release (Normal Cause)

384 
Not Categorized Events
MO CS Call Abnormal Release
MT CS Call Dropped
MT CS Call On-Call @ EOF
MT CS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
MT CS Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
MT CS Call Abnormal Release
Re-established CS Call Dropped
Re-established CS Call On-Call @ EOF
Re-established CS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
Re-established CS Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
Re-established CS Call Abnormal Release
GSM CS Call Dropped
GSM On-Call @ EOF
GSM Call - Low Speech Quality
GSM Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
GSM Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
MO GSM Call Dropped
MO GSM On-Call @ EOF
MO GSM Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
MO GSM Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
MT GSM CS Call Dropped
MT GSM On-Call @ EOF
MT GSM Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
MT GSM Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
MO PS Call Dropped
MO PS Call On-Call @ EOF
MO PS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
MO PS Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
MO PS Call Abnormal Release
MT PS Call Dropped
MT PS Call On-Call @ EOF
MT PS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
MT PS Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
MT PS Call Abnormal Release
PS Call Dropped
PS Call On-Call @ EOF
PS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
PS Call MS Release (Normal Cause)
PS Call Abnormal Release
Re-established PS Call Dropped
Re-established PS Call @ EOF
Re-established PS Call NW Release (Normal Cause)
Re-established PS Call UE Release (Normal Cause)
CS Call Re-establishment Retry

User's Guide Appendix 

Not Categorized Events
PS Call Re-establishment Retry
CS Call Setup EOF
CS Call Setup Failure
CS Call Setup Success
MO CS Call Setup EOF
MO CS Call Setup Re-directed to GSM
MO CS Call Setup Failure
MO CS Call Setup Success
GSM MOC - Long Setup Time
MT CS Call Setup EOF
MT CS Call Setup Failure
MT CS Call Setup Success
On CS Call at Start of File
CS Call Re-establishment Attempt Blocked
CS Call Re-establishment @ EOF
CS Call Re-establishment Failure
CS Call Re-establishment Success
GSM Call Re-establishment Attempt Blocked
GSM Call Re-establishment @ EOF
GSM Call Setup Blocked
GSM Call Setup EOF
GSM MOC Fail - RACH Fail
GSM MOC Fail - SDCCH Access Fail
GSM MOC Fail - SDCCH Drop
GSM MOC Fail - TCH Access Fail
GSM MOC Fail - TCH Drop Before Alerting
GSM MOC Fail - Dialed Number Busy
GSM MTC Fail - RACH Fail
GSM MTC Fail - SDCCH Access Fail
GSM MTC Fail - SDCCH Drop
GSM MTC Fail - TCH Access Fail
GSM MTC Fail - TCH Drop Before Alerting
GSM MOC Fail - No Network
GSM Call Setup Success
MO GSM Call Setup Blocked
MO GSM Call Setup EOF
MO GSM Call Setup Success
MT GSM Call Setup Blocked
MT GSM Call Setup EOF
MT GSM Call Setup Success
GSM MTC - Long Setup Time
On GSM Call at Start of File
GSM Call Re-establishment Failure
GSM Call Re-establishment Success

386 
Not Categorized Events
MO PS Call Setup EOF
MO PS Call Setup Failure
MO PS Call Setup Success
MT PS Call Setup EOF
MT PS Call Setup Failure
MT PS Call Setup Success
On PS Call at Start of File
PS Call Setup EOF
PS Call Setup Failure
PS Call Setup Success
PS Call Re-establishment @ EOF
PS Call Re-establishment Failure
PS Call Re-establishment Success
CS Call Setup Start
MO CS Call Setup Start
MT CS Call Setup Start
On CS Call Setup at Start of File
CS Call Re-establishment Attempt
GSM Call Setup Start
WCDMA-to-GSM Redirected Call Setup Start
MO GSM Call Setup Start
MT GSM Call Setup Start
On GSM Call Setup at Start of File
GSM Call Re-establishment Attempt
MO PS Call Setup Start
MT PS Call Setup Start
On PS Call Setup at Start of File
PS Call Setup Start
PS Call Re-establishment Attempt
GSM Intercell Handover Failure
GSM Intercell Handover
GSM Intracell Handover Failure
GSM Intracell Handover
UMTS IFHO Attempt
UMTS IFHO Fail
UMTS IFHO OK
Radio Link Addition Failure
Radio Link Addition
Radio Link Addition (partial)
Radio Link Removal Failure
Radio Link Removal
Radio Link Removal (partial)
Radio Link Replacement Failure
Radio Link Replacement

User's Guide Appendix 

Not Categorized Events
Radio Link Replacement (partial)
UTRAN-to-GSM Handover Failure
UTRAN-to-GSM Handover Success
UTRAN-to-GSM Handover Start
GSM-to-UTRAN Handover Failure
GSM-to-UTRAN Handover Success
GSM-to-UTRAN Handover Start
GSM-to-UTRAN Cell Reselection Fail
GSM-to-UTRAN Cell Reselection OK
GSM-to-UTRAN Cell Reselection Start
UTRAN-to-GSM Cell Change Order Failure
UTRAN-to-GSM Cell Change Order Success
UTRAN-to-GSM Cell Change Order Start

8.1.4 LTE_Events
Event Category Event Description
LTE Attach LTE Attach Request
LTE Attach OK
LTE Attach Accepted
LTE Attach Rejected
LTE Attach Failed
LTE Detach LTE UE-initiated Detach Accepted
LTE UE-initiated Detach Completed
LTE EUTRA Reporting LTE RRC A1 Event
Events LTE RRC A2 Event
LTE RRC A3 Event
LTE RRC A4 Event
LTE RRC A5 Event
LTE Consecutive A3 Events
LTE Handover LTE Intra-frequency Handover Failed
LTE Intra-frequency Handover OK LTE
Inter-frequency Handover Failed LTE
Inter-frequency Handover OK
LTE InterRAT Reporting LTE RRC B1 Event
Events LTE RRC B2 Event
LTE Misc. Rejects and LTE Authentication reject
Failures LTE Service reject
LTE Bearer resource allocation reject LTE
Bearer resource modification reject LTE
PDN connectivity reject
LTE PDN disconnect reject
LTE Authentication failure
LTE Activate dedicated EPS bearer context reject LTE
Activate default EPS bearer context reject
LTE Modify EPS bearer context reject
LTE RRC Connection LTE RRC Connection Request

388 
Event Category Event Description
LTE RRC Connection Complete
LTE RRC Connection Setup LTE
RRC Connection Fail
LTE RRC Connection Reject
LTE RRC Connection Release
LTE RRC LTE RRC Reestablishment Request LTE
Reestablishment RRC Connection Reestablishment LTE
RRC Reestablishment Reject
LTE Tracking Area LTE Tracking area update complete
Update LTE Tracking area update accept LTE
Tracking area update reject
LTE Tracking area update failed

8.1.5 Nemo_Events
Event Category Event Description
External application launch APP: External application launch
Call attempt CAA: Call attempt
Call connect success CAC: Call connect success
Call disconnect CAD: Call disconnect
Call failed CAF: Call failed
Incoming call CAI: Incoming call
Cell reselection CREL: Cell reselection
Data connection attempt DAA: Data connection attempt
Data connection success DAC: Data connection success
Data disconnect DAD: Data disconnect
Data connection failed DAF: Data connection failed
Data channel request DCHR: Data channel request
Data transfer completed DCOMP: Data transfer completed
Data transfer request DREQ: Data transfer request
Data stream status DSS: Data stream status
GPRS attach attempt GAA: GPRS attach attempt
GPRS attach connected GAC: GPRS attach connected
GPRS detach GAD: GPRS detach
GPRS attach failed GAF: GPRS attach failed
Handover/handoff attempt HOA: Handover/handoff attempt
Handover/handoff fail HOF: Handover/handoff fail
Handover/handoff success HOS: Handover/handoff success
Lock info LOCK: Lock info
Location update attempt LUA: Location update attempt
Location update fail LUF: Location update fail
Location update accepted LUS: Location update accepted
Measurement event information MEI: Measurement event information
Message sending/receiving attempt MSGA: Message sending/receiving attempt
Message sending/receiving failed MSGF: Message sending/receiving failed

User's Guide Appendix 

Event Category Event Description
Message sending/receiving success MSGS: Message sending/receiving success
Packet session activation attempt PAA: Packet session activation attempt
Packet session activated PAC: Packet session activated
Packet session deactivated PAD: Packet session deactivated
Packet session activation failed PAF: Packet session activation failed
Pause PAUSE: Pause
Ping session completed PCOMP: Ping session completed
Ping PING: Ping
Ping session request PREQ: Ping session request
Push-to-talk session attempt PTTA: Push-to-talk session attempt
Push-to-talk session connected PTTC: Push-to-talk session connected
Push-to-talk session disconnected PTTD: Push-to-talk session disconnected
Push-to-talk session failed PTTF: Push-to-talk session failed
Quality of service profile negotiated QSPN: Quality of service profile negotiated
Quality of service profile request QSPR: Quality of service profile request
Roaming Status Changes ROAM: Roaming Status Changes
Radio resource connection attempt RRA: Radio resource connection attempt
Radio resource connection success RRC: Radio resource connection success
Radio resource connection release RRD: Radio resource connection release
Radio resource connection failure RRF: Radio resource connection failure
Routing area update attempt RUA: Routing area update attempt
Routing area update fail RUF: Routing area update fail
Routing area update successful RUS: Routing area update successful
Service Status Changes SEI: Service Status Changes
Soft handover SHO: Soft handover
Soft handover event information SHOI: Soft handover event information
TBF uplink establishment TBFULE: TBF uplink establishment

8.1.6 QVoice_Markers
Marker Category Marker Description
Marker-Cell Reselection Cell Reselection
Marker-ETSI ETSI Marker
ETSI Invalid
ETSI ATD
ETSI ROFPCC
ETSI SOFPCC
ETSI FSYN
ETSI ROLPCC
ETSI ROFALPCC
ETSI ROAFSA
ETSI SOFG
ETSI ROPA250HELO
ETSI ROPA250EOM
ETSI POPRETR
ETSI PCFS

390 
Marker Category Marker Description
ETSI SOLPCC (customer creation) ETSI
ROHALPCC (customer creation) ETSI
TCPRTD
ETSI conformity
ETSI VT_CALL_ACCEPTED
ETSI VT_AUDIO_CONNECTED
ETSI VT_VIDEO_CONNCETED
ETSI SPEECH_DELAY_SENT
ETSI SPEECH_DELAY_RECEIVED
ETSI VT_VIDEO_DELAY_SENT ETSI
VT_VIDEO_DELAY_RECEIVED
Marker-FTP FTP public 2 DL Start
FTP public 2 UL Start
FTP 2 DL Start
FTP 2 UL Start FTP
public DL Start FTP
public UL Start
FTP Downlink START
FTP Uplink START
FTP STOP
FTP public STOP
FTP CONNECT FTP
DISCONNECT
FTP public 3 DL Start
FTP public 3 UL Start
FTP 3 DL Start
FTP 3 UL Start
Marker-GPRS Attachment AttchRequest
AttachAccept
AttachComplete
AttachReject
DetachRequest
DetachAccept
Marker-GPRS PDP Context Activate PDP Context Request
Activate PDP Context Accept
Activate PDP Context Reject
Deactivate PDP Context Request
Deactivate PDP Context Accept Ras
Connect Start
Ras Connect Success Ras
Disconnect Start Ras
Disconnect Success
Ras Disconnect Completed
Ras Timeout
Ras Connection Lost
Marker-GPRS RAU RAUpdateRequest
RAUpdateAccept
RAUpdateComplete
RAUpdateReject
Marker-GPRS TBF Open Downlink
Open Uplink
Close Downlink

User's Guide Appendix 

Marker Category Marker Description
Close Uplink
Marker-Handover HandoverCommand
HandoverComplete HandoverFailure
IntraCellHandoverCommand
IntraCellHandoverComplete
IntraCellHandoverFailure
ActiveSetUpdate
ActiveSetUpdateComplete
ActiveSetUpdateFailure
IntraFreqHardHandoverCommand
IntraFreqHardHandoverComplete
IntraFreqHardHandoverFailure
InterFreqHardHandoverCommand
InterFreqHardHandoverComplete
InterFreqHardHandoverFailure
HandoverFromUTRANCommand
HandoverFromUTRANFailure
InterSystemHOToUTRANCommand
HandoverToUTRANComplete
Hard Handoff - CDMA to Analog
Hard Handoff - Analog to CDMA
Hard Handoff - CDMA to CDMA
Active Set Handoff

Marker-HTTP HTTP 2 Start

HTTP Start
HTTP STOP
Marker-IE Browse IE Browse STOP
IE Browse Start
Marker-IPDS IP Data Session Start IP
Data Session End
IP Data Session User Break
IP Data Session No Loop Mode Break IP
Data Session Supervisor Break
IP Data Session Max Count Break
Marker-MAIL MAIL Start
MAIL STOP
Marker-MMS MMS STOP
MMS Send End
MMS Retrieve End
MMS Reject End
MMS Start
MMS Notify Response Event
Marker-MOC Call MOC Dial
MOC Setup
MOC Connect
MOC ConnectFail
MOC Disconnect
MOC Release MOC
ReleaseError MOC
Break
MOC CallError

392 
Marker Category Marker Description
MOC SystemRelease
MOC UserRelease
Marker-Pause Pause Start
Pause End
Marker-PING PING Start
PING STOP
PING High Resolution STOP
PING Start HR
Marker-POP3 POP3 Start Delete
POP3 Start Get
POP3 STOP
Marker-RRC State RRC State Idle
RRC State Connecting
RRC State Cell_DCH
RRC State Cell_FACH
RRC State Cell_PCH
URA_PCH
RRC State Out of zone
Marker-SMS SMS Start
SMS Start Old
SMS STOP
Marker-SMTP SMTP Start
SMTP STOP
Marker-Speech Unknown
Speech sample Start
Speech sample Stop
Evaluated part Start
Evaluated part STOP
Marker-STREAM STREAM STOP
Stream Overall Marker
QuickTime (QT) START
Real Media (RM) START
Windows Media (WM) START
MPEG-4 using QT START
3GPP using QT START
Marker-UDP UDP Downlink Start
UPD Uplink Start
UDP STOP
Marker-URA Update URA Update Marker
Marker-User Master
Slave
Marker-VT Video VT Video Unknown
VT Video First received frame
VT Video Last received frame
VT Video First received frame of training sequence
Marker-WAP WAP 2 Start
WAP Start
WAP STOP
Marker-WS WSP/HTTP Redirect M_SEND_REQ
WSP/HTTP Redirect M_SEND_CONF

User's Guide Appendix 

Marker Category Marker Description
WSP/HTTP Redirect M_SEND_NOTIFY_IND
WSP/HTTP Redirect M_SEND_NOTIFYRESP_IND
WSP/HTTP Redirect M_RECEIVE_CONF
WSP/HTTP Redirect M_ACKNOWLEDGE_IND
WSP/HTTP Redirect M_DELIVERY_IND
WSP/HTTP Redirect M_READREPLY
WSP/HTTP Post M_SEND_REQ
WSP/HTTP Post M_SEND_CONF
WSP/HTTP Post M_SEND_NOTIFY_IND
WSP/HTTP Post M_SEND_NOTIFYRESP_IND
WSP/HTTP Post M_RECEIVE_CONF WSP/HTTP
Post M_ACKNOWLEDGE_IND WSP/HTTP Post
M_DELIVERY_IND WSP/HTTP Post
M_READREPLY
WSP/HTTP Get M_SEND_REQ
WSP/HTTP Get M_SEND_CONF
WSP/HTTP Get M_SEND_NOTIFY_IND
WSP/HTTP Get M_SEND_NOTIFYRESP_IND
WSP/HTTP Get M_RECEIVE_CONF WSP/HTTP
Get M_ACKNOWLEDGE_IND WSP/HTTP Get
M_DELIVERY_IND
WSP/HTTP Get M_READREPLY128$M_SEND_REQ
M_SEND_CONF
M_SEND_NOTIFY_IND
M_SEND_NOTIFYRESP_IND
M_RECEIVE_CONF
M_ACKNOWLEDGE_IND
M_DELIVERY_IND
M_READREPLY
WS Disconnected Event
WS Connected Event
Continue
Switching Protocols
OK
Created
Accepted
Non-Authorative Information
No Content
Marker-WS Reset Content Partial
Content Multiple
Choices Moved
Permanently Moved
Temporarily See
Other
Not Modified
Use Proxy
Temporary Redirect
Bad Request
Unauthorised
Payment Required
Forbidden
Not Found
Method Not Allowed

394 
Marker Category Marker Description
Not Acceptable
Proxy Authentication Required
Request Timeout
Conflict
Gone
Length Required
Precondition Failed Request
Entity Too Large Request
URI Too Large
Unsupported Media Type
Requested Range Not Satisfiable
Expectation Failed
Internal Server Error
Not Implemented Bad
Gateway Service
Unavailable Gateway
Timeout
HTTP Version Not Supported
WDP Error Receive failed WDP
Error Send failed
WDP Error Open failed
WDP Error not opened WDP
Error Out of memory
WDP Error Unhandled exception occured in the upper layer
WTP Error Abort
Marker-WS WTP Error Invalid Tid WTP
Error Unknown Ack WTP
Error Unknown PDU WTP
Error TPI Error WTP Error
Timeout
WTP Error result timeout
WTP Error result retry WTP
Hold-on acknowledge
WTP Error Maximum of invoke requests exceeded
WTP Error Memory allocation error
WTP Error Illegal Data
WTP Error Segmentation and Reassembly is disabled WTP
Abort unknown
WTP Abort protocol error
WTP Abort invalid tid
WTP Abort not implemented cl2
WTP Abort not implemented sar
WTP Abort not implemented uack
WTP Abort WTP version zero WTP
Abort cap temp exceeded WTP
Abort no response
WTP Abort message too large
WSP Abort protocol error WSP
Abort disconnect
WSP Abort suspend
WSP Abort resume WSP
Abort congestion
WSP Abort connect error

User's Guide Appendix 

Marker Category Marker Description
WSP Abort mru exceeded
WSP Abort more exceeded
WSP Abort peer req
WSP Abort net error
WSP Abort user req
WSP Abort user rfs
WSP Abort user pnd
WSP Abort user dcr
WSP Abort user dcu

Not Categorized Markers

MTC Dial
MTC Setup
MTC Connect
MTC ConnectFail
MTC Disconnect
MTC Release
MTC ReleaseError
MTC Break
MTC CallError
MTC SystemRelease
MTC UserRelease
Configuration MOC Dial
Configuration MOC Setup
Configuration MOC Connect
Configuration MOC ConnectFail
Configuration MOC Disconnect
Configuration MOC Release
Configuration MOC ReleaseError
Configuration MOC Break
Configuration MOC CallError
Configuration MOC SystemRelease
Configuration MOC UserRelease
Configuration MTC Dial
Configuration MTC Setup
Configuration MTC Connect
Configuration MTC ConnectFail
Configuration MTC Disconnect
Configuration MTC Release
Configuration MTC ReleaseError
Configuration MTC Break
Configuration MTC CallError
Configuration MTC SystemRelease
Configuration MTC UserRelease
VT MOC Dial

396 
Not Categorized Markers
VT MOC Setup
VT MOC Connect
VT MOC ConnectFail
VT MOC Disconnect
VT MOC Release
VT MOC ReleaseError
VT MOC Break
VT MOC CallError
VT MOC SystemRelease
VT MOC UserRelease
VT MTC Dial
VT MTC Setup
VT MTC Connect
VT MTC ConnectFail
VT MTC Disconnect
VT MTC Release
VT MTC ReleaseError
VT MTC Break
VT MTC CallError
VT MTC SystemRelease
VT MTC UserRelease
VoIP MOC Dial (SIP Invite)
VoIP MOC Connect (SIP Invite OK)
VoIP MOC ConnectFail (Timeout)
VoIP MOC Disconnect (SIP Bye)
VoIP MOC Release (SIP Bye OK)
VoIP MOC ReleaseError (SIP Bye NOK or Timeout)
VoIP MOC Break
VoIP MOC CallError (SIP Invite NOK)
VoIP MOC SystemRelease
VoIP MOC UserRelease
VoIP MTC Dial (SIP Invite)
VoIP MTC Connect (SIP Invite OK)
VoIP MTC ConnectFail
VoIP MTC Disconnect (SIP Bye)
VoIP MTC Release
VoIP MTC ReleaseError (SIP Bye NOK or Timeout)
VoIP MTC Break
VoIP MTC CallError (SIP Invite NOK)
VoIP MTC SystemRelease
VoIP MTC UserRelease

User's Guide Appendix 

8.1.7 TEMS_Collectors_Events
Event Category Event Description
.Common EV-DO 1x Tune-away
EV-DO Dynamic Rate
EV-DO Fixed Rate EV-
DO Island
Narrowband Interference
Polluter
Datalink Failure
EGPRS MS Out Of Memory
PDU Error
Activated
AQM Out of Synch
AQM Synched
Authentication Failure
Cell Reselection
Deactivated Dedicated
Mode Filemark
GPS Position Invalid
GPS Position Valid
Idle Mode
Limited Service Mode Location
Area Update Location Area
Update Failure No reported data
No Service Mode
Packet Mode
RACH Error
Recording Paused
Recording Resumed
Ringing
Routing Area Update Routing
Area Update Failure Rove In
To GAN
Rove In To GAN Failure
Rove In To GAN Redirect
Rove Out From GAN
Rove Out From GAN Failure
Scanning Mode
Silent Call
SMS Error

.Common SMS Received

SMS Sent
More Than 3 Strong SCs
RRC Connection Abnormal Release
RRC Connection Reject
RRC Established
RRC Protocol Error
SHO Procedure Complete
SHO Procedure Complete Without Measurement Control
Access EV-DO Access Failure

398 
Event Category Event Description
EV-DO Access Success
Attach and Detach PS Attach
PS Attach Failure
PS Detach
Call Ending Call End
Dropped Call
Call Setup Results Blocked Call
Call Established
Call Setup
Call Start Call Attempt
Call Attempt Retry
Call Initiation
CDMA Handoff Others Hard Handoff
Idle Handoff
Idle Handoff To Analog
Idle Handoff To CDMA
Idle Handoff To EV-DO
Traffic Handoff To Analog
Traffic Handoff To CDMA
Traffic Handoff To EV-DO
CDMA Soft Handoff Soft Handoff 2-Way
Soft Handoff 3-Way
Soft Handoff 4-Way
Soft Handoff 5-Way
Soft Handoff 6-Way
Soft Handoff Complete
Channel Type Switching Channel Switch R4 to R5 Channel
Switch R4 to R5 Failure Channel
Switch R5 to R4 Channel Switch
R5 to R4 Failure
PS Channel Type Switch Complete
PS Channel Type Switch Failure
Connection EV-DO Connection Failure
EV-DO Connection Success
EV-DO Session Failure
EV-DO Session Success
DCH Rate Switching PS RAB Channel Rate Switch Complete PS
RAB Channel Rate Switch Failure
EVDO_Handoff EV-DO Handoff 1 Active
EV-DO Handoff 2 Actives
EV-DO Handoff 3 Actives
EV-DO Handoff 4 Actives
EV-DO Handoff 5 Actives
EV-DO Handoff 6 Actives
Handover Handover Intracell
Handover Intracell Failure
Handover
Handover Failure
Handover From GAN
Handover From GAN Failure
Handover To GAN

User's Guide Appendix 

Event Category Event Description
Handover To GAN Failure
HS Serving Cell HO
HS Serving Cell HO Failure
Hard Handover Intra-frequency Hard Handover
Intra-frequency Hard Handover Failure
Idle Procedures Inter-frequency Cell Reselection
LTE Attach EUTRAN Attach Complete
LTE Detach EUTRAN Detach Accept
LTE EUTRA Reporting EUTRAN RRC A1 Event
Events EUTRAN RRC A2 Event
EUTRAN RRC A3 Event
EUTRAN RRC A4 Event
EUTRAN RRC A5 Event
LTE Handover EUTRAN Inter-frequency Handover
EUTRAN Inter-frequency Handover Failed
EUTRAN Intra-frequency Handover
EUTRAN Intra-frequency Handover Failed
LTE MIMO MIMO Mode Changed
Measurement Report Measurement Report 1
Events Measurement Report 2
Measurement Report 3
Measurement Report 6
Missing Neighbor Alerts Missing CDMA Neighbor
Missing GSM Neighbor
Missing GSM Neighbor, GSM Symmetry
Missing LTE Neighbor
Missing TD-SCDMA Neighbor
Missing WCDMA Intra-frequency Neighbor, based on DN reporting
Missing WCDMA Neighbor
PDP Activation PDP Context Activation Failure
PDP Context Activation Time
PDP Context Activation
PDP Context Activation Failure 2
PDP Deactivation PDP Context Deactivation
PING Results Ping Timeout
Timer Expiry T200 Expired
T3126 Expired
T3162 Expired
T3168 Expired
T3170 Expired
UE-Reported Failures Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failure
Radio Bearer Setup Failure
Security Mode Failure

Not Categorized Events

Data Activated
Attach Failure
Attach Setup Time
Data Deactivated

400 
Not Categorized Events
DNS Host Name Resolution Failure
DNS Host Name Resolution Time
Email Receive End
Email Receive Error
Email Receive Start
Email Send End
Email Send Error
Email Send Start
FTP Download Data Transfer Cutoff
FTP Download Data Transfer Time
FTP Download End
FTP Download Error
FTP Download IP Service Access Failure
FTP Download IP Service Setup Time
FTP Download Mean Data Rate
FTP Download Service Not Accessible
FTP Download Setup Time
FTP Download Start
FTP Upload Data Transfer Cutoff
FTP Upload Data Transfer Time
FTP Upload End
FTP Upload Error
FTP Upload IP Service Access Failure
FTP Upload IP Service Setup Time
FTP Upload Mean Data Rate
FTP Upload Service Not Accessible
FTP Upload Setup Time
FTP Upload Start
HTTP Data Transfer Cutoff
HTTP Data Transfer Time
HTTP End
HTTP Error
HTTP IP Service Access Failure
HTTP IP Service Setup Time
HTTP Mean Data Rate
HTTP Service Not Accessible
HTTP Setup Time
HTTP Start
MMS Receive Data Transfer Cutoff
MMS Receive Data Transfer Time
MMS Receive End
MMS Receive Error
MMS Receive Start
MMS Retrieval Failure

User's Guide Appendix 

Not Categorized Events
MMS Retrieval Time
MMS Send Data Transfer Cutoff
MMS Send Data Transfer Time
MMS Send End
MMS Send Error
MMS Send Failure
MMS Send Start
MMS Send Time
Network Connect
Network Connect Error
PDP Context Cutoff
Ping End
Ping Error
Ping Roundtrip Time
Ping Start
Streaming End
Streaming Error
Streaming Intermediate Vsqi
Streaming Quality Mtqi
Streaming Quality Vsqi
Streaming Reproduction Cutoff
Streaming Reproduction Start Delay
Streaming Reproduction Start Failure
Streaming Service Access Time
Streaming Service Not Accessible
Streaming Session Cutoff
Streaming Start
Streaming State
TCP Download End
TCP Download Error
TCP Download Start
TCP Handshake Time
TCP Upload End
TCP Upload Error
TCP Upload Start
UDP Download End
UDP Download Error
UDP Download Total Packet Loss
UDP Download Start
UDP Upload End
UDP Upload Error
UDP Upload Total Packet Loss
UDP Upload Start
WAP Activation Failure

402 
Not Categorized Events
WAP Activation Time
WAP End
WAP Error
WAP Page Data Transfer Cutoff
WAP Page Data Transfer Time
WAP Page Mean Data Rate
WAP Page Request Failure
WAP Page Request Time
WAP Portal Access Time
WAP Portal Not Accessible
WAP Site Access Time
WAP Site Not Accessible
WAP Start
Cell Change Order From UTRAN
Cell Change Order From UTRAN Failure
Cell Change Order To UTRAN
Cell Change Order To UTRAN Failure
Cell Reselection From UTRAN
Cell Reselection To UTRAN
Compressed Mode Entered
Compressed Mode Exited
Handover From UTRAN
Handover From UTRAN Failure
Handover To UTRAN
Handover To UTRAN Failure
Baton Handover
Baton Handover Failure
Hard Handover
Hard Handover Failure
Inter-frequency Handover
Inter-frequency Handover Failure
Radio Link Addition
Radio Link Addition Failure
Radio Link Removal
Radio Link Removal Failure
Radio Link Replacement
Radio Link Replacement Failure

User's Guide Appendix 

8.2 Enabling FILESTREAM in SQL Server 2008 R2
You must enable FILESTREAM on the Database Engine instance of the SQL Server. The
following steps describe how to enable FILESTREAM by using the SQL Server
Configuration Manager.
1. From the Start menu, go to All Programs | Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 |
Configuration Tools | SQL Server Configuration Manager.
2. In the list of services, right-click SQL Server Services, and select Open from the
context menu.

3. In the SQL Server Configuration Manager snap-in, locate the instance of SQL Server
on which you want to enable FILESTREAM.
4. Right-click the instance, and select Properties from the context menu. The SQL Server
Properties dialog will be displayed.

404 
User's Guide Appendix 
 5. Go to the FILESTREAM tab. Make the settings described below, and then click
Apply.

 Select the Enable FILESTREAM for Transact-SQL access check box.

 If you want to read and write FILESTREAM data from Windows, select Enable
FILESTREAM for file I/O streaming access. Enter the applicable name in
the Windows Share Name box.
 If remote clients must access the FILESTREAM data that is stored on this share,
select Allow remote clients to have streaming access to
FILESTREAM data.

6. In SQL Server Management Studio, click New Query to display the Query
Editor.
7. In the Query Editor, enter the following Transact-SQL code:

EXEC sp_configure filestream_access_level, 2

RECONFIGURE

8. Click Execute.
9. Restart the SQL Server service.

406 
User's Guide Appendix 
Index I
Images/Maps 76
A Intellectual Property Protection 300
Add Sources From File 80
Add SQL Server – Log Files Database K
337 KeyInfo Settings 84
Add SQL Server – Statistic Database KeyInfo Settings 316
336 Keywords 315
Antenna Pattern Data 352
API 358 L
Attributes 324
Label Display Options 95
C Layer 3 Information Elements 209
Legend display options 118 Listing
Calculate Area Statistics 268 Filters 46
Cell Configuration Editor 361
Cell Site Icon Size 95 Coverage M
Map Import 357
Message Flow Diagram 84
D
N
Data Filters 44
Database Browser 261 Neighbor List IntelliSense Tool 96
Database Cleanup 263
Database License Information 296 O
Dataset Route Direction 94 Default
Statistic Database 335 Detail View OLAP Cube Concept 265
84 Online GIS Data Sources 80
Direction 94
Display Cell Sites 95 P
Pick Serving Sector Tool 96 Plot
E Band Auto Generator 308
Edit Neighbor List Tool 96
Embed condition filter 212 R
Export Options 300 Remove Cell Sites from Display 96
Render settings 112
F Repetition in Report 225
Filtering Options 44 Repetition Key 206, 283
Route Direction 94
Functions Editor 169

S
G
Script Editor 169
GetGlobal flag 206
Search Script Results 47, 48
GIS data files 354 GIS
Sector Coverage tool 97 Sector
Data Sources 80
Selector tool 97 SetGlobal flag
GIS element display options 118
206
Global Mapper 80
Spatial Data Products and Formats 354
Spider Movement tool 115
H Spider Movement Tool 94
Handover Matrix 358 Statistic Dashboard 275
HO Matrix 358 Statistic Data Cube View 269

User's Guide Index 

T
TerraServer Images/Maps 76
Tooltips 89

V
Vector Map Detail Loading 112

410 